Volume 6 Electrical Equipment (Issuing Version of 27-01-2011)

Socialist Republic of Vietnam
E
E
V
V
N
N

Vietnam Electricity

N
N
B
B
T
T
P
P
C
C
Ninh Binh Thermal
Power Joint Stock
Company

THAI BINH THERMAL POWER PLANT
TWO (2) X 300 MW
Thai Binh Province

BIDDING DOCUMENT

Volume 6 of 12

Electrical Equipment

OWNER CONSULTANT

VIETNAM ELECTRICITY
18 Tran Nguyen Han Street
Hanoi, Vietnam
FICHTNER GmbH & Co KG
in association with
TEPSCO and PECC1

JANUARY 2011
THAI BINH THERMAL POWER PLANT PROJECT 2X300 MW VOLUME 6

1
Table of Content
6 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT ...................................................... 9
6.1 GENERAL ..................................................................................................... 9
6.2 GENERATORS AND AUXILIARIES ...................................................... 10
6.2.1 GENERATOR DESIGN ...................................................................................................... 10
6.2.1.1 Rating ........................................................................................................................... 10
6.2.1.2 Characteristics .............................................................................................................. 10
6.2.1.3 Voltage and Frequency ................................................................................................ 10
6.2.2 STATOR ........................................................................................................................... 11
6.2.2.1 Casing .......................................................................................................................... 11
6.2.2.2 Core .............................................................................................................................. 11
6.2.2.3 Winding........................................................................................................................ 11
6.2.2.4 Terminals ..................................................................................................................... 12
6.2.2.5 Connection to Busbars and Earthing Transformer ....................................................... 12
6.2.3 ROTOR............................................................................................................................. 12
6.2.3.1 Winding........................................................................................................................ 12
6.2.3.2 Shaft ............................................................................................................................. 13
6.2.3.3 Slip Rings ..................................................................................................................... 13
6.2.4 GENERATOR EARTHING ................................................................................................. 13
6.2.4.1 Neutral Point ................................................................................................................ 13
6.2.4.2 Casing .......................................................................................................................... 13
6.2.4.3 Turbine/Generator Shaft Voltage/Current Control ...................................................... 14
6.2.5 GENERATOR CONDITION MONITORING ........................................................................ 15
6.2.5.1 Core Monitor ................................................................................................................ 15
6.2.5.2 Rotor Shorted Turns Detection Coil ............................................................................ 15
6.2.5.3 End Winding Vibration Sensors .................................................................................. 15
6.2.5.4 High Speed Electronic Fault Recorder ........................................................................ 15
6.2.5.5 Partial Discharge Monitoring ....................................................................................... 15
6.2.6 GENERATOR EXCITATION .............................................................................................. 15
6.2.6.1 General ......................................................................................................................... 15
6.2.6.2 Performance ................................................................................................................. 16
6.2.6.3 Static Thyristors Excitation System ............................................................................. 17
6.2.6.4 Supervision .................................................................................................................. 18
6.2.7 EXCITATION CONTROL SYSTEM .................................................................................... 18
6.2.7.1 Construction and Reliability ........................................................................................ 18
6.2.7.2 Characteristics .............................................................................................................. 20
6.2.7.3 Supplementary Controls............................................................................................... 20
6.2.7.4 Supplementary Protection ............................................................................................ 23
6.2.7.5 Manual Excitation Control ........................................................................................... 23
6.2.7.6 Test Facilities ............................................................................................................... 24
6.2.7.7 Sources for Generator Voltage Signals ........................................................................ 25
6.2.7.8 Performance Data ......................................................................................................... 25

2
6.2.8 GENERATOR COOLING ................................................................................................... 25
6.2.8.1 Hydrogen Cooling System ........................................................................................... 26
6.2.8.2 Generator Cooling Board ............................................................................................. 27
6.2.9 HYDROGEN SEALS AND SEAL OIL SYSTEM ................................................................... 27
6.2.10 GENERATOR CASING PURGING SYSTEM ..................................................................... 28
6.2.11 TEMPERATURE MEASUREMENT ................................................................................... 28
6.2.12 GENERATOR CURRENT AND VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS ............................................ 29
6.2.13 GENERATOR FIRE PROTECTION .................................................................................. 29
6.3 AC AUXILIARY SYSTEM ........................................................................ 30
6.3.1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION .................................................................................................... 30
6.3.1.1 General Technical Requirements ................................................................................. 31
6.3.1.2 Generator Circuit Breaker Scheme .............................................................................. 32
6.3.1.3 Loadings and Transformer Ratings .............................................................................. 33
6.3.1.4 System Configuration Interlocking .............................................................................. 35
6.3.1.5 Automatic Switching ................................................................................................... 36
6.3.1.6 Circuit Allocations ....................................................................................................... 36
6.3.1.7 Load Identification and Measurement ......................................................................... 37
6.3.1.8 Fault Levels .................................................................................................................. 37
6.3.1.9 Voltage Distribution and Regulation ........................................................................... 37
6.3.2 TRANSFORMERS .............................................................................................................. 38
6.3.2.1 220/19kV Generator Transformer................................................................................ 38
6.3.2.2 19/6.6-6.6kV Unit Transformers.................................................................................. 39
6.3.2.3 220/6.6-6.6kV Station Transformer ............................................................................. 40
6.3.2.4 6.6kV/400V Unit Auxiliary Transformers & Station Auxiliary Transformers ........... 40
6.3.2.5 6.6kV/400V Emergency Transformes ......................................................................... 41
6.3.3 SWITCHGEAR .................................................................................................................. 42
6.3.3.1 General ......................................................................................................................... 42
6.3.3.2 Medium Voltage Switchboards (6.6kV) ...................................................................... 42
6.3.3.3 Low Voltage Switchboards (400V) ............................................................................. 44
6.3.3.4 Drawings and Design Documents ................................................................................ 45
6.3.4 ELECTRICAL PROTECTION AND METERING .................................................................. 46
6.3.4.1 General ......................................................................................................................... 46
6.3.4.2 Design Criteria for Generator Protection Scheme ....................................................... 50
6.3.4.3 Design Criteria for 220/6.6-6.6kV Station Transformer Protection ............................ 54
6.3.4.4 Design Criteria for 6.6kV Distribution System (Unit Auxiliary and Station) ............. 55
6.3.4.5 Design Criteria for 400V Distribution System (Unit Auxiliary, Emergency, Station
Auxiliary) ................................................................................................................................. 56
6.3.4.6 Design Criteria for 400V MCCs (Unit Auxiliary and Station Auxiliary Services) ..... 57
6.3.4.7 Drawings and design data ............................................................................................ 57
6.3.4.8 Electrical Synchronizing Facilities .............................................................................. 58
6.3.5 CABLING WORKS AND MISCELLANEOUS REQUIREMENTS ........................................... 59
6.3.5.1 General ......................................................................................................................... 59
6.3.5.2 Information to be provided .......................................................................................... 60

3
6.4 DC SYSTEM ................................................................................................ 61
6.4.1 GENERAL ........................................................................................................................ 61
6.4.2 BATTERIES, CHARGERS, INVERTERS AND UPS MODULES ............................................ 62
6.4.3 REQUIREMENTS FOR BATTERY ROOMS ......................................................................... 63
6.4.4 BATTERY INSTALLATION SAFETY REQUIREMENTS ...................................................... 63
6.4.5 DRAWINGS TO BE PROVIDED BY THE CONTRACTOR ..................................................... 64
6.5 ELECTRICAL PLANT .............................................................................. 65
6.5.1 PHASE ISOLATED BUSBAR (PIB) SYSTEMS .................................................................... 65
6.5.1.1 Extent of Supply .......................................................................................................... 66
6.5.1.2 Busbars ......................................................................................................................... 66
6.5.1.3 Electrical Characteristics ............................................................................................. 67
6.5.1.4 Construction ................................................................................................................. 67
6.5.1.5 Ductwork...................................................................................................................... 68
6.5.1.6 Aluminium Welding .................................................................................................... 69
6.5.1.7 Support Structures, Framework and Brackets ............................................................. 69
6.5.1.8 Busbar Support Insulators ............................................................................................ 69
6.5.1.9 Dished Spring ("Belleville") Washers ......................................................................... 69
6.5.1.10 Current Transformers ................................................................................................. 70
6.5.1.11 Voltage Transformers ................................................................................................ 70
6.5.1.12 Generator Neutral Earthing Transformers ................................................................. 72
6.5.1.13 Earthing Resistors ...................................................................................................... 72
6.5.1.14 CT/VT Marshalling Cubicles ..................................................................................... 73
6.5.1.15 Magnetic Screens ....................................................................................................... 73
6.5.1.16 Earthing Switches ...................................................................................................... 74
6.5.2 GENERATOR CIRCUIT BREAKER .................................................................................... 75
6.5.2.1 Circuit Breaker, Isolator and Grounding Switches - General Description .................. 75
6.5.2.2 Circuit Breaker Operating Mechanism ........................................................................ 76
6.5.2.3 Trip Coils ..................................................................................................................... 77
6.5.2.4 Closing Coil ................................................................................................................. 77
6.5.2.5 Isolating Switch Operating Mechanism ....................................................................... 77
6.5.2.6 Grounding Switch Operating Mechanism ................................................................... 77
6.5.2.7 Essential requirements ................................................................................................. 78
6.5.2.8 General Design Considerations.................................................................................... 79
6.5.2.9 Control Philosophy ...................................................................................................... 80
6.5.2.10 Circuit Breaker Control Cubicle ................................................................................ 80
6.5.3 DIESEL GENERATOR ....................................................................................................... 80
6.5.3.1 General ......................................................................................................................... 80
6.5.3.2 Type of Plant ................................................................................................................ 81
6.5.3.3 Design and Selection.................................................................................................... 81
6.5.3.4 Rating of Plant ............................................................................................................. 81
6.5.3.5 Operating Philosophy................................................................................................... 82
6.5.3.6 In Service Testing ........................................................................................................ 83
6.5.3.7 D.C. Auxiliaries for the Diesel Generators .................................................................. 83
6.5.3.8 Extent of Supply .......................................................................................................... 84

4
6.5.3.9 Particulars of Plant ....................................................................................................... 85
6.6 HIGH VOLTAGE SWITCHYARD ........................................................ 100
6.6.1 GENERAL ...................................................................................................................... 100
6.6.1.1 Scope of Works .......................................................................................................... 100
6.6.1.2 Design Parameters ..................................................................................................... 101
6.6.1.3 Insulation Co-ordination ............................................................................................ 103
6.6.1.4 Training ...................................................................................................................... 105
6.6.2 SWITCHGEAR ................................................................................................................ 105
6.6.2.1 General ....................................................................................................................... 105
6.6.2.2 Circuit Breakers ......................................................................................................... 109
6.6.2.4 Voltage Transformers ................................................................................................ 112
6.6.2.5 Disconnectors and Earth Switches ............................................................................. 113
6.6.2.6 Insulators .................................................................................................................... 115
6.6.2.7 Surge Arresters........................................................................................................... 115
6.6.2.8 Tariff Metering........................................................................................................... 117
6.6.2.9 Conductors and Busbars ............................................................................................ 117
6.6.3 TECHNICAL SERVICE .................................................................................................... 117
6.6.3.1 Protection Systems ..................................................................................................... 117
6.6.3.2 Protection Policy ........................................................................................................ 118
6.6.3.3 General Specification for Protection Equipment ....................................................... 119
6.6.3.4 Specific Requirements for Protection Equipment ...................................................... 120
6.6.3.5 Distance Protection for 220kV Transmission Lines .................................................. 121
6.6.3.6 Busbar Protection ....................................................................................................... 121
6.6.4 EQUIPMENT LAYOUT IN THE SWITCHYARD .................................................................. 122
6.6.4.1 220kV Equipment ...................................................................................................... 122
6.6.5 MEASUREMENT, CONTROL AND PROTECTION SYSTEM ............................................... 122
6.6.5.1 General ....................................................................................................................... 122
6.6.5.2 Switchyard control system ......................................................................................... 122
6.6.5.3 Protection - Automatic equipment ............................................................................. 127
6.6.6 AUXILIARY SYSTEMS .................................................................................................... 129
6.6.6.1 AC - DC auxiliary power sources .............................................................................. 129
6.6.6.2 Charger ....................................................................................................................... 130
6.6.6.3 Battery ........................................................................................................................ 130
6.6.7 LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM ............................................................................... 130
6.6.8 ELECTRICAL WORKS ................................................................................................... 130
6.6.8.1 Extent of Work ........................................................................................................... 130
6.6.8.2 General Specification ................................................................................................. 131
6.6.8.3 Busbars and Connections ........................................................................................... 132
6.6.8.4 Kiosks ........................................................................................................................ 134
6.6.8.5 L.V. Cabling............................................................................................................... 134
6.6.8.6 Earthing System ......................................................................................................... 136
6.6.8.7 Switchyard Lighting................................................................................................... 137
6.6.8.8 L.V. AC Switchyard Power Outlets ........................................................................... 137

5
6.6.8.9 Building Equipment ................................................................................................... 138
6.6.8.10 220V DC Distribution Boards ................................................................................. 138
6.6.8.11 400/230V AC Distribution Boards .......................................................................... 138
6.7 COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS ............................................................ 140
6.7.1 SCOPE OF SUPPLY ......................................................................................................... 140
6.7.1.1 SDH (Synchronous Digital Hierarchy) telecommunication system for connecting the
Project to the national power network. .................................................................................. 140
6.7.1.2 Inside-Plant Communications System ....................................................................... 140
6.7.2 EQUIPMENT OPERATING CONDITIONS ........................................................................ 141
6.7.2.1 Operating Conditions ................................................................................................. 141
6.7.2.2 Equipment Racks and Cubicles ................................................................................. 142
6.7.2.3 Equipment Alarms ..................................................................................................... 142
6.7.2.4 Communication Room Facilities ............................................................................... 142
6.7.2.5 Grounding for telecommunication equipment ........................................................... 144
6.7.2.6 Lightning resistance ................................................................................................... 144
6.7.3 SDH TELECOMMUNICATION SYSTEM ......................................................................... 145
6.7.3.1 Overview .................................................................................................................... 145
6.7.3.2 Optical Fibres and Accessories .................................................................................. 145
6.7.3.3 Equipment .................................................................................................................. 147
6.7.3.4 PCM Multiplexer ....................................................................................................... 148
6.7.3.5 Teleprotection ............................................................................................................ 148
6.7.3.6 Rack 19 Type ........................................................................................................... 149
6.7.3.7 DDF/MDF Cubicle .................................................................................................... 149
6.7.3.8 Modem ....................................................................................................................... 149
6.7.3.9 Power Supply ............................................................................................................. 150
6.7.4 PRIVATE AUTOMATIC BRANCH EXCHANGE (PABX) SYSTEM ................................... 152
6.7.4.1 Scope of Supply ......................................................................................................... 152
6.7.4.2 Particular Requirements of Main PABX ................................................................... 152
6.7.4.3 Console Table ............................................................................................................ 153
6.7.4.4 Subscriber Network ................................................................................................... 153
6.7.4.5 Back-up PABX .......................................................................................................... 153
6.7.4.6 Telephones (Main and Back-up) ................................................................................ 154
6.7.4.7 Telephones Cable ....................................................................................................... 154
6.7.4.8 Intermediate Distribution Frames (IDFs) and Final Distribution Points (FDPs) ....... 154
6.7.4.9 Telephones Sockets .................................................................................................... 154
6.7.4.10 Location of Telephones............................................................................................ 155
6.7.5 PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEM (PA SYSTEM) ..................................................................... 155
6.7.5.1 Scope of Supply ......................................................................................................... 155
6.7.5.2 Technical Requirement .............................................................................................. 156
6.7.5.3 Location of Loudspeakers .......................................................................................... 157
6.7.6 SUPERVISION CAMERA SYSTEM ................................................................................... 157
6.7.7 UHF SYSTEMS .............................................................................................................. 157
6.7.7.1 Two-Way Radio System ............................................................................................ 157
6.7.7.2 Pager System .............................................................................................................. 158

6
6.7.8 LOCAL AREA NETWORK .............................................................................................. 159
6.7.9 INSTALLATION AND CABLING ...................................................................................... 160
6.7.9.1 Power Cables ............................................................................................................. 160
6.7.9.2 Miscellaneous Equipment Racks ............................................................................... 160
6.7.9.3 Other Equipment ........................................................................................................ 160
6.8 TEST AND INSPECTION ....................................................................... 161
6.8.1 APPLICATION ................................................................................................................ 161
6.8.2 GENERATOR .................................................................................................................. 161
6.8.2.1 Test and Inspection at Workshop ............................................................................... 161
6.8.2.2 Test and Inspection at Site ......................................................................................... 163
6.8.3 EXCITATION SYSTEM ................................................................................................... 164
6.8.3.1 Test and Inspection at workshop ................................................................................ 164
6.8.3.2 Test and Inspection at Site ......................................................................................... 165
6.8.4 AC AUXILIARY SYSTEM ............................................................................................... 166
6.8.4.1 Unit Load Power Consumption ................................................................................. 166
6.8.4.2 Transformers .............................................................................................................. 166
6.8.4.3 Switchgear.................................................................................................................. 168
6.8.4.4 Electrical Protection and Metering ............................................................................ 169
6.8.5 CABLING, WIRING AND TERMINALS ............................................................................ 169
6.8.6 EARTHING AND LIGHTNING PROTECTION ................................................................... 170
6.8.7 MISCELLANEOUS POWER AND LIGHTING ................................................................... 170
6.8.8 DC AUXILIARY SYSTEM ............................................................................................... 170
6.8.9 PHASE ISOLATED BUSBARS .......................................................................................... 170
6.8.9.1 Busbar Assemblies ..................................................................................................... 170
6.8.9.3 Distribution Type Earthing Transformers .................................................................. 171
6.8.9.4 Neutral Earthing Resistor Tests ................................................................................. 171
6.8.9.5 Earthing Switches ...................................................................................................... 172
6.8.9.6 Aluminium Welds ...................................................................................................... 172
6.8.9.7 Temperature Rise of Busbars and Evaluation of Losses ........................................... 172
6.8.9.8 Aluminium Welding Tests ......................................................................................... 175
6.8.10 GENERATOR CIRCUIT BREAKERS .............................................................................. 176
6.8.10.1 Subcontractors .......................................................................................................... 176
6.8.10.2 Complete Circuit Breakers - Design Tests ............................................................... 176
6.8.10.3 Complete Circuit Breakers - Production Tests ........................................................ 176
6.8.10.4 Tests at Site .............................................................................................................. 176
6.8.11 DIESEL GENERATORS ................................................................................................. 177
6.8.11.1 Works Tests ............................................................................................................. 177
6.8.11.2 Site Tests .................................................................................................................. 177
6.8.11.3 Commissioning Tests ............................................................................................... 178
6.8.12 HIGH VOLTAGE SWITCHYARD SYSTEM ...................................................................... 178
6.8.12.1 Test and Commissioning.......................................................................................... 178

7
6.8.12.2 Pre-commissioning Tests ......................................................................................... 178
6.8.12.3 Commissioning Tests ............................................................................................... 179
6.8.13 COMMUNICATION SYSTEM ......................................................................................... 179
6.8.13.1 Factory Tests ............................................................................................................ 179
6.8.13.2 Type Tests ................................................................................................................ 179
6.8.13.3 Routine Tests ........................................................................................................... 180
6.8.13.4 Site Tests .................................................................................................................. 181
6.8.13.5 Power Supply ........................................................................................................... 181
6.8.13.6 Alarm Panel ............................................................................................................. 181
6.8.13.7 Exchanges and Telephones ...................................................................................... 181
6.8.13.8 30 Day Test .............................................................................................................. 181
6.9 COAL HANDLING PLANT ............................................................................ 182
6.9.1 LOW VOLTAGE SWITCHBOARDS AND SWITCHGEAR ................................................... 182
6.9.2 ELECTRICAL FIELD DEVICES - SAFETY AND CONTROL .............................................. 182
6.9.2.1 General ....................................................................................................................... 182
6.9.2.2 Enclosures .................................................................................................................. 182
6.9.2.3 Limit Switches ........................................................................................................... 182
6.9.2.4 Tail Pulley Coal Build-up Switches ........................................................................... 182
6.9.2.5 Belt Tracking Switches .............................................................................................. 182
6.9.2.6 Emergency Stop Switches .......................................................................................... 182
6.9.2.7 Ultrasonics ................................................................................................................. 183
6.9.3 ELECTRICAL PROTECTION EQUIPMENT ...................................................................... 183
6.9.4 LOCAL CONTROL STATIONS ........................................................................................ 183
6.9.5 ACTUATORS FOR RETRACTABLE SKIRTS, GATES, SWING CHUTES, SHUTTLE HEADS
................................................................................................................................................ 183
6.9.6 MOTORS ........................................................................................................................ 184
6.9.7 SWITCH ROOM VENTILATION PLANT .......................................................................... 184
6.9.8 SWITCH ROOM LAYOUT ............................................................................................... 185
6.9.9 CABLING ....................................................................................................................... 186
6.9.10 CONTROL SYSTEM ...................................................................................................... 186
6.9.11 STACKER, RECLAIMER AND STACKER/RECLAIMER - ELECTRICAL ......................... 186
6.9.12 SHIP/BARGE UNLOADER - ELECTRICAL .................................................................... 187
6.9.13 SAMPLING SYSTEM - ELECTRICAL ............................................................................ 189
6.9.14 WEIGHERS - ELECTRICAL .......................................................................................... 190
6.9.15 TRAMP IRON MAGNETS AND METAL DETECTORS .................................................... 190
6.9.16 HYDRAULIC SYSTEMS - ELECTRICAL ........................................................................ 190
6.9.17 CABLE REEL SYSTEMS ............................................................................................... 191
6.9.18 CONTRACT DRAWINGS ............................................................................................... 191
6.10 SPARE PARTS ........................................................................................ 192

8
6.10.1 GENERAL .................................................................................................................... 192
6.10.2 ESSENTIAL SPARES ..................................................................................................... 192
6.10.2.1 Generator .................................................................................................................. 192
6.10.2.2 Excitation System .................................................................................................... 192
6.10.2.3 Hydrogen Cooling System ....................................................................................... 193
6.10.2.4 Seal Oil System ........................................................................................................ 193
6.10.2.5 Medium (6.6kV) and Low (400V) voltage system .................................................. 193
6.10.2.6 Control Devices ....................................................................................................... 194
6.10.2.7 Cables ....................................................................................................................... 194
6.10.2.8 High Voltage Switchyard system............................................................................. 194
6.10.2.9 Communication systems .......................................................................................... 196
6.10.2.10 Coal Handling Plant ............................................................................................... 197
6.10.3 OPTIONAL SPARES ...................................................................................................... 200
6.10.3.1 Generator Circuit Breaker Scheme (GCB) .............................................................. 201
6.10.4 SPECIAL AND MAINTENANCE TOOLS ......................................................................... 201
6.10.4.1 Generator .................................................................................................................. 201
6.10.4.2 Generator Circuit Breaker Scheme (GCB): ............................................................. 201
6.10.5 CONSUMABLES ............................................................................................................ 201
6.10.5.1 High Voltage Switchyard system............................................................................. 202
6.10.5.2 Generator Circuit Breaker Scheme (GCB): ............................................................. 202
APPENDICES ................................................................................ 203
APPENDIX 1: .................................................................................................. 203
APPENDIX 2: .................................................................................................. 216
APPENDIX 3: .................................................................................................. 240
APPENDIX 4: .................................................................................................. 252


9
6 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
6.1 GENERAL
The Project will be built to supply power to the national power system.
This section details the technical requirements for the engineering, supply,
manufacture, testing, inspection and commissioning of the main electrical Plant
systems.
The General Conditions and General Technical Conditions shall be covered Volumes
1 and 2
The Contractor shall refer to the Circular of MOIT No.12/2010/TT-BCT dated April
15, 2010 for his design.
The Contractor shall supply complete electric equipment and associated auxiliaries
including but not limited to the following:
1. Two generators, neutral earthing transformers and ancillary equipment.
2. Two Generator Circuit Breakers (GCBs), Phase Isolated Busbars (PIBs) and
ancillary equipment.
3. Two sets of three-phase generator transformers and ancillary equipment.
4. All transformers (unit and station) and ancillary equipment.
5. All 6.6kV switchboards (unit and station).
6. All 400V switchboards (unit, station, actuator boards, soot-blowers etc.).
7. All 6.6kV and 400V motors.
8. Protection, synchronizing and metering systems.
9. 220V DC system, batteries, chargers, and UPS system.
10. Diesel generator system.
11. Cabling.
12. High voltage switchyard.
13. Communication System.
14. Miscellaneous power and lighting system.
15. Earthing and lightning protection.


10
6.2 GENERATORS AND AUXILIARIES
6.2.1 Generator Design
The generator shall be of the horizontal, three phase synchronous machine, with
rotating field, cylindrical rotor and totally enclosed, shall be designed and
manufactured to comply with this Specification, IEC 60034-3 and the relevant
other parts of IEC 60034, and shall be suitable in every respect for operation in
the Vietnamese supply system in accordance with the specified conditions which
follow.
The generator and auxiliaries shall also be designed and manufactured to follow,
but not limited to, the below listed relevant standards.
IEC 60085: Electrical insulationthermal evaluation and designation
IEC 60146: Semiconductor Converters
IEC 60076-11: Dry-type power transformers
IEC 60044: Instrument transformers
IEC 62053: Electricity metering equipment
6.2.1.1 Rating
The generator shall be continuously rated so as to enable a net output of 300 MW
after deduction of excitation power and main oil pump power (if not driven by the
Turbine-generator shaft) under the following conditions.
(1) 0.85 lagging power factor at any voltage between 100% and 105% of rated
terminal voltage.
(2) 0.9 leading power factor and 95% rated terminal voltage.
6.2.1.2 Characteristics
The generator shall be designed to have the following characteristics:
(1) A short circuit ratio of not less than 0.5.
(2) A direct axis transient reactance (saturated) of not more than 35% on rated MVA.
(3) The overload ability of Generator is 1.5 rating current in at least 30 sec.
These limits shall not be exceeded when the applicable tolerances are taken into
account. The applicable tolerances shall not be greater than that allowed by IEC
60034-3.
A generator capability curve is required to be provided as part of the bid, showing
expected generator MW/MVAR operating limits at rated hydrogen pressure and
lower.
6.2.1.3 Voltage and Frequency
(1) The generator shall be rated for 50 Hz operation.

11
(2) Preferred value for generator voltage is 19kV but it may be nominated by the
Contractor to optimize the design of all equipment operating at generator voltage.
Note: The auxiliary power system design calculations and equipment voltage
(including transformer and tap changer) have been based on a voltage
of 19kV. The Contractor has to review power system design and
equipment specification to suit.
(3) The generator and generator transformer tap changer will be operated to maintain
at the HV busbars a scheduled voltage which will be varied from time to time.
Steady-state generator terminal voltage will vary continuously within a range of
plus and minus 5% of rated voltage at any output within the generator capability,
to satisfy these HV conditions.
6.2.2 Stator
6.2.2.1 Casing
(1) The casing of the stator shall be of fabricated construction gas-tight, and
sufficiently robust to withstand the maximum forces set up in the event of an
explosion of a hydrogen and air mixture in the casing.
(2) Access into the generator casing for inspection of stator end windings shall be by
removal of bolted covers and shall not require the removal of coolers or other
ancillary equipment.
(3) Liquid drains shall be provided from the casing, suitably enlarged, and connected
to plates bolted to the generator frame so that on disconnection of any external
drain there will be a hand hole for clearing material which may lodge in the
internal drain. Liquid detectors, fitted with alarm contacts, shall be fitted in each
separate drain and not in a common line.
(4) It is acceptable for the casing and core to be separate or integral according to
suitability for transport and heavy lift arrangements.
6.2.2.2 Core
(1) The stator core shall be made up of high permeability low loss stampings, bonded
and tightly clamped together to reduce noise and vibration to a practicable
minimum. Attention shall be given to the prevention of excessive 100 Hz
vibration being transmitted to the generator casing, foundations, pipes or
associated equipment. The Contractor shall provide a description of the bonding
used to prevent vibration of the end teeth, during the course of the Contract.
(2) Should the proposed method of transport require a beam to be threaded through
the bore of the stator core then the full length of the bore shall be lined with a
tube of leatheroid or similar material to prevent damage to the laminations during
insertion and removal of the beam, and during transport.
6.2.2.3 Winding
(1) The winding shall be of an approved type in which replacement of a damaged
portion is practicable. The winding insulation shall be of Class F temperature
classification and of adequate thickness to withstand the voltage stresses which

12
may occur in service. The part of the coil passing through the core slots shall be
varnished with semi-conducting varnish, or have some other type of semi-
conducting layer, in order to distribute in a uniform manner, the voltage gradient,
to eliminate potential differences between the slot walls and the coil surfaces.
Details shall be given during the course of the Contract on details of the winding
and of the insulating materials proposed. The limit of winding insulation
temperature rise shall not exceed that nominated in IEC 60034-1 for Class B
insulation.
(2) The winding shall be effectively braced and blocked to withstand short circuits at
the terminals under any operating condition and to prevent vibration which may
lead to gas leakage. Materials liable to shrink in the course of time and on
heating shall not be used for packing and wedging, and the general construction
of the stator and the bracing of the winding overhaul shall be such as to provide
adequate cooling surface and avoid "hot spots".
(3) Provision shall be made for preventing the formation of condensation during
shutdown periods.
6.2.2.4 Terminals
The windings shall be star connected and the ends of each phase of the stator
windings shall be brought to terminals accessible from a space in the foundation
block. Adequate provision shall be made in the design of the foundation block for
accommodation of the metering, protective and other Current Transformers (CTs)
required for operating the unit. It may be taken that the CTs will not be in contact
with the terminals and will be supported independently of the generator. Creepage
distances shall be equivalent to those specified in IEC 60137 for medium polluted
atmospheres as defined in IEC 60815. Connection boxes must be of a nonferrous
material to hinder overheating due to eddy currents.
6.2.2.5 Connection to Busbars and Earthing Transformer
(1) On the line side, provision shall be made for disconnection of the generator from
the PIBs to enable the establishment of safety clearances between the two Plants
during high voltage testing of either.
(2) On the star point side, provision shall be made for disconnecting the star point
from the generator terminals to enable the establishment of safety clearances
between the generator and the earthing transformer and to enable testing of
individual phase windings.
6.2.3 Rotor
6.2.3.1 Winding
The design of the rotor shall be such that earth and interturn faults in the windings
will not occur in service. Insulation shall be of Class F temperature classification.
The limit of winding insulation temperature rise shall not exceed that nominated
in IEC 60034-1 for Class B insulation.
The Contractor shall incorporate all latest design features to avoid permanent
deformation of the winding during service. Packing blocks used in the rotor

13
winding shall be of approved material and entirely suitable for the high
temperatures and mechanical forces occurring in large rotors. Particular attention
shall be given to the insulating and securing of the rotor winding connection leads
to avoid vibration and the possible failure of either the lead or its insulation.
6.2.3.2 Shaft
(1) The rotor shall be made of one solid forging with high mechanical strength
characteristics. The forging shall be fully examined by radiographic and
ultrasonic techniques to determine its soundness.
(2) The Contractor shall incorporate suitable features in the rotor design to reduce the
variation in rotor stiffness about the direct and quadrature axes, and thus
minimize the resultant twice-per-revolution vibration levels. During the course of
the Contract, design calculations shall be furnished to show that a rotor critical
speed will not exist in the region of twice rated speed.
(3) The shaft shall have a reference mark of known relationship to the location of the
magnetic poles which can be detected in-service for synchronism of shaft position
with portable test equipment. The mark shall be located such that it is always
accessible notwithstanding shaft expansion and provision shall be made for
mounting of a detecting device.
6.2.3.3 Slip Rings
Slip rings where necessary shall be mounted on the shaft in a separate enclosure at
the outboard end of the generator.
6.2.4 Generator Earthing
6.2.4.1 Neutral Point
The generator stator winding, which will be star connected, shall be suitable for
earthing through a single-phase distribution-type double-wound transformer, the
secondary winding of which will be shunted by a non-inductive resistance. The
Contractor shall supply details of the capacitance to earth of the stator windings,
which is necessary for selection of a final resistance value, as part of the
commissioning report. The Contractor shall nominate the expected value of
capacitance.
6.2.4.2 Casing
(1) Earthing terminals or bolts shall be provided at two positions on the stator
bedplate for earthing the generator casing. These positions shall be connected at
two different locations on the station earthing system.
(2) Major turbine-generator components shall be electrically bonded together and
connected to the generator earth terminal to provide a low impedance return path
for possible radio frequency (RF) voltage transients generated by thyristor
switching in the generator static excitation circuit.

14
6.2.4.3 Turbine/Generator Shaft Voltage/Current Control
(1) The shaft shall be earthed at one position between LP turbine and generator
bearings by suitable multiple (at least two) shaft earthing devices.
The shaft earthing devices shall be protected from the effects of oil, dust, steam
and other contaminants.
Each shaft earthing device shall have 0.01 to 0.1 ohm in-service contact
resistance to the shaft at the rated speed and within permissible shaft vibration
levels.
The contact element of each shaft earthing device shall be able to be replaced
with the generator in service without safety risk either to a person or to the
machine
(2) Each shaft earthing device shall be connected to the turbine/generator earth
bonding conductors or lower bearing case via suitably sized low impedance
current measuring shunt.
(3) The generator outboard bearings and preferably HP turbine bearing No. 1 shall be
electrically insulated from the generator earth.
(4) Shaft voltage test terminals grouped in one single easily accessible location shall
be provided for checking the voltages and insulation integrity for the following:
(a) Insulated bearings
(b) Insulated hydrogen seals
(c) Insulated oil piping
(d) Other insulated components as necessary.
(5) A continuous on-line shaft earthing monitor shall be provided as an integral part
of the shaft earthing system.
The monitor shall measure earthing current and shaft voltage, and display these at
a local panel adjacent to the generator. It shall also activate at least one "clean"
changeover alarm contact.
A "Shaft Earthing Abnormal" alarm, displayed in the Plant Control Room (PCR),
shall be generated for the following conditions:
(a) "Loss of power supply" to the monitor
(b) "Shaft earthing current low" (deterioration of shaft earthing device)
(c) "Shaft insulation low" (loss of insulation integrity)
Each alarm condition above shall be indicated by local LED and shall latch the
local manually resettable alarm contact.
The monitor shall have an analogue 4-20 mA output for each parameter displayed
on the local panel.
Analogue outputs shall be displayed in the PCR.

15
(6) The Contractor shall provide details of shaft voltage/current control scheme
monitors, the bearing insulation, shaft coupling insulation, shaft earthing devices
and other similar monitoring equipment.
6.2.5 Generator Condition Monitoring
The Contractor shall provide the following generator condition monitoring
equipment.
The Contractor shall describe the monitoring equipment to be supplied.
6.2.5.1 Core Monitor
The core monitor shall be of the type which samples hydrogen gas for the
presence of particulates arising from severe overheating of the core and other
machine components and raises an alarm.
The alarm shall be raised in the PCR.
6.2.5.2 Rotor Shorted Turns Detection Coil
The detection coil only shall be fitted to the generator with wiring brought out to
terminals to enable connection of monitoring equipment as required. Monitoring
equipment shall be supplied by the Contractor and shall raise an alarm in the PCR.
6.2.5.3 End Winding Vibration Sensors
Sensors only shall be fitted to the stator end windings at both ends of the
generator with wiring brought out to terminals to enable connection of monitoring
equipment as required. Monitoring equipment shall be supplied by the Contractor
and shall raise an alarm in the PCR.
6.2.5.4 High Speed Electronic Fault Recorder
A high speed electronic fault recorder shall be supplied for transient fault
recording of electrical parameters.
6.2.5.5 Partial Discharge Monitoring
The generator stator shall have continuous partial discharge monitoring equipment
installed for condition monitoring of the stator insulation. Output signals are to be
extended to the PCR and monitored via an independent monitoring station for
recording and data storage. The equipment shall be noise immune to ensure
precision of signals. Partial discharge monitoring equipment shall comply with
the requirements of IEC 60060-1 and IEC 60270
6.2.6 Generator Excitation
6.2.6.1 General
Equipment for the complete excitation requirements of the generator shall be
provided; including all excitation transformers, thyristor bridges, field suppression
equipment, excitation control equipment and all connections between these items.

16
The required excitation system shall be of a static system in which the excitation
power is provided by a transformer connected to the switchyard side of the GCB
and controlled by a thyristor bridge.
The excitation system shall be with dual channel Automatic Voltage Regulation
(AVR) and Power System Stabilizers (PSS).
An off-line isolator shall be provided between the excitation transformer and the
thyristor cubicle. A fixed earth switch on the thyristor side of the isolator shall
also be provided. These are to enable electrical isolation of the thyristor cubicle
for maintenance purposes without de-energizing the generator and unit
transformers. The design of the isolator and earth switch shall be such that the
status of the contacts can be seen to confirm electrical isolation and earthing
respectively.
The excitation system shall be of a static converter directly supplying the
generator rotor field. Its power source is derived from an excitation transformer
which is connected to the generator side of the GCB via a PIB.
The excitation system is self-exciting, using DC flashing either from the 220V
DC Station battery or from the 400V station supply to build up the initial field.
6.2.6.2 Performance
(1) The ceiling level of field voltage shall be at least 2.0 times the maximum
continuous rating of field voltage, for stator voltages between 0.6 and 1.0 Per
Unit (PU) of rated value.
(2) The excitation system offered shall be of the high initial response type, with a
response ratio such that excitation increases from rated load excitation voltage 1.0
PU to a voltage greater than 2.0 PU in 0.1 secs in response to a step change in
generator terminal voltage of 2.5%.
(3) The excitation system shall be capable of providing the peak power required for
operation at ceiling voltage level.
This requirement is based on an operating duty cycle of: Rated Output (RO) for a
sustained period, then ceiling voltage for 10 seconds, then return to RO for a
sustained period.
(4) The Contractor shall provide, during the course of the Contract, performance
details and preferably test curves for the design of excitation system offered.
(5) When the generator terminal voltage ranges from 80 to 120% of rated voltage and
system frequency ranges from 47 to 52Hz, the field excitation system of the
generator should be able to increase excitation voltage and current to 2.0 PU of
the rated value in at least 30 secs.
(6) Changing speed of field excitation voltage should not be less than 2.0 times
compared to rated voltage/second when the generator is running at rated capacity.


17
6.2.6.3 Static Thyristors Excitation System
(1) Thyristors
(a) The thyristor bridge shall comply with the requirements of IEC 60146.
(b) A three-phase fully-controlled thyristor bridge shall be provided with
sufficient redundancy to permit operation of the generator at full excitation
power with 20% of the thyristors failed in any set of parallel paths i.e. arm
of the bridge. It shall be possible to either replace faulty thyristors with the
generator in service, or the extent of thyristor redundancy shall be
sufficient, having regard to their reliability, to permit full excitation power
without replacing thyristors more often than once every 4000 hours.
Sufficient redundancy shall be included in the thyristor cooling system to
ensure that a single failure will not prevent the achievement of continuous
100% generator RO.
(c) The Contractor shall provide, during the course of the Contract, a
description of what measures are taken to prevent damage to the thyristor
bridge in the following situations (and any others as applicable) and what
tests are performed to confirm the effectiveness of these measures.
- A short-circuit at the generator slip rings at excitation ceiling voltage
- An overload occurring with a sudden short-circuit at the generator
terminals
- High voltage across the bridge due to reverse excitation current
- Non-uniform current distribution between thyristors.
(2) Excitation Transformer
(a) A power transformer shall be provided to supply the power requirements of
the excitation system under all operating conditions. This transformer shall
be a three-phase dry type natural air cooled and manufactured to IEC
60076-11 for indoor installation.
The design of excitation transformer shall take into account the additional
stray and eddy current losses generated by the harmonics supplied to the
load. The Contractor shall calculate the extra losses due to harmonics by
reference to IEC 60076. The Contractor shall nominate the expected
demand for excitation power (MVA) at rated generator output.
(b) Not withstanding the protection schemes specified in this Specification, the
Contractor shall state any further protection which he feels is necessary for
the safe operation of the transformer. The protection shall not mal-operate
under any operating condition.
(3) Slip rings and Brushgear
(a) The slip rings and brushgear shall be of proven design and shall comply
with the limits of temperature set out in IEC 60034.
The Contractor shall nominate the expected slip ring temperature at
generator RO.

18
The Contractor shall describe how the generator will be tested to determine
that this limit is not exceeded.
(b) The Contractor shall nominate and guarantee the wear rates of the slip rings
and brushes with the generator operating at continuous maximum rating.
These wear rates shall be such that brushgear maintenance is not required
more frequently than every 4000 hours of turbine-generator operation. The
Contractor shall supply certificates and his experience list to demonstrate
that the slip rings and brushgear meet these requirements.
(c) The brush pressure shall not require adjustment between the time of
installation and the time of replacement of the brush. The construction shall
permit safe and convenient replacement of the brushes with the generator in
service. Suitable interlocking shall be provided so that the brushgear
enclosure covers of only one polarity can be opened at any one time. The
Contractor shall provide details of the provisions for safeguarding personnel
engaged on "in service" brush replacement. Bolted connections shall be
provided that will permit the polarity at the slip rings to be reversed.
(4) Field Suppression
A main field circuit breaker complying with IEC 60947 Parts 1 and 2, and a non-
inductive resistor shall be provided for generator de-excitation. The circuit
breaker shall be capable of breaking the field current under the most onerous
operating conditions. On opening the breaker, the field winding shall be short-
circuited through the resistor which shall ensure that the rotor winding voltage
remains adequately below its test voltage. The field circuit breaker shall have two
trip coils which are electrically and mechanically independent.
6.2.6.4 Supervision
Equipment shall be provided for detection of a generator rotor earth fault and
measurement of generator rotor field voltage and current. The field voltage and
current measurements will be computer monitored and used to compute field
winding temperature. The Contractor shall provide during the course of the
Contract details of the fault detection and voltage and current measuring
equipment.
6.2.7 Excitation Control System
6.2.7.1 Construction and Reliability
The excitation control system shall provide completely reliable and stable
automatic regulation of the generator excitation.
(1) Technology
The regulator shall be microprocessor based.
(2) Duplication of Automatic Control and Manual Control
Dual channel auto with a PSS for each channel is required. Manual control from
PCR and local control are also required. Failure of both AVRs shall cause a

19
transfer to manual and the generator shall remain in service. Power supplies for
the AVR will be derived from the excitation transformer.
A full description of the AVR including the operation of functional units is to be
provided by the Contractor.
The AVR shall have two completely independent reference, amplifier and control
circuits, henceforth called channel 1 and channel 2 respectively. Duplication shall
include connection to separate secondary windings of the generator stator Voltage
Transformers (VTs) and to separate CTs.
Associated with each channel shall be a manual excitation current regulator,
which shall be interfaced with the automatic excitation regulator as described in
Clause 6.2.7.5.
(3) Operation of Duplicate Circuits
The aim of having duplicate regulators is to ensure that generator excitation
remains under automatic control, notwithstanding a single failure in the control
system.
In the following requirements, it is assumed that the two channels will operate on
the duty/standby principle, although alternative principles such as master/slave
will be considered provided they achieve the same aim.
The normal condition of operation when the generator is connected to the system
will be for excitation to be under automatic voltage control of the selected duty
channel, with the standby channel being also selected to automatic mode. If the
duty channel in automatic mode fails, control will be transferred "bumplessly" to
the standby channel (automatic mode). If the standby channel automatic control
subsequently fails, control shall be transferred to the standby channel manual
controller if available, otherwise excitation shall trip.
If the standby channel (in either automatic or manual mode) is unavailable when
the duty channel automatic control fails, control shall be transferred to the duty
channel manual controller if available, otherwise excitation shall trip.
The Contractor shall provide a description of what abnormal conditions will
cause excitation to trip.
The equipment shall be designed and constructed so as to facilitate maintenance
of one channel while the other remains in service.
If operating on the duty/standby principle, the standby circuit shall be
continuously monitored so that any abnormality is alarmed and causes lockout of
transfer to that circuit.
The status of each channel and whether it is controlling excitation shall be
indicated in the plant control room. Selection of which channel is controlling
excitation and its mode (automatic or manual) of operation shall also be available
from the PCR.

20
6.2.7.2 Characteristics
The excitation control system shall have the following characteristics:
(1) Sensitivity
The excitation system shall give its maximum or minimum output with variations
in generator terminal voltage of not greater than 2.5% from set point.
(2) Regulation
The regulator shall maintain the generator terminal voltage within limits of
0.5% of required value between no load and full load over a range of
frequencies of 47 to 52 Hz.
(3) Range of Control
The regulator shall be capable of automatically controlling the generator terminal
voltage between the limits of 95% and 105% of rated voltage under all conditions
of generator operation, when there is no contribution from any of the
supplementary control circuits.
(4) Stability and Damping
It is intended that the excitation control system will be adjusted so that, with the
generator operating on open circuit at rated voltage a step change in the AVR
input equivalent to a step change of either +2.5% or -2.5% terminal voltage, shall
result in an oscillation in field voltage with a settling time of less than 1.5
seconds.
(The settling time of a quantity is defined here as the time interval from the
instant of the step change until the resulting oscillation settles to less than 10%
of the maximum induced change.)
It is also intended that the excitation control system will be adjusted so as to
maintain stable operation of the generator for a 0.5% step change in terminal
voltage with the machine operating at all loads and power factors within its
capability limits. The criterion of stability is a settling time of less than 5 seconds
in generator terminal voltage and rotor angle oscillations.
In order to achieve these requirements, the Employer will carry out necessary
calculations and advise the Contractor, before Site Commissioning, of the
required setting values within the range of adjustment provided. The Contractor
will co-operate in implementing these settings and in carrying out tests to verify
that the required performance is attained.
(5) Low and High Frequency Operation
The regulator shall function satisfactorily at system frequencies between 47 Hz
and 52 Hz.
6.2.7.3 Supplementary Controls
(1) The output of the excitation regulator shall be varied in accordance with the
requirements of at least the following supplementary control circuits.
(2) Automatic Run-up and Run-down

21
On closing the field switch during run-up of the generator, excitation shall be
applied proportional to speed and increased until minimum set point voltage is
achieved at not less than 95% normal speed. At the end of the excitation raising
sequence, excitation shall be under AVR control.
The run-down sequence shall ensure that excitation is controlled so as not to
overflux any transformers which may be connected to the generator.
(3) Reactive Power and Voltage Control
(a) Provision shall be made to allow the operator to select separate reactive
limits for each generator for the reactive power sharing task, and the sharing
to be apportioned accordingly. Control of the set point of each generator
shall be selectable by the operator either by the Instrument Control and
Monitoring System (ICMS) or to individual unit set point reference.
If the control system fails, control shall revert to individual control of each
generator set point, the outputs retaining the values they had at the time of
failure.
Provision shall be made for the following inputs and outputs from each
unit:
Inputs: stator voltage, power output, reactive power output, 220kV busbar
voltage, generator transformer tap setting.
Outputs: voltage set point, provision for generator transformer tap setting.
(b) Reactance drop compensation shall be included in the AVR circuits as a
secondary means of minimizing changes in the 220kV busbar voltage level
during changes in station reactive power demand.
The compensation shall be proportional to the reactive power output (or
alternatively, quadrature component of stator current) of the generator and
adjusted to a setting to be advised by the Employer.
(4) Stabilizing Controls
Stabilizing signals, derived from generator power output and/or terminal
frequency and/or rotor speed shall be provided to enhance the damping of
generator and power system oscillations over the frequency range 0.2 to 2.0 Hz.
These shall be provided on both channels. The Contractor shall provide details of
the stabilizing signals used. A compensating circuit separate from compensation
of the voltage feedback path shall be provided. If more than one stabilizing
signal is provided, separate compensating circuits are to be provided for each.
On the output of any stabilizer circuit, in the frequency range below 100 hertz, the
total measured noise components shall be less than 0.1% peak to peak. This
measurement shall be made with a flat compensation characteristic and the
transducer gain adjusted to the following:
Stabilizer Gain
Frequency 20 (PU equivalent terminal voltage/PU frequency)
Speed: 20 (PU equivalent terminal voltage/PU speed)

22
Power: 1 (PU equivalent terminal voltage/PU MVA)
The lag time constant of any speed, frequency or power transducer used as a
feedback into the AVR should be less than 40 ms (as measured through the
relevant stabilizer circuit, with compensation adjusted for flat response).
If a rotor speed based stabilizing signal is offered, the Contractor shall include
details of any torsional interaction induced by the stabilizer (s) and of any special
devices provided to avoid torsional oscillations. Analysis is to be included to
demonstrate the performance of the AVR at the torsional frequencies.
The compensation circuits shall provide for the following gain and phase
adjustments of the stabilizing signals:
Gain range 0-6,000 PU open circuit excitation volts per PU speed or frequency or
range 0-100 PU open circuit excitation volts per 100 MW
Washout filter (high pass; at least three per stabilizing signal):
0 to 10 seconds adjustable
Lead/lag compensation (at least three per stabilizing signal):
0 to 1 second lead and lag, independently adjustable
(5) Over-Excitation Limit
The regulator shall incorporate an Over-Excitation Limiter (OEL) to restrict the
period of operation of the generator beyond its continuous over-excited
capability. The limit action shall have a time inverse characteristic corresponding
to a small margin from the short time capability of the generator rotor and
excitation system, and shall return operation to continuous rating. It shall operate
smoothly, and without causing hunting. Its operation shall be alarmed in the
PCR.
(6) Under-Excitation Limit
The regulator shall incorporate an Under-Excitation Limiter (UEL) to prevent
operation of the generator while under AVR control beyond a characteristic line
which will be advised by the Employer in the form of the locus of points on the
MW versus MVAR capability diagram. The UEL shall operate smoothly, and
without causing hunting. Its operation shall be alarmed in the PCR.
(7) Stabilizer Output Monitoring
(8) Cross Current Compensator (CCC)
(9) Automatic Follow-up Device (AFU)
In order to ensure a smooth change-over from the AUTO to the MAN and vice-
versa an automatic follow-up shall be provided.
(10) Power System Stabilizer
The PSS is to improve the dynamic stability limit of the power system when the
synchronous generator is in parallel operation with other generators on this
system. The PSS should counteract the system instability when detected through
the action of the static excitation system.

23
The Contractor shall demonstrate that the stabilizer failure detection circuit does
not operate inadvertently during system disturbances, particularly during the
recovery of system frequency after loss of generation elsewhere in the system.
6.2.7.4 Supplementary Protection
The following supplementary protections are to be provided and their operation
alarmed.
(1) Fuse Failure Protection
The excitation control system shall incorporate a means of detecting generator
VT fuse failure. If such a failure is associated with the duty channel in automatic
voltage control mode, control transfer shall be made in accordance with Clause
6.2.7.1.(3). If failure is associated with the standby channel, an alarm shall be
raised and standby automatic control shall be excluded from the normal control
transfer sequence. This facility shall not operate for low terminal voltage
conditions arising from a fault on the system.
If fuses associated with both channels fail, control shall be transferred to manual.
(2) Rotor Over-Current Protection
If with the duty channel in automatic control, its OEL fails to operate as designed
to prevent overheating of the rotor, a protective function shall operate to transfer
control in accordance with Clause 6.2.7.1.(3). If subsequently, with the standby
channel in automatic control, its OEL also fails to operate, a protective function
shall operate to a further transfer of control in accordance with Clause 6.2.7.1.(3).
It should be noted that, in addition to the protective functions described above
related to detection of OEL failure, excitation overcurrent protection is also to be
provided, with which these functions should be graded.
(3) Overvoltage (or Overfluxing) Protection
Protection shall be provided against stator overvoltage and generator overfluxing.
The Contractor shall provide the philosophy of the offered overfluxing protection
scheme, including co-ordination with any excitation limiting function associated
with run-up and shut-down of the generator.
(4) Underexcitation Protection
If with the duty channel in automatic control, its UEL fails to operate as designed
to prevent pole slipping, a protective function shall operate to transfer control in
accordance with Clause 6.2.7.1(3). If subsequently, with the standby channel in
automatic control, its UEL also fails to operate, a protective function shall
operate to a further transfer of control in accordance with Clause 6.2.7.1(3).
It should be noted that, in addition to the protective functions described above
related to detection of limiter failure, loss of field protection is also to be
provided, with which these functions should be graded.
6.2.7.5 Manual Excitation Control
The manual control shall meet the following additional requirements:

24
(1) Follow-up
Equipment shall be provided to cause the manual excitation control to match the
excitation level determined by the in-service automatic control, after a suitable
time delay to avoid hunting, except in the circumstances described in Clause
6.2.7.5.(2). This is to ensure that a changeover from automatic to manual control,
under steady state conditions, will generally take place without perceptible
transients while operating in the generator capability range where manual control
is stable.
Similarly, while under manual control, a facility shall be provided to match the
automatic level of excitation with the manual level, so that a transfer to automatic
control will take place without perceptible transients.
(2) Manual Restrictive Limit
(a) A facility shall be provided to prevent the manual controller operating point
from following the in-service automatic controller operating point beyond a
characteristic line known as the manual restrictive limit, which will be
advised by the Employer in the form of a locus of points on the MW versus
MVAR capability diagram. If protective transfer from automatic to manual
control occurs while automatic is operating beyond the characteristic curve,
it is acceptable that there be an immediate increase in excitation current and
hence MVAR lagging output to bring the operating point within the
characteristic curve.
(b) A facility shall be provided to prevent an operator reducing excitation
current using a manual excitation controller beyond the characteristic curve
described in (a). Further, if excitation is under manual control and the MW
output is increased, a facility shall be provided which ensures that the
manual operating point remains within the characteristic curve.
6.2.7.6 Test Facilities
(1) To facilitate performance testing of the AVR and for future investigations, data
shall be made available for measurement at the excitation cubicle. The data shall
include the following and may take the form of analogue signals or outputs from
the digital software:
(a) Generator stator voltage and current
(b) Generator three-phase real and reactive generator power output
(c) Generator rotor voltage and current
(d) Instantaneous speed of the rotor (if speed is used as a PSS input)
(e) Any other signal used by the Contractor as a feedback in the AVR
(f) Intermediate signals at key points in the AVR block diagram.

25
(2) Analogue transducers where required for processing primary signals shall be
mounted in the excitation cubicle and have a time constant (lag) of less than 20
milliseconds.
6.2.7.7 Sources for Generator Voltage Signals
The generator voltage signal for each AVR channel shall be derived from two
physically separate VTs. Each VT shall be separately connected to the PIBs and
secondary wiring shall run in separate cables to the respective channels to
minimize the possibility of a single event crippling both automatic regulators.
6.2.7.8 Performance Data
(1) The Contractor shall provide a block diagram so that it shows the gains, time
constants, delays, limits and saturation of the excitation system as designed.
Where these can be varied, ranges and recommended values are to be shown.
Frequency response curves (Bode or Nyquist) of each block with the
recommended settings are also required. The Contractor shall at appropriate
times resubmit the block diagram amended to show the parameters and limits
obtained during testing and again to show those which apply to the excitation
system after Commissioning.
(2) Sample chart records of step response measurements made on machines having
similar AVR control shall be provided during the course of the Contract.
(3) A curve shall be submitted during the course of the Contract showing the
estimated time/voltage characteristic of the generator under AVR control
immediately after full load has been rejected, by opening of the GCB.
6.2.8 Generator Cooling
(1) Cooling System
Core and rotor: direct hydrogen
Hollow stator conductor: direct hydrogen
For more information of hydrogen Plant and carbon dioxide supply, please refer
to Volume 4..
(2) Generator cooling systems shall be provided to maintain the temperature of the
various parts of the generator within the limits required by IEC 60034 at
continuous RO.
(3) The complete equipment requirements for the following shall be provided:
1. Hydrogen cooling system,
2. Hydrogen seals and seal oil system,
3. Stator cooling system,
4. Brush gear ventilation system,
5. Generator casing purging
The equipment shall include all necessary pumps, valves, piping, reservoirs,
make-up tanks, filters, heat exchangers, instrumentation and ancillary equipment.

26
6.2.8.1 Hydrogen Cooling System
(1) A hydrogen cooling surface system shall be required at both ends of the generator
shell to maintain the hydrogen temperatures within IEC 60034 specified limits.
The hydrogen gas shall be force circulated through coolers by cooling fans
coaxially fitted with shaft of generator. Water for coolers is supplied from cooler
inlet water system via automatic controlled valve.
(2) The generator hydrogen pressure shall be maintained automatically at a set value
which shall be adjustable.
(3) The hydrogen coolers use closed cooling water (demineralized water, refer to
Volume 4).
Provision shall be made for any hydrogen leakage into the cooling water system
in service to be detected, alarmed and the rate of leakage measured.
(4) Control equipment shall be provided to automatically maintain generator coolants
at the required temperature by regulation of water flow through the various
coolers.
(5) A covered water head tank shall be provided complete with inlet float valve and
discharge piping and valves.
(6) Any apparatus necessary for the withdrawal of the hydrogen coolers from the
Generator casing shall be provided by the Contractor and itemized in the
Essential Tools and Appliances of the proposal documents.
(7) Drying equipment shall be provided for removal of moisture from the hydrogen
in the generator. If the equipment uses desiccant, facilities shall be provided for
its regeneration within the equipment without incurring the risk of hydrogen
explosion. Equipment shall be provided for measurement of generator hydrogen
dewpoint temperature and a signal provided for computer monitoring. In addition,
facilities shall be provided for filling the generator with dry air and for passing
dry air continuously when the generator is open for maintenance.
(8) An indicating and integrating flowmeter shall be provided for measurement of the
hydrogen consumption rate of the generator. The range of the meter shall cover
the flow rate for a "tight" generator up to the flow rate at which the unit must be
taken out of service. The generator manufacturer shall state the maximum rate of
hydrogen leakage from the generator as a whole when the generator is at rated
conditions.
The flowmeter shall incorporate a transmitter for computer monitoring of gas
consumption rate. Equipment shall also be provided for measurement of the gas
mixture purity of hydrogen in air, hydrogen in carbon dioxide and air in carbon
dioxide and signals provided for computer monitoring.
(9) Details of the source of hydrogen, its source pressure and its source dewpoint will
be provided by the Contractor.
(10) All necessary hydrogen vent lines shall be provided and shall discharge at least
2000mm above the turbine house roof. All hydrogen piping routes shall avoid
areas subject to a hazard from mechanical or fire damage.

27
6.2.8.2 Generator Cooling Board
(1) A generator cooling board shall be provided to accommodate all the equipment
associated with the control and monitoring of the generator cooling and seal oil
systems, but excluding the generator purging system. This shall include control
equipment, purity measurement equipment and instruments as recommended by
the generator manufacturer. The board shall be located on the basement level of
the turbine house.
(2) Intrinsically safe circuits complying with all the relevant parts of IEC 60079 shall
be employed in areas where an explosive atmosphere could occur due to
hydrogen leakage.
6.2.9 Hydrogen Seals and Seal Oil System
A seal oil unit shall be provided to safely contain the hydrogen gas within the
generator housing.
The provided systems function shall be to prevent hydrogen from leaking out of
the generator casing to atmosphere
Normally, the seal oil source is taken from the main lube oil pump upstream of
lube oil control valve. The seal oil pressure in the system is automatically
maintained at a preset point by a seal oil regulator. The seal oil discharged from
sealing packing is routed back to the main oil tank through a set of stabilizing and
degasifying equipment.
(1) In addition to the automatic seal oil regulator, the system shall be equipped with a
manual standby feeding set ensuring the uncorrupted seal oil flow to the generator
hydrogen packing even for a prolonged outage of the unit.
(2) The system shall also be provided with adequate monitoring and protecting
equipment including liquid detectors etc.
(3) Shaft oil seals of a proven reliable design shall be provided. Details of the seals
shall be provided by the Contractor. The seal oil to hydrogen differential pressure
shall be maintained automatically at all pressures up to the maximum hydrogen
pressure, irrespective of the source of seal oil. The system shall be capable of
sealing rated gas pressure in the generator with the turbine-generator stationary.
(4) Two (2) sets of seal oil pumps shall be provided, one is a full duty cycle AC motor
driven and the other is a fully duty cycle DC motor driven for emergency.
(5) Two (2) seal oil coolers shall be provided. These shall be cooled from the
auxiliary cooling water system and shall be parallel on the water side. Adequate
seal oil cooling shall be provided by one (1) cooler in service in case of a cooler
inlet water temperature is low. The two (2) coolers may be paralleled to enable
generator Maximum Continuous Rating (MCR) to be achieved in case of
temperature is high.
(6) Equipment shall be provided for the treatment of seal oil to remove dissolved gas
so as to minimize the contamination of hydrogen in the generator.


28
6.2.10 Generator Casing Purging System
(1) The system shall permit purging the generator of hydrogen using carbon dioxide
or compressed air, in less than 90 minutes with the generator stationary. The
characteristics of the carbon dioxide supply shall be provided by the Contractor
and shall also describe the details of the proposed purging system.
(2) A panel shall be provided from which all operations necessary for purging the
generator can be carried out. The panel shall accommodate all monitoring
equipment associated with the purging system. The panel shall be located on the
basement level of the turbine house remote from the turbine-generator foundation
block, so that it can be reached safely in the event of a generator fire. The
interface, control and instrumentation, electric and mechanical, between this
panel and local and remote control room shall be shown on a block diagram by
the Contractor.
(3) The Contractor shall provide all necessary heating equipment should the carbon
dioxide require warming prior to injection into the generator.
(4) Provision shall be made for a 'visible-break' between the generator and the
sources of hydrogen, carbon dioxide and air so as to provide proof of isolation
before access is made available for maintenance of the system. The visible breaks
may include flexible hoses with quick disconnect couplings, or removable
sections of pipework.
6.2.11 Temperature Measurement
(1) Temperature detectors shall be provided as described below and in compliance
with IEC 60034. The detectors shall be either copper constant in thermocouples
or platinum resistance thermometers, and shall be cabled to and terminated in
junction boxes at the generator.
(2) Embedded temperature detectors shall be provided for measurement of generator
temperatures as follows:
(a) A minimum of six (6) detectors per phase in the generator stator slots
between the coil sides
(b) A minimum of two (2) detectors in the stator teeth,
(c) A minimum of two (2) detectors in the stator core
(3) Thermocouples shall be provided for temperature measurement as follows:
- Cooling air temperature rise across the generator slip rings
- Hydrogen temperature at the inlet and outlet of each hydrogen cooler
- Seal oil temperature at the inlet and outlets of each hydrogen seal.
- Cooling water temperature at the inlet and outlet of all heat exchangers
(4) Temperature detectors shall be provided as necessary for use in the ICMS control
of generator coolant temperatures.

29
6.2.12 Generator Current and Voltage Transformers
CTs and VTs shall be provided for metering, control and protection functions.
CTs in the generator stator winding terminals shall be independently supported
and will not be in contact with the terminal (also refer to Clause 6.2.2.4 for more
details).
The CTs and VTs used during acceptance testing of the turbine-generator and for
tariff metering shall be calibrated in accordance with the appropriate test codes
and standards by an approved independent testing authority in the country of
manufacture.
6.2.13 Generator Fire Protection
Fire protection for the generator and related Plant is generally covered in Volume
5. The following clauses apply to particular requirements, for the generator and
related Plant.
(1) The carbon dioxide purging system for the generator will be regarded as
providing adequate fire protection for the interior of the generator.
(2) Generator slip ring fire protection equipment shall be provided.
(a) The equipment shall include detectors, nozzles, carbon dioxide injection
equipment, piping, valves, and all other equipment necessary for automatic
operation to facilitate fast extinction of fires. Facilities shall be provided to
safeguard personnel who may be required to work in or near the areas being
protected. Carbon dioxide supply shall be as per Volume 4.
(b) Provision shall be made for operation of the equipment from a remote push
button, and also manually at the point of gas control but at a distance
suitable to ensure safe operation for personnel.
(c) The pipe route from the carbon dioxide source shall be selected to avoid
areas subject to the hazard of mechanical and/or fire damage.
(d) The equipment supplied shall include automatic closing fire dampers with
carbon dioxide pressure-operated release mechanisms in the slip ring
enclosure air inlet and exhaust ducting and in make-up air ducting (where
slip rings and make-up air ducts are applicable).
(3) A system shall be provided for the detection of hydrogen leakage to atmosphere
from the generator. In particular, detectors shall be located to detect leakage in
the region of the rotating hydrogen seals and from the pipe connections below the
generator. The detection of hydrogen leakage shall be alarmed in the fire detection
system.

30
6.3 AC AUXILIARY SYSTEM
(Refer to Appendices 3 & 4 for further specific requirement and arrangement details.
The appendices take precedence over this sections contents.)

6.3.1 System Description
A main and auxiliary electrical power system is required to provide power for
both normal and emergency operation of the unit and station auxiliary equipment.
Refer to single line diagram Volume 9 Drawings. Note that this drawing is
indicative only.
The ratings of each motor feeder circuit and transformer circuits shall be
determined by the Contractor i.e. the load values indicated in this Specification
are indicative estimates for system design purposes and not mandatory constraints
on the Contractor.
This auxiliary electrical power system shall be fed from two voltage levels as
follows:
(1) 19/6.6-6.6kV system: unit transformer which is connected to the Generator
output busbars and upstream of the generator transformer.
(2) 220/6.6-6.6 kV System: Station Transformer is to be connected to the 220kV
switchyard busbar which is capable of being supplied via the double circuit
220kV THAI BINH TPP THAI BINH transmission lines in the 220kV
switchyard.
The 220/6.6-6.6kV station transformer shall supply power from the system to the
Plant to service plant startup or to take the place of the unit auxiliary transformer
in case of failure to ensure a continuous power supply for the unit AC 6.6kV
auxiliary system.
The design of the main and auxiliary electrical power system shall obey Viet Nam
and International standards, comprising but not limited to the following:

IEC 60038 IEC standard voltages
IEC 60076 Power transformer
IEC 60214 On Load Tap Changer (OLTC)
IEC60296 - Specification for unused Mineral Insulating Oils for
Transformersand Switchgear
IEC 60345 Method of testing for electrical resistance and resistivity of
insulating materials at elevated temperatures
IEC 60076-10 Power transformers Determination of sound levels
IEC 60214-2 Tap-changers Application guide
IEC 62271-100 HV AC circuit breakers

31
IEC 62271-200 HV AC metal enclosed switchgear and control gear
IEC 60470 HV AC Contactors and Contactor-Based Motor-Starters.
IEC 62271-105 HV AC switchgear and control gear switch-fuse combinations
IEC 60947-3 LV Switches, disconnectors, switch-disconnectors and fuse-
combination units.
IEC 62271- 102 HV AC Disconnectors and earthing switches.
IEC 61439 Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear assemblies
IEC 60898 Electrical accessories Circuit-breakers for overcurrent protection
for household and similar installations
IEC 60282 HV fuses
IEC 60269 LV fuses
IEC 60787 Application guide for the selection of high-voltage current-limiting
fuses-links for transformer circuits
IEC 60529 Degrees of protection provided by enclosures (IP Code)
IEC 60947 Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear
IEC 60034 Rotating electrical machines
IEC 60623 Secondary cells and batteries containing alkaline or other non-acid
electrolytes
IEC 60228 Conductors of insulated cables
IEC 60502-1 Power cables with extruded insulation and their accessories for
rated voltages. from 1kV up to 30kV Part 1 Cables for rated
voltages of 1kV and 3kV
IEC 60502-2 Power cables with extruded insulation and their accessories for
rated voltages. from 1kV up to 30kV Part 1 Cables for rated
voltages from 6kV up to 30kV
IEC 61386 Conduit systems for cable management
6.3.1.1 General Technical Requirements
The equipment ratings and parameters shall meet the general technical
requirements of Volume 2.
It should be noted that rating parameters and Plant specifications are based on IEC
standards and that voltage levels of 6.6kV and 400V be adopted as follows:
(1) 6.6kV, 3 phase, 3 wire for motors rated above 200 kW and for bulk power
distribution.
(2) 400V, 3 phase, 3 or 4 wire for motors rated up to 200 kW and for other 3
phase loads.
(3) 230 V AC, 2 or 3 wires for small loads requiring single phase power: for
maintenance sockets, space heaters, enclosure interior lighting, ventilation
fans, convenience outlets, etc.

32
(4) 400/230 V AC 50 Hz regulated single or three-phase Uninterruptible Power
Supply (UPS) shall be available for vital/critical Plant instrumentation and
control and plant emergency lighting supplies. Earthing and protection
systems against electrical shock shall be the same as selected for normal
400/230 V AC systems.
6.3.1.2 Generator Circuit Breaker Scheme
The GCB scheme provides the following redundancy principles fundamental to
the design.
(1) The worst effect of withdrawing any switchboard busbar from service is loss
of one generating unit.
(2) Withdrawal of any single auxiliary transformer from the system can be
accommodated without loss of generating output.
In meeting principle (2) above the GCB scheme employs one 44MVA unit
transformers and one 44MVA station transformer. The single station transformer
is common to both units.
Primary features of the AC system are as follows:
(1) 6.6kV system resistance earthed (to limit fault damage)
(2) 400V system solidly earthed (necessary for reliable protection)
(3) A 400V emergency power supply system is required to protect the
boiler/turbine-generator Plant and to maintain essential power necessary for
the safety of personnel in the event of loss of normal AC supplies. The
prospective sources of emergency power are two 6.6kV/400V-1.2MVA
emergency transformers and one (1) 1000kVA emergency Diesel generators
per Unit. These Diesel generators shall be rated for the shutdown
requirements of the generating units.
(4) The impedance of each transformer shall be such that voltage regulation
shall be within the specified limits referred to in Volume 2 and shall be such
that the fault withstand capability of its connected equipment is not
exceeded.
(5) The interfacing of the main switchboards with the ICMS is shown in
Volume 9 Drawings.

33
6.3.1.3 Loadings and Transformer Ratings
(1) Loadings
The ratings depicted in the appropriate drawing, Volume 9 Drawings have been
developed from the rating estimates and duty points of unit and station auxiliary
drives, which are shown on the following Table 6.3.1 (Note: all figures are
preliminary only).
Table 6.3.1a: Unit Load Estimate

Name Motor/
Transformer
Rated Power
Quantity Total Loads @80%
Rated Power (Duty
Point)
Remarks
KW KVA KVA
FDF 1342 1579 2 of 2 2526
IDF 1063 1250 2 of 2 2000
PAF 927 1090 2 of 2 1861
PULV 1388 1633 3 of 4 3920
FGD Boost up
Fan&Equip
797 939 1 of 1 751

BFP 2381 2801 2of 3 4482
CP 500 588 1 of 2 470
CWP 1200 1412 2 of 3 2260
FGD Absorber
Rec.P
250 295 2 of 3 470

ESP 550 1 of 1 440
Unit Aux. TR 2500 2 4000 Assumed loads
Total Estimates of Unit Loads 23180

Legend:
FDF: Forced Draft Fan
BFP: Boiler Feed Pump
CWP: Cooling Water Pump

34
CP: Condensate Pump
PAF: Primary Air Fan
PULV: Pulverizer
IDF: Induced Draft Fan
ESP: Electrostatic Precipitator
FGD: Flue Gas De-Sulphurisation

Table 6.3.1b: Estimates of Station loads (duty points)

Plant/SYSTEM Loading kVA
Ash & Dust 1000
Coal Handling Plant & Coal Bunkering 3000
Station Aux. TR 2500 Assumed Loads
HVAC 1000
Admin Building 600
Water Treatment (Waste & Raw) 800
Air Compressors 700
220kV Switchyard 600
Contingency 1300
Total Station Load: 11500

(2) Transformer Ratings
The total load for each transformer shall not exceed 80% of the transformer
rating. Accordingly, the total rating for each unit transformer is calculated as
follows:
Unit Load: 23180kVA
Station Load: 11500kVA
Total transformer load = 23180+11500 = 34680kVA
Transformer Rating = 34680/0.80= 43350kVA

35
Rounded up transformer rating: 44MVA
Therefore the rating of each unit transformer (19/6.6kV) is estimated to be
44MVA.
The station transformer is required to have the same rating of 44MVA as the unit
transformers to meet the redundancy principles as stated in Clause 6.3.1.2 (2).
The above estimated ratings of transformers and motor feeder circuits have to be
adjusted following discussion and negotiation of loading details with the Plant suppliers
i.e. the above load values are indicative estimates for system design purposes and not
mandatory constraints on the Contractor.
The Contractor shall submit his own assessment and justification of duty point loadings
together with appropriate adjustments to the auxiliary supply system ratings (essentially
the transformers) which flow from it.
However, the total load to be carried by each transformer shall not exceed 80% of the
transformer rating. The Contractor's assessment shall also account for the active and
reactive components of the loads.
6.3.1.4 System Configuration Interlocking
The configuration of the 6.6kV and 400V networks shall be constrained by
electrical interlocking and functional switching arrangements achieved through
the ICMS system to meet the following requirements.
(1) 6.6kV System:
No paralleling operation permitted between any of the two supply points to the
system i.e. the system shall be constrained to run as single radial transformer
supplies so that fault levels applied to the 6.6kV system are held well within the
6.6kV switchgear short circuit rating at all times. The only exception is when it is
required to parallel supplies temporarily in order to take one supply out of service
for maintenance reasons.
(2) 400V System:
The system is configured to operate within the switchgear short-circuit rating
subject firstly to the transformers running as single radial supplies. Secondly fault
rating allowance is included to permit a single Diesel generator to operate in
parallel with a single transformer supply. These limitations shall be achieved
through ICMS logic to the 400 V switchgear as follows:

(1) None of the four transformer supplies to be allowed to form a parallel circuit.

(2) Synchronisation of Diesel-Generator A to be permitted on its own circuit
breaker only.

(3) Synchronisation of Diesel-Generator B to be permitted on its own circuit
breaker only.

36

(4) No paralleling allowed between Diesel-Generator A and Diesel-Generator B.

(5) If Diesel-Generator A circuit breaker is closed then no further 400 V circuit
breaker closure to be allowed which would have the effect of coupling
Diesel-Generator A back into the 6.6 kV system.

(6) If Diesel-Generator B circuit breaker is closed then no further 400 V circuit
breaker closure to be allowed which would have the effect of coupling Diesel
Generator B back into the 6.6 kV system.

(7) Closure of either Diesel-Generator A or Diesel-Generator B onto a dead
busbar only permitted provided the busbar is isolated at 400 V i.e. not
connected back into the 6.6 kV system.
6.3.1.5 Automatic Switching
The philosophy of transfer of 6.6kV supplies from unit transformer to station
transformer (and vice versa) is based on plant generating capacity being
maintained. Contractor shall describe its method of transfer employed to prevent
connected motors from dropping out when a unit or station transformer needs to
be isolated following an internal fault. Automatic transfer and interlocking shall
be through the DCS. The philosophy of transfer of 400V supplies is similar, but
the following requirements shall also be considered.
Automatic operation, DCS interlocking and appropriate unit auxiliary 400V
switchboard Under Voltage (UV) protections shall also accomplish the following.
Unit auxiliary switchboard essential busbar UV protection shall be subject to
delayed operation by several seconds following non-essential busbar UV
operation. In that period automatic control shall initiate the following operations:
- Closure of the 400V station to unit interconnection i.e. attempted restoration
of unit auxiliary 400V essential supply from the associated station source.
- In the event that the above switching does not affect supply restoration (e.g.
due to total power station AC supplies having been lost) initiate automatically
the start and run up of the associated Diesel generator making it available for
automatic connection to the essential supplies busbar.
6.3.1.6 Circuit Allocations
The Contractor shall ensure that the design includes all electrical power supply
systems for all electrical consumers in the plant for a proper function of the plant
based on a preliminary equipment list of all process Plant requiring electrical
power. Contractor shall as soon as possible establish a comprehensive equipment
list identifying all equipment in order to design the power supply network
accordingly.

37
The design of the power supply network shall preserve a distinction between
"unit" and "station" auxiliaries with unit auxiliaries defined as items which are
identified with the generating unit only, whereas station auxiliaries are related to
common station services such as the coal plant, ash plant, etc. Complete listings
of unit and station Plant shall be proposed by the Contractor and agreed by the
Employer. It is expected that the listings would be closely based on the tables
detailed in Clause 6.3.1.3. Unless otherwise agreed, unit auxiliaries shall be
supplied from the relevant unit 6.6kV or 400V unit auxiliary switchboards and
station auxiliaries from the station 6.6kV or 400V station switchboards.
6.3.1.7 Load Identification and Measurement
The unit Plant which must run for a generating set to operate continuously at
100% RO shall be nominated by the Contractor and agreed with the Employer.
Similarly the unit Plant necessary for continuous operation at 75% RO shall be
nominated and agreed.
The Contractor shall state the number of units of a given auxiliary required in
service together with the nominated kW loading for 100% and 75% RO
continuous operation.
6.3.1.8 Fault Levels
The fault level for the 6.6kV switchboard busbars shall be minimum 50kA rms
symmetrical for 1 second and for 400V switchboard busbars shall be minimum
60kA rms symmetrical for 1 second . Actual fault levels shall be calculated by the
Contractor and agreed with the Employer.
6.3.1.9 Voltage Distribution and Regulation
(1) Equipment requiring AC power supply at voltages other than those described
above shall be used only with the approval of the the Employer, and in all such
cases the Contractor shall provide all necessary devices to transform regulate or
control the specified power supplies to those required by the equipment. Total
galvanic isolation shall be achieved between systems operating at different
voltage levels.
(2) Where 230V single phase power supply is required, the load on any circuit shall
not exceed 35A. Where the equipment contains several single phase loads and the
total load exceeds 35A, the equipment shall be supplied at 400V - 3 phases, and
the individual loads balanced across the three phases as equally as possible.
(3) All equipment provided shall be entirely suitable for operation between the limits
of variation in the specified AC power distribution system as described below.
(4) Under steady-state conditions the frequency may vary between 51 Hz and 49 Hz.
with short-term excursions down to 47 Hz.
(5) Under steady-state conditions the voltage may vary between + 5% of nominal
voltage, at 19kV phase-isolated bus. Additional voltage drop at equipment load
terminals due to cable impedance shall be a maximum of 5% of nominal voltage.
(6) During the starting of large motors, short-term voltage excursions of up to -10%
may be experienced at the source of supply. The total allowable voltage drop at

38
equipment load terminals under these conditions including cable impedance
voltage drop shall be limited to 15% of nominal voltage.
(7) All equipment supplied shall be capable of withstanding complete loss of, or
sudden restoration of, the AC power supply system without suffering any
damage.
6.3.2 Transformers
6.3.2.1 220/19kV Generator Transformer
The generator transformers shall be mineral oil immersed and meets the following
specification and the general technical requirements of Volume 2.
The impedance of the generator transformers indicated in this Specification is
only the indicative value for system design purposes. The Contractor shall
determine the appropriate impedance value such that voltage distribution,
regulation and fault withstand capability of its connected equipment shall be
within the specified limits referred to in Volume 2.
Standard: IEC 60076
Type: 3 phase, 2 winding transformer
Rating: 353MVA (OFDAF)
Voltage: 220kV 15%/19kV
HV terminals: Outdoor bushing - heavy pollution level to IEC
60815 and IEC 60137
HV neutral terminal: Outdoor bushing - heavy pollution level to IEC
60815 and IEC 60137
LV terminals: Bushing-connected to PIB medium pollution level
to IEC 60815 and to IEC 60137
Tap changer: On-load (with AVR) - IEC 60214
Tapping Range: 15% in 1.5% steps on HV Side
Impedance: 14-15% over tapping range
Cooling: OFDAF (coolers for 100% duty plus one spare
cooling unit)
Vector Relationship: YNd11
Insulation Levels: 220kV system 19kV system
Lightning Impulse: 1050kV 125 kV
Power frequency: 460kV 50kV
Bushing Current
Transformer
as per IEC 60185 and IEC 60044
- Accuracy: 0.2; Protection cores: 5P20
Sound Level: as per IEC 60076-10
Fault levels at voltage levels (220 kV, 19kV) shall be verified by the Contractor.

39

6.3.2.2 19/6.6-6.6kV Unit Transformers
The 19/6.6-6.6kV unit transformers shall be three-phase, mineral oil immersed
transformers and meet the following specification and the general technical
The rating and impedance of the 19/6.6-6.6kV transformer indicated in this
Specification are only the indicative values for system design purposes. The
Contractor shall determine the appropriate values of transformer rating and
impedance such that voltage distribution, regulation and fault withstand capability
of its connected equipment shall be within the specified limits referred to in
Volume 2.
Standard: IEC 60076
Rating: 44 MVA (ONAF)
Voltage: 19kV 10%/6.6-6.6kV
Impedance: 12.5% on principle tap
Cooling: ONAN/ONAF (100% duty with one cooler unit
out of service)
Vector Relationship: D/yn1-yn1
Terminals:
HV: Bushing - connected to PIB medium pollution
level to IEC 60815 and to IEC 60137
LV phase: Cable boxes (outdoor bushing medium pollution
class to IEC 60815 and to IEC 60137)
LV neutral: Cable box (outdoor bushing - medium pollution
class to IEC 60815 and to IEC 60137)
Insulation Levels: 19kV system 6.6kV system
Lightning Impulse: 125kV 60kV
Bushing Current
Transformer
Fault levels at voltage levels (19kV, 6.6kV) shall be verified by the Contractor.


40
6.3.2.3 220/6.6-6.6kV Station Transformer
The 220/6.6-6.6kV station transformer shall be a three-phase, mineral oil
immersed transformer and meets the following specification and the general
technical requirements of Volume 2.
The rating and impedance of the 220/6.6-6.6kV transformer indicated in this
of its connected equipment shall be within the specified limits referred to Volume
2.
Standard: IEC 60076
Rating: 44 MVA (OFAF)
Voltage: 220kV 9x1.78%/6.6-6.6kV
Stabilizing Delta winding: 5 MVA minimum
(be capable of withstanding max short circuit)
Impedance: 12.5% on principle tap
Cooling: ONAN/ONAF/OFAF
Vector Relationship: YNyn0yn0d11
HV terminals: Outdoor bushing - heavy pollution level to IEC
60815 and IEC 60137
HV neutral terminal: Outdoor bushing - heavy pollution level to IEC
60815 and IEC 60137
LV terminals: Bushing-connected to PIB medium pollution level
to IEC 60815 and to IEC 60137
Insulation Levels: 220kV system 6.6kV system
Lightning Impulse: 550kV 60kV
Bushing Current
Transformer
Fault levels at voltage levels (220kV, 6.6kV) shall be verified by the Contractor.

6.3.2.4 6.6kV/400V Unit Auxiliary Transformers & Station Auxiliary Transformers
The 6.6kV/400V unit auxiliary transformers & station auxiliary transformers shall
be three-phase, dry type transformers and meet the following specification and the
general technical requirements of Volume 2.

41
The rating and impedance of the 6.6kV/400V transformers indicated in this
Volume 2.
Standard: IEC 60076-11
Rating: 2.5MVA
Vector Relationship: Dyn11
Type: Cast Resin
Voltages:
HV - 6.6kV
LV - 400 V
Impedance: 7.5% on the principal tap
Tap changer: Off-load
Tapping Range: 6.6kV 2x2.5%
Terminals:
HV: - Cable box
LV: - Bolted directly onto switchboard busbar
Cooling: AN (Enclosed type)
Insulation Levels:
HV - Lightning impulse - 60kV
- Power frequency - 20kV
LV - Power frequency - 3kV
Sound Level: IEC 60076-10

6.3.2.5 6.6kV/400V Emergency Transformes
The 6.6kV/400V emergency transformers shall be three-phase, dry type
transformers and meet the following specification and the general technical
The rating and impedance of the 6.6kV/400V transformers indicated in this
Volume 2.
Standard: IEC 60076-11

42
Rating: 1.2MVA
Vector Relationship: Dyn11
Type: Cast Resin
Voltages:
HV - 6.6kV
LV - 400 V
Impedance: 5% on the principal tap
Tap changer: Off-load
Tapping Range: 6.6kV 2x2.5%
Terminals:
HV: - Cable box
LV: - Bolted directly onto switchboard busbar
Cooling: AN (Enclosed type)
Insulation Levels:
HV - Lightning impulse - 60kV
- Power frequency - 20kV
LV - Power frequency - 3kV
Sound Level: IEC 60076-10

6.3.3 Switchgear
6.3.3.1 General
This section establishes the criteria for the switchgear to be incorporated in the
medium (6.6kV) and main low voltage (400V) power distribution systems.
For general switchgear and switchboard requirements that also apply to this
section refer to Volume 2.
6.3.3.2 Medium Voltage Switchboards (6.6kV)
(1) Switchgear
(a) A spare circuit breaker/switching device shall be provided for each current
rating.
(b) The circuit breakers and switching devices shall be capable of meeting their
rated performance when the voltage at the closing device or at the shunt trip
coils is any value from 176 V to 264 V.
(c) Equipment Description/Ratings:
Circuit Breaker

43
Voltage: 6.6kV
Phases: 3
Frequency: 50 Hz
Current Rating: To be determined from load and the specification
requirements (Sections 6.3.1 and 6.3.2)
Breaking and Short-Time
Current Capacity:
50 kA (1 second) with a DC component as per
IEC 62271-100
Circuit Breaker Type: Vacuum and sealed for life (or equivalent)
Control Voltage: 220 V DC
Impulse Withstand
Voltage:
60kV peak
Power Frequency
Withstand Voltage:
20kV
(2) Switchboards
(a) The HV connection between the 6.6kV switchboards and the associated
auxiliary transformers shall be either by HV busduct or cables. The supply
arrangement shall be determined on economic grounds when the location of
the transformers and switchboards are finalized.
(b) As part of the ICMS interface, the Contractor shall provide a power (watts)
and/or current transducer on each circuit. These transducers shall have an
output with a range of 4-20 mA. Supply power for the transducer shall be
obtained from the relevant switchboard control circuit. Power transducers
are required on all 6.6kV circuits and 400V incoming circuits. The
remaining circuits shall have current transducers.
(c) Switchboard circuits shall be provided in accordance with the switchboard
single line diagrams and circuit schematic diagrams.
(d) Switchboard Busbars:
Type: Hard drawn copper (single busbar arrangement)
Rating: 3150A or as otherwise agreed
1500A (Neutral)
DC control busbars (rated to carry the current necessary
for the simultaneous tripping or closing of all circuit
breakers, whichever is the greater)
Fault and Short time
Current Rating:
50 kA rms symmetrical for 1 second
(3) Supporting Drawings
Reference Drawing: Volume 9 Plant Single Line Diagram

44
6.3.3.3 Low Voltage Switchboards (400V)
(1) Switchgear
(a) The 400V circuit breakers shall be capable of meeting their rated
performance when the voltage at the closing device or at the shunt trip coils
is any value from 176 V to 264 V.
(b) Contactors shall be co-ordinated with the operating characteristics of
associated short circuit protection such that short circuits do not cause
welding of the contacts.
(2) Circuit Breakers
Voltage: 400V
Phases: 3
Frequency: 50 Hz
Current Rating: To be determined by load requirements
Breaking and Short- Time
Current Capacity:
60 kA (Final data on 400V switchgear and
switchboard shall be verified and determined by
short circuit and load flow calculations by the
contractor) (1 second) rms symmetrical
Circuit Breaker Type: Air-Break
Control Voltage: 220 V DC
Impulse Withstand Voltage: In accordance with IEC 61439-1 Annex G
(3) Switchboards
(a) Each main 400V switchboard in the main control building shall be provided
with 20% spare compartments with all hardware provided to receive starter
modules.
(b) The main 400V switchboards shall be directly connected by busbar and
enclosure to their respective 6.6kV/400 V dry type transformers.
(c) The switchboards shall have been tested for arcing fault containment to IEC
61439 and shall have separate compartments for the following:
- Busbars
- Combined Fuse Switches (CFS) or moulded case circuit breakers
- Contactors (where applicable)
- Control cable terminals, control fuses, current transformer links,
protection and auxiliary relay
- Voltage transformers
- Current transformers and power cable terminations
(d) Arc fault containment shall be to IEC 61439

45
(e) Compartmenting shall be such that maintenance can be carried out safely on
one circuit with the other adjacent circuits in service.
(f) Power transducers and current transducers shall be provided for all 400V
incoming circuits. Current transducers shall be installed on all remaining
400V feeder circuits. The transducers shall have an output with a range of
4-20 mA.
(g) The main busbars and all connections thereto and busbar supporting
insulators shall be capable of withstanding for 1 second the mechanical and
thermal stresses arising from the maximum possible fault currents.
(h) Switchboard Busbars
Voltage: Hard drawn copper (single busbar arrangement)
Rating: 4000A or as otherwise agreed (Phase)
1500 A (Neutral)
DC control busbars (rated to carry the current
necessary for the simultaneous tripping or closing of
all circuit breakers/contactors, whichever is greater)
Fault and Short Time
Current Rating:
60 kA (Final data on 400V switchgear and
switchboard shall be verified and determined by short
circuit and load flow calculations by the contractor) (1
second) rms symmetrical
6.3.3.4 Drawings and Design Documents
The following Drawings and design documents shall be provided by the
Contractor during the course of the Contract:
(a) Detailed layout of all switch rooms.
(b) Detailed layout of MV (6.6kV) and LV (400V) switchboards.
(c) Detailed listed of electrical consumers with load data.
(d) Load balance.
(e) Single line diagrams for all 6.6kV and 400V switchboards.
(f) Control schematics, termination and wiring diagrams for all 6.6kV and
400V switchboards.
(g) Load flow and fault calculation (three phases and single phase to earth fault
level) for the entire power system at all voltage levels.
(h) List of cable with length of each cable line.
(i) Drawing of cable arrangement (Cable route layout, civil Work guide
Drawing of cable canals, cable arrangement in canal).
(j) Relay setting calculation guide documents.
(k) Electronic Drawing files under AutoCAD form.

46
(l) Operating and maintenance manual. Integrated operating and maintenance
manual should be provided for all electrical systems.
(m) Training manual.
6.3.4 Electrical Protection and Metering
6.3.4.1 General
Note: Control and relay protection system of electrical equipment of the Project
shall be designed to meet Vietnam standards, EVN regulations as well as
specified international standards. Control and relay protection system is
designed according to following documents:
- Electric Protection - Part IV-11TCN-21-2006 (issued by MOI)
- Official letter 5498/EVN-KTSX dated 27/11/2008 of EVN on the manufacture
of relays.
Technical specification of relay
- Rated frequency: 50 Hz
- Rated input current: 1A
- Rated input voltage: 110 V AC
- Operating voltage: 220V DC
- Type of main relays: digital relay with microprocessor
- Manufactures of main relays: ABB, Siemens, Areva (Alstom), SEL, Toshiba
or equivalent.
Standard of protection equipment: IEC 60255
This section established the criteria and minimum requirements for the protection
of the power station electrical system comprising the generator, generator
transformer, generator excitation transformer, unit transformer station
transformer, 6.6kV and 400V AC auxiliary power systems. The 6.6kV and 400V
auxiliary power systems comprise the main switchboards in the central control
building and other control buildings together with associated outgoing circuits.
General protection and metering clauses, applicable to all areas of the plant are
detailed in Volume 2.
The Contractor shall also provide a dual, fully duplicated unit synchronizing
system. It shall include duplicated automatic synchronizers, manual check
synchronizer and other indicating instrument to allow automatic and manual
synchronizing of the GCB.
The Contractor shall also provide a station synchronizing system which includes a
manual check synchronizing relay for the 6.6kV station incomers and unit-station
interconnector circuit breakers.
The electrical protection schemes shall be designed so as to promptly, precisely
and reliably isolate from service any element of the power system when that
element is subjected to an abnormal condition detrimental to its effective

47
operation, while leaving other unaffected elements in service. The protection
schemes shall also be designed so that they do not operate under load conditions
or faults external to the relevant zone.
The protection systems shall be based on digital, microprocessor based device
with monitoring, measurement and communication capability.
The communication output ports of the numerical generator protection systems
(No. 1 and No. 2 schemes), station transformer protection system and of the
protection relays used in MV (6.6kV) power system shall be connected to the
central monitoring, relay setting and recording station which will be located as
close as possible to the PCR.
Suitable menu-guided software to communicate with these protective relays via a
personal computer shall be provided, installed and tested to a satisfactory
performance. This central monitoring and control station shall be connected to the
Station ICMS via a miscellaneous station system drop.
The protection relays and systems shall meet all requirements of IEC 60255 and
other relevant IEC standards.
(a) Design philosophy
In general, the 6.6kV power system shall be non-effectively earthed via 5.8ohm
resistors connected to the neutral points of 6.6kV windings of power transformers.
These 5.8ohm resistors are to limit earth fault current to approximately 1000A and
shall meet maximum time duration of 30 seconds.
Neutral earthing transformers shall be provided for non-effective earthing of the
neutral points of the generators and the neutral displacement relays shall be
connected to the secondary side of these transformers.
The protection systems shall include at least the following:
Generator:
Under impedance
Generator Volt/Hertz over fluxing
Stator earth fault protection
Undervoltage-ground detection
Reverse power protection
Loss of excitation (Field failure)
Negative phase sequence protection
Overcurrent for breaker failure
Overcurrent inverse characteristics-voltage restraint
Overvoltage-ground detection
Fuse failure sensed by unbalanced voltage and current
Three Phase Differential/ percentage differential

48
Multi-trip latched relay
Generator Transformer:
Differential (separate for 220kV line)
High-set overcurrent
HV Restricted & standby earth fault
IDMT & instantaneous overcurrent
Zero sequence for earth fault
Transformer overfluxing
Buchholz (Oil level, surge, gas)
Main tank overpressure (Qualitrol)
Tap changer overpressure
Oil and Winding temperature
Fan failure
Station Transformer:
Differential
Restricted & standby earth fault
IDMT & instantaneous overcurrent
Tap changer overpressure
Fan failure
Trip signals shall be sent to directly trip all circuit breakers (three sides)
through main trip relay or sent to simultaneously trip through main and backup
protection functions of transformer

Unit transformer:
Differential
Restricted & standby earth fault
Transformer overload
Overcurrent and earth fault

49
Fan failure
Trip signals shall be sent to directly trip all circuit breakers (three sides)
through main trip relay or sent to simultaneously trip through main and backup
protection functions of transformer
Note: All above protection functions shall be duplicated and supplied by different
manufacturers unless the manufacturer can offer substantially different
protection relay philosophies for the duplicate protections and no common mode
failure can occur. Single point protection devices, such as Buchholz relays need
only to have their trip signalling duplicated.
Distribution Transformer (Dry Transformer-Auxiliaries):
Winding temperature
Overcurrent and earth fault
Undervoltage
Differential protection for low transformer greater than or equal to 2MVA
MV incomers and interconnectors:
IDMT overcurrent & earth fault
Synchrocheck relay
Feeders (MV & LV):
IDMT & instantaneous overcurrent & earth fault
6.6kV Switchboards:
Busbar undervoltage/ overvoltage
Busbar differential protection
Busbar earth fault
Back-up breaker fail
6.6kV Motors >1MW:
Differential
Undervotage
Switching surge protection
Instantaneous overcurrent and time delayed earth fault
Thermal overload
Single phasing and unbalanced loading
Stalling
Number of starts per hour

50
Other 6.6kV motors:
Thermal overload
Undervoltage
Switching surge protection
Instantaneous overcurrent and time delayed earth fault
Stalling
400 V Motors equal to or above 110 kW:
MCCB, CFS unit or fuses
Undervoltage
Thermal overload
Instantaneous overcurrent & core balance earth fault
Stalling
400 V Motors below 110 kW:
MCCB, CFS unit or fuses
Undervoltage
Thermal overload
Time delayed core balance earth fault
400 V Switchboards:
IDMT overcurrent & earth fault synchrocheck relay on incomers &
interconnectors
IDMT & instantaneous overcurrent & earth fault on feeders other than motor
feeders
IDMT & instantaneous overcurrent & earth fault MCC incomers
Undervoltage on all sections
Note: Use 400V for motors rated < 200kW
Use 6.6kV for motors rated >= 200kW
6.3.4.2 Design Criteria for Generator Protection Scheme
(1) General Requirements
Two generator protection schemes namely No. 1 and No. 2 protection schemes
for the generator, generator transformer, excitation transformer and unit
transformer shall be provided.

51
The No. 1 and No. 2 numerical generator protection systems shall have the
following main features:
(a) Complete galvanic and reliable separation of internal processing units from
the measurements, control and supply units of the system, with screened
analog inputs, output modules and DC converter;
(b) Insensitive to VT and CT errors, external fault or through fault conditions,
magnetizing in-rush current and CT saturation arising due to large DC
components.
(c) Complete digital measured value processing up to the trip decisions for the
circuit breakers;
(d) Calculation and display of operational measured values.
(e) Relay setting operation menu-assisted capable via a connected personal
computer with menu-guided software which shall permit the following to
be carried out;
(i) Setting of parameters;
(ii) Display of measured values;
(iii) Display of events, their acknowledgment and print-out;
(iv) Recording of settings, hence a permanent record of relay settings;
(v) Testing of system.
(f) Storage of fault data, storage of instantaneous values during a fault for fault
recording and event recording;
(g) Continuous self monitoring of the hardware and software of the relay and
providing remote alarm when a component failure is detected;
(h) A centralised display of the monitored operating conditions of the protected
equipment, all alarm conditions and detected faults which would assist the
operation of the protected plant.
(i) Communication with central control and storage devices via serial interface
or other communication system is possible.
(j) A library of software protection functions shall be provided to fulfil the
protection and auxiliary functions so that it is possible at anytime to change
and program on Site other protection functions from the library of software
functions to cover other possible redundancy requirements when one
protection system is taken out of service for operational reasons.
(k) Built-in output relay units with tripping matrix and alarm functions.
(l) Tripping matrix for external trip signals.
(2) Minimum Protection Functions for the Generator Protection Scheme
(a) No. 1 numerical generator protection scheme (No. 1 Scheme) shall include
the following protection functions:
- Generator three-phase differential

52
- Generator stator earth fault for protection up to 95% stator winding
against a single phase to earth fault
- Negative phase sequence
- Field failure
- Field earth fault protection
- Loss of excitation
- Reverse power (relay 1 with definite time delayed)
- Generator thermal overloads (three-phase)
- Generator transformer three-phase differential
- Generator transformer restricted earth fault
- Unit transformer three-phase differential (the zone of protection shall
include the HV terminals of the unit transformer up to the protection
CTs current transformers located at the 6.6kV main incoming circuit
breaker at 6.6kV unit switchboard)
- The 19kV definite time earth fault (to be fed from the open delta VT
located at the phase isolated bus via a normally closed auxiliary switch
contact of the 19kV GCB)
This protection is to protect the 19kV transformer zone from earth
faults when the generator is disconnected from the system. The
auxiliary contact interlock is necessary to prevent the transformer zone
from spurious tripping when an earth fault occurs on an in-service
generator
- Excitation transformer three-phase differential.
(b) No. 2 numerical generator protection scheme (No. 2 Scheme) shall provide
the following protection functions:
- Overall unit three-phase differential (generator, generator transformer
and unit transformers).
- Neutral displacement (time delayed trip).
- Negative phase sequence.
- Field failure.
- Loss of excitation
- Reverse power (relay 2 with definite time delay).
- Unit transformer three-phase overcurrent (instantaneous and inverse
definite minimum time delayed (IDMT) characteristics). This
protection shall co-ordinate with the thermal capability of the
transformer and the overcurrent protection provided at the 6.6kV main
incoming circuit breaker.

53
- Unit transformer neutral earth fault. This protection shall co-ordinate
with the earth fault protection provided at the 6.6kV main incoming
circuit breaker.
- Excitation transformer three-phase overcurrent (instantaneous and
IDMT characteristics). This protection shall co-ordinate with the
thermal capability of the transformer and generator rotor.
- Generator transformer overfluxing protection. This is volt/hertz
protection for possible over-excitation condition during start-up and
shutdown operation. It shall be co-ordinated with the transformer
excitation curves.
- The 19kV definite time earth fault (to be fed from the open delta VT
located at the phase isolated bus via a normally closed auxiliary switch
contact of the 19kV GCB). This protection is to protect the 19kV
transformer zone from earth faults when the generator is disconnected
from the system. The auxiliary contact interlock is necessary to
prevent the transformer zone from spurious tripping when an earth
fault occurs on an in-service generator.
(c) No. 1 scheme shall be provided with signals from the following sources
and provide the appropriate trip and alarm outputs:
- Generator transformer oil flow failure
- Unit transformers main tank oil surge/qualitrol devices
- Unit transformers tap changer oil surge/qualitrol devices
- Automatic excitation regulator failure
- 220kV switchyard intertrips
- 6.6kV unit & station switchboard A busbar protection local back-up
- 6.6kV unit & station switchboard B busbar protection local back-up
- Turbine trip relays (with reverse power relay interlock).
- And other protection recommended by transformer manufacturer.
(d) No. 2 Scheme shall be provided with signals from the following sources:
- Generator transformer oil flow fail (duplicated)
- Generator transformer main tank oil surge/qualitrol device
- Generator transformer tap changer oil surge/qualitrol device
- Generator transformer diverter switch pressure surge
- Automatic excitation regulator failure
- 220kV switchyard intertrips.
- 6.6kV unit & station switchboard A busbar protection local back-up
- 6.6kV unit & station switchboard B busbar protection local back-up

54
- Turbine trip relays (with reverse power relay interlock)
- And other protection recommended by transformer manufacturer.
(3) Tripping Requirements for Unit Protection Scheme
Protection multi-trip latched relays shall be provided for each of No. 1 and No. 2
Schemes which shall provide trip signals to the following equipment:
(a) Boiler Protection System (BPS)
(b) Turbine Protection System (TPS)
(c) Excitation control system
(d) Generator field circuit breaker
(e) Burner Management System (BMS)
(f) Unit transformer circuit breakers
(g) 220kV switchyard inter trip
(h) GCB
(i) Generator transformer oil pump (only if the generator transformer
differential, overall differential, generator transformer restricted earth
fault,generator transformer oil surge/qualitrol protection, or 6.6kV
switchboard busbar protection operated)
(j) Generator fault recorder trigger.
6.3.4.3 Design Criteria for 220/6.6-6.6kV Station Transformer Protection
(1) Station transformer protection scheme shall include the following protection
functions:
(a) Station transformer three-phase, differential protection: the zone of
protection shall include the 220kV terminals of the transformer; 220kV
switchgear; and its 6.6kV terminals of transformer.
(b) Station transformer three-phase overcurrent protection (instantaneous and
IDMT characteristics) on the 220kV terminals of the transformer. This
protection shall co-ordinate with the thermal capability of the transformer
and the overcurrent protection provided at the 6.6kV incoming circuit
breaker at 6.6kV station switchboard.
(c) Station transformer neutral earth fault protection in the neutral of the 220kV
winding. This protection shall co-ordinate with the earth fault protection
provided at the 220kV circuit breaker at 220kV switchyard.
(d) Station transformer restricted earth fault protection for the 220kV winding.
(e) Station transformer neutral earth fault protection in the neutral of the 6.6kV
winding. This protection shall co-ordinate with the earth fault protection
provided at the 6.6kV main incoming circuit breaker at 6.6kV station
switchboard.

55
(2) The station transformer protection shall incorporate signals from the following
sources:
(a) 220/6.6-6.6kV station transformer Buchholz and oil surge device
(b) 220/6.6-6.6kV station transformer tapchanger protection (overpressure, etc.)
(c) 220/6.6-6.6kV station transformer oil flow failure
(d) 6.6kV station switchboard busbar protection local back-up (duplicated).
(e) Any other protection recommended by transformer manufacturer
(3) Protection multi-trip latched relays shall be provided for each of No. 1 and No. 2
station transformer protection schemes which shall provide trip signals to the
following equipment:
(a) 6.6kV incoming circuit breaker at 6.6kV station switchboard.
(b) 220kV switchyard inter trip.
6.3.4.4 Design Criteria for 6.6kV Distribution System (Unit Auxiliary and Station)
(1) The incoming supplies from the station and unit auxiliary transformers to their
corresponding 6.6kV switchboards shall be provided with three-phase overcurrent
protection (IDMT characteristics) and earth fault protection.
The three-phase overcurrent protection settings shall be coordinated with the
three-phase overcurrent protection provided on the HV side of the station and unit
auxiliary transformers to ensure discriminative tripping and back-up protection.
Similarly, the earth fault protection settings shall be coordinated with the neutral
earth fault protection on the LV side of the respective transformers.
In addition, both of the three-phase overcurrent and earth fault protection shall be
coordinated with outgoing circuit protection.
(2) The Interconnector circuits between 6.6kV switchgear switchboard (station
services and unit auxiliary) shall be provided with three-phase overcurrent
protection (IDMT characteristics) and earth fault protection.
The three-phase overcurrent protection and earth fault protection settings on the
interconnector circuits shall be coordinated to ensure tripping of these
interconnector circuits prior to the tripping of the incoming circuit breaker of the
station switchboard or unit switchboard.
In addition, both of these three-phase overcurrent and earth fault protection shall
be coordinated with the protection provided on the switchboard outgoing circuits.
(3) Feeder circuits to load centres, and to step-down transformers associated with the
variable speed drives shall be provided with three-phase overcurrent protection
(instantaneous and IDMT characteristics) and earth fault protection
(instantaneous and IDMT characteristics). The settings on these types of
protection shall ensure co-ordination and discrimination with the protection
provided in the load centres and also with the thermal capability of the protected
transformers.
(4) Each 6.6kV unit auxiliary switchboards shall be provided with busbar protection.

56
The busbar protection shall also provide trip signals to associated interconnector
circuits and all circuits connected to the 6.6kV unit switchboard.
(5) Each 6.6kV unit auxiliary switchboard supplying one or more motors shall be
provided with undervoltage protection. This undervoltage protection shall initiate
load shedding to prevent connection of all the motor loads simultaneously on the
return of AC power source to the 6.6kV bus.
(6) If there are any variable speed drives connected to the 6.6kV switchboards (unit
auxiliary or station), the need for protection from harmonics that will be
generated from the static power unit forming part of the variable speed drive units
will need to be evaluated. Consideration for 6.6kV harmonic filters and their
effect on the performance of the unit auxiliary and station transformers shall be
evaluated and provided if required.
(7) Each section of the 6.6kV station switchboard shall be provided with busbar
protection.
The busbar protection shall also provide trip signals to associated interconnector
circuits, incoming station transformer and all outgoing circuits.
(8) If there are motors connected to any section of 6.6kV station switchboard, that
section of 6.6kV station switchboard shall be provided with undervoltage
protection. This undervoltage protection shall initiate load shedding to
preventconnection of all the motor loads simultaneously on the return of AC
power source to the 6.6kV bus.
6.3.4.5 Design Criteria for 400V Distribution System (Unit Auxiliary, Emergency, Station
Auxiliary)
(1) All the 6.6kV/400V unit auxiliary transformers, emergency transformers, and the
6.6kV/400V station auxiliary shall be provided with winding temperature detector
for alarm. The neutral of the 400V windings shall be provided with the inverse
time neutral earth fault protection. This neutral earth fault protection shall be
coordinated with the largest fuse and earth fault protection on feeders connected
to the load centre.
The incoming supplies from the 6.6kV/400V station auxiliary & station
emergency and unit auxiliary transformers to their corresponding 400V
switchboards shall be provided with three-phase overcurrent protection (IDMT
characteristics) and earth fault protection.
The three phase overcurrent protection settings shall be coordinated with the three
phase overcurrent protection provided on the 6.6kV side of the station auxiliary,
emergency transformers, and unit auxiliary transformers to ensure discriminative
tripping and back-up protection. Similarly, the earth fault protection settings shall
be coordinated with the neutral earth fault protection on the 400V side of the
respective transformer.
In addition, both of the three phase overcurrent and earth fault protection shall be
coordinated with the protection provided on outgoing circuits.

57
(2) The interconnector circuits between 400V switchboard (station auxiliary and unit
auxiliary and emergency) shall be provided with three phase overcurrent
protection (IDMT characteristics and earth fault protection).
The three phase overcurrent protection and earth fault protection settings on the
interconnector circuits shall be coordinated to ensure tripping of these
interconnector circuits prior to the tripping of the incoming circuit breakers of the
400V station switchboard.
In addition, both of these three phase overcurrent and earth fault protections shall
be coordinated with the protection provided on outgoing circuits.
(3) The load centre Motor Control Centre (MCC) feeder circuits shall be provided
with three phase overcurrent protection (instantaneous and IDMT characteristics)
and earth fault protection (instantaneous and IDMT characteristics). The settings
on these types of protection shall ensure co-ordination and discrimination with
the protection provided on outgoing circuits in the load centres.
(4) The essential section of the 400V unit auxiliary switchboard shall be provided
with undervoltage protection. On detection of undervoltage, it shall trip the
normal power source breaker and automatically transfer to an alternative power
source (from 6.6kV/400V emergency transformers) to ensure an uninterrupted
supply of power. Also refer to Clause 6.3.1.5.
(5) The non-essential section of each 400V unit auxiliary switchboard shall also be
provided with undervoltage protection. This undervoltage protection shall initiate
load shedding to prevent connection of all the motor loads simultaneously on the
return of AC power source to the 400V switchboard.
(6) If there are any variable speeds drives connected to the 400V switchboard, the
need for protection from harmonics that will be generated from the static power
unit forming part of the variable speed drive units will be evaluated.
Consideration for 400V harmonic filters and their effect on the performance of
the unit auxiliary, emergency transformers, and station auxiliary transformers
shall need to be evaluated and provided if required.
6.3.4.6 Design Criteria for 400V MCCs (Unit Auxiliary and Station Auxiliary Services)
(1) The incoming feeder circuits shall be provided with three phase overcurrent
protection (instantaneous and IDMT characteristics).
(2) Outgoing circuits shall be protected thermally and against short-circuit faults by
the following devices:
(a) CFS units
(b) Fixed fuses
(c) Moulded Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB).
6.3.4.7 Drawings and design data
The following drawings and design data shall be provided by the Contractor
during the course of the Contract.
(a) Protection design calculations

58
(b) Relay settings
(c) Full AC/DC schematics and tripping sequence block diagram for the
generator protection
(d) Overall protection co-ordination diagram
6.3.4.8 Electrical Synchronizing Facilities
One set of automatic and manual synchronizing equipment will be provided for
each generating unit. Synchrocheck relays must be supplied for all breakers where
asynchronous conditions can occur at normal start up.
6.3.4.8.1 Synchronizing Equipment
In order to allow manual synchronizing, each unit will have the following
hardwired equipment as part of the unit control desk.
(a) Dual voltmeter
(b) Dual frequency meter
(c) Synchroscope
(d) Circuit breaker close pushbutton
The circuit breaker close button will be hard-wired to the circuit breaker close
coil via the unit synchronizing panel to minimize the time delay between its
operation and the closure of the circuit breaker.
The automatic synchronizing equipment and check synchronizing equipment will
be located at the generator protection panels of the generating unit and will
include:
(a) Auto synchronizer.
(b) Manual check synchronizing relay
(c) Check synchronizing guard relay
(d) Circuit breaker and hardwired panel equipment selection relays (driven by
ICMS).
The circuit breaker close output of the automatic synchronizer will be hard-
wired to the circuit breaker close coil to minimize the time delay between the
synchronizers operation and the closure of the circuit breaker.
The guard relay is associated with the check synchronizing relay. It prevents the
check synchronizing relay from closing the circuit breaker when conditions are
acceptable. If the operator has pressed and held the button before the acceptable
conditions are met, it forces the operator to make the decision to close, rather than
allowing the check synchronizing relay to decide.
The check synchronizing relay shall have facilities to allow closure if voltage is
absent on one side.
Selection of a particular circuit breaker for synchronizing will be made via the
ICMS.

59
6.3.4.8.2 Redundancy
Redundancy in automatic synchronizing circuits will be provided by a correct
selection of auto-synchronizing equipment as follows:
Either
- Two automatic synchronizer functions or two check synchronizing functions
are contained in the one relay case. Each automatic synchronizer will be
checked by a check synchronizing function and operation of either
synchronizer will close the circuit breaker.
Or
- Two separate relays and each relay shall have automatic synchronizing
function and a check synchronizing function. The operation of either
synchronizer will close the circuit breaker.
6.3.4.8.3 Manual Synchronizing
Manual synchronizing will be available for the following circuit breakers:
6.6kV unit - station tie breakers
19kV GCB
6.6kV unit transformer output breakers
6.6kV station transformer output breaker.
6.3.4.8.4 Automatic Synchronizing
Automatic synchronizing facilities will be provided for the 19kV GCB, the 220kV
circuit breakers, but not for the 6.6kV circuit breakers. Lack of provision of
automatic synchronizing at the 6.6kV level is because under normal auxiliary
system configuration, where the unit is connected to the common 220 kV
switchyard, changes to turbine governor set point and generator excitation set point
will not be able to significantly change the voltage magnitude or phase angle on
either side of an open circuit breaker. Consequently automatic synchronizing,
which requires control of these variables cannot be used.
6.3.5 Cabling Works and Miscellaneous Requirements
6.3.5.1 General
The Contractor shall also provide complete items including but not limited to the
followings:
(1) Cabling works for the entire power station. This includes a provision of cable
management system as outlined in Volume 2. In the remote areas such as CW
area, coal handling Plant area, etc, the Contractor may include the cabling works
for these areas under the work packages for those particular Plants. However, the
Contractor will have to include in the contract price all costs for all necessary
cabling works required for the safe and reliable operation of this power station.
All cabling works have to meet the requirement of Volume 2.

60
(2) All 400V miscellaneous switchboards including the turbine actuator boards,
boiler actuator board, sootblowers, etc, required for the safe and reliable operation
of this power station. All Works have to meet the requirement of Volume 2.
(3) All miscellaneous power and lighting required for the safe and reliable operation
of this power station. This includes the normal lighting, emergency lighting, exit
warning sign, distribution boards, etc. All Works have to meet the requirement of
Volume 2.
(4) All cathodic protection and lightning protection for the safe and reliable operation
of this power station. All Works have to meet the requirement of Volume 2.
(5) Earthing protection for all electrical items for the safe and reliable operation of
this power station. All Works have to meet the requirement of Volume 2.
(6) All other electrical items for the safe and reliable operation of this power station.
All Works have to meet the requirement of Volume 2.
(7) Fire and smoke stopping system for the entire power station. All Works have to
meet the requirements of Volume 5.
6.3.5.2 Information to be provided
The following Drawings and information shall be provided by the Contractor
during the course of the Contract.
(a) Single line diagrams of all 400V switchboards
(b) Layout of all 400V switchboards
(c) Layout of normal lighting, emergency lighting and emergency warning exit
signs
(d) Earthing layout and design calculation
(e) Design calculation for the cathodic protection and lightning protection
(f) Cable management system
(g) Cable termination diagrams where required.

61
6.4 DC SYSTEM
6.4.1 General
(1) Relevant Standards:
IEEE 485-1997, IEC 60896
(2) System Configuration:
The DC auxiliary system is depicted in appropriate drawing in Volume 9
Drawings.
The DC system shall comprise two (02) nominal 220V DC station systems for
two generator units with 2 x 100% batteries, and 2 x 100% battery chargers for
each system.
Each 100% battery should be capable of supplying the emergency loads that
apply when the normal AC power system has failed, or when the AC supply to
the battery chargers has failed.
The minimum acceptable level of reliability in the system is that it should meet
its full operational requirements with one battery out of service. Batteries shall be
rated such that one battery can meet the requirements of the generating unit for a
minimum period of 30 minutes in the event of a total loss of AC supplies.
This protects the security of the Plant in the event of a battery failure and permits
off-line boost charging, discharge testing etc.
Each battery will be housed in a separate dedicated room incorporating
appropriate ventilation, showers, floor treatment and other safety features.
Each 100% battery charger shall be capable of supplying the continuous and
intermittent loads associated with two generating units while in the float' mode
of operation.
In addition each charger when off-line shall be able to supply the necessary
current to enable boost charging of a battery.
During periods of intermittent loads, or when the battery is taking the full
emergency load (i.e. during the safe shutdown of a unit) the DC system voltage
shall not fall below a value which is injurious to any of the equipment connected
to the DC system. In any event the DC system voltage shall not fall below 189.0
volts, during the duty cycle following the complete loss of AC supply, with one
battery in service.
(3) The 220V system will serve the following:
(a) DC supply for safe shutdown of turbine and boiler auxiliaries such as the
lubricating oil pumps etc. in the immediate aftermath of a total loss of
normal AC supplies;
(b) Controls and instrumentation equipment;
(c) Control of switchgear except HV switchyard which will have separate
batteries.

62
(d) Uninterruptible AC power supply (UPS) system
(e) Generator protection
(f) Transformer yard protection
(g) Generator field flashing
(h) DC emergency lighting system.
(4) The Contractor shall submit full details of proposed safe shutdown/emergency
loads for approval by the Employer.
The DC system shall be designed with the following minimum requirements:
(a) Two radial feeders to each load to allow for maintenance on a switchboard
or a feeder, without loss of availability of a supply.
(b) Battery installation in accordance with the safety provisions of the latest
international standards.
(c) Routine off-line maintenance capacity testing of a battery, in accordance
with international standards whiles the second battery remaining in service
supplying the requirements of the generating unit.
(d) The ripple to be maintained at less than 2%.
(e) Battery shall be sized in accordance with IEEE Standard 485-1997 and
based on the duty cycle diagram, showing the current versus time
characteristic of the DC system, following the loss of AC supply, with one
battery in service. The duty cycle diagram shall be submitted to the
Employer for approval prior to manufacturing.
(f) The sizing of the battery shall use an end voltage of 1.75 volts/cell and a
temperature of 25
o
C with account being taken of the relatively high ambient
of 30
o
C.
(g) In order to minimize the voltage drop on the DC system and to DC standby
motors, series resistance starters shall be used which limit the starting
current to twice the full load current.
(h) Voltage drop in all elements including cables shall be taken into account so
that the DC standby motors terminal voltage does not fall below 80% of the
DC nominal system voltage during starting.
6.4.2 Batteries, Chargers, Inverters and UPS Modules
(1) Batteries
The batteries shall comprise cells of the valve regulated lead acid (VRLA)
batteries complying with IEC 60896-21 and IEC 60896-22
The batteries shall be sized in accordance with IEEE Standard 485-1997.
A performance test of the battery capacity shall be included as part of the
commissioning procedure.

63
(2) Battery Chargers
Two battery chargers are required and each battery charger shall be of the
constant potential type. Each battery charger shall be sized to supply the DC
requirements of the inverter, the recharging current of the batteries as well as
supplying the standing DC loads under all system conditions.
The battery chargers shall be suitable for operating in parallel with the batteries,
and operating on a stand alone basis with the batteries disconnected and the
battery chargers supplying the standing load.
(3) Inverters and UPS Modules
The 230V AC UPS supply system should be inverter fed from the 220V DC
system as presented in appropriate drawing in Volume 9 Drawings.
The 230V AC UPS system will service:
(a) Fire protection and monitoring
(b) Control equipment
(c) Turbine supervisory equipment
(d) Unit operator workstation
(e) Engineering workstation.
The 230V AC UPS system will comprise two inverter/static switch modules,
connected in a parallel redundant mode, such that they normally share the load.
Upon the failure of one module, it will automatically shut down and the other
module will take the full load.
This system allows either module to be taken out of service for maintenance,
leaving the remaining module to supply the load.
Uninterruptible 230V AC power supply (UPS) system:
The 230V AC UPS supply system is inverter fed from the 220V DC system as
presented in appropriate drawing in Volume 9 Drawings.
The 230V AC UPS system will service PCR lighting/emergency lighting.
The 230V AC UPS system will comprise two inverter/static switch modules,
connected in a parallel redundant mode, such that they normally share the load.
Upon the failure of one module, it will automatically shut down and the other
module will take the full load.
This system allows either module to be taken out of service for maintenance,
leaving the remaining module to supply the load.
6.4.3 Requirements for Battery Rooms
The battery room shall comply with the requirements of IEC 60079.
6.4.4 Battery Installation Safety Requirements
The battery installation shall comply with the requirements of IEC 60079 or
equivalent

64
The emphasis at all times shall be on providing a safe installation.
6.4.5 Drawings to be provided by the Contractor
The following Drawings shall be provided by the Contractor during the course of
the Contract.
(1) Detailed layout of the battery room showing important dimensions
including distances between of batteries and door openings.
(2) Detailed layout of 220V DC switchboards.
(3) Detailed layout of DC switch room.
(4) Detailed layout of inverter, UPS modules and the central output cubicle.
(5) Single line diagrams of the 220V DC and 230V AC UPS systems.
(6) Details of safety signs for battery room.


65
6.5 ELECTRICAL PLANT
The appendices take precedence over these sections contents.)

6.5.1 Phase Isolated Busbar (PIB) Systems
This Work should included the manufacture, delivery to, erection, testing and
commissioning of a set of phase isolated busbars and associated Works for a
600MW generator at the Project.
The equipment shall comply with the following standards and this specification:
IEEE C37.23 - Standard for Metal-Enclosed Bus
IEC 60071-1 - Insulation co-ordination - Definitions, principles and
rules
IEC 60071-2 - Insulation co-ordination - Application guide
BS 159 - Specification for High Voltage Busbars and Busbar
Connections
BS 1977 - Specification for High Conductivity Copper Tubes
for Electrical Purposes
BS 2898 - Specification for Wrought Aluminum and Aluminum
Alloys for Electrical Purposes - Bars, Extruded
Round and Sections
IEC 60168 - Tests on Indoor and Outdoor Post Insulators of
Ceramic Materials or Glass
IEC 60137 - Bushings for Alternating Voltages above 1000V
IEC 60076 - Power Transformers all relevant parts
IEC 62271-102 - Alternating Current Disconnectors (Isolators) and
Earthing Switches
IEC 60044 - Instrument transformers
IEC 60060-1 - High Voltage Test Techniques - General Definitions
and Test Requirements
IEC 60060-2 - High Voltage Test Techniques - Measuring Systems
ISO 9606-2 - Approval Testing of Welds - Fusion Welding -
Aluminum and Aluminum Alloys
ISO 3777 - Radiograph Inspection of Resistance Spot Welds for
Aluminum and its Alloys - Recommended Practice
ISO 2437 - Recommended Practice for the X-ray Inspection of
Fusion Welded Butt Joints for Aluminum and its
Alloys and Magnesium and its Alloys 5 to 50 mm

66
thick.

6.5.1.1 Extent of Supply
The plant shall consist of the following main components for each unit:
(1) One complete three phase set of phase isolated busbars with all supporting
insulators and enclosing ductwork. Also a complete set of supports, frameworks
and brackets. The set of busbars shall consist of the following sections.
(i) The main busbars between the generator and its generator transformer
including the flexible connections to the generator terminal stalks and to the
terminals of the generator transformer.
(ii) The generator star point busbar including the flexible connections to the
generator neutral terminal stalks.
(iii) Unit transformer tee off, including the flexible between the busbars and the
high voltage transformer terminals.
(iv) The excitation transformer tee off, including the flexible between the
busbars and the transformer terminals.
(v) The voltage transformer connections from the main busbars to the voltage
transformer cubicles.
(2) Three sets of current transformers and associated equipment; one set on the main
busbars, one set on the generator neutral and one set on unit transformer tee off.
(3) Two sets of voltage transformers and voltage transformer cubicles.
(4) One earthing switch per voltage transformer set with key interlocking on the
generator voltage transformer.
(5) One neutral earthing transformer.
(6) One neutral earthing transformer secondary resistor.
(7) One marshalling cubicle for all secondary wiring terminals and current
transformers overvoltage protection equipment and auxiliary apparatus.
(8) Connections between the following items of Plant:
(i) Between the star point of the generator and the neutral earthing transformer.
Between the neutral point of the generator voltage transformers and the star
point of the generator.
(ii) Earthing connections from all components of the Plant supplied under this
Contract to the earthing system.
6.5.1.2 Busbars
(1) The busbars shall be of the air insulated, self-supporting, phase isolated type
enclosed in weatherproof metal ductwork and shall be naturally cooled. This shall
be achieved with an air delivery and drying system with a delivery rate matched
to a controlled overall bus system air leakage rate. The delivery capacity shall be

67
sufficient to maintain positive pressure at all times. Sight-glass ground level water
collection points will be provided as a means of monitoring dryness.
(2) The busbars and ductwork from the foundation block, across the floor of the
turbine house, through the turbine house wall to the transformer terminals, etc.,
shall be supported by means of structures, frameworks and brackets so as to form
a rigid structure.
(3) The Contractor shall provide weather-proof sealing plates where the ductwork
passes through the turbine house wall.
(4) The Contractor shall prevent the transmission of building vibration to the
ductwork as well as allowing for electrical isolation of the ducting.
(5) In any part of the busbars or busbar enclosure the maximum temperature rise
shall not exceed 50C above the ambient conditions.
6.5.1.3 Electrical Characteristics
(1) The whole of the busbars and connections shall have a current rating of 12000A.
These and all following fault levels are based on a generator line voltage of 19kV.
For any higher generator line voltage all fault currents will have to be adjusted by
the Contractor.
(2) The branch phase-isolated busbars between the main phase-isolated busbars and
the unit transformer (19kV/6.6-6.6kV) is required to have a current rating of
2000A. For any different generator line voltage all fault currents will have to be
adjusted by the Contractor.
(3) The branch phase-isolated busbars between the main phase-isolated busbars and
the excitation transformer is required to have a current rating of 2000A. For any
different generator line voltage all fault currents will have to be adjusted by the
Contractor.
(4) All conductors and conductor details, including the neutral conductor shall be
insulated for a lightning impulse withstand voltage as per IEC 60071-1 and IEC
60071-2.
(5) The Contractor shall provide all the details as set out in Volume 12 Technical
Schedules.
6.5.1.4 Construction
(1) Busbars shall be of copper, aluminium or aluminium alloy and shall comply with
the requirements of BS 159 and BS 1977 or BS 2898 as required.
(2) Allowance shall be made for expansion and contraction of the conductor and
housing due to normal or short-circuit temperature rises. The use of sliding joints
in conductors will not be considered. Conductors may be joined together leaving
a suitable expansion clearance and the electrical connection made by means of
bolted flexible conductors.
(3) The connection point to the generator, unit and excitation transformer busbar
interconnections shall be of the flexible type and these flexible connections shall
be removable for isolation purposes.

68
(4) The generator neutral current transformer, the primary terminals of the neutral
earthing transformer, the neutral cable and bushing and all high voltage
connections between these parts shall be situated in a weatherproof aluminium
casing, the side panels being removable to allow access to the inside of the
casing.
(5) Busbar adaptor plates shall be provided at the terminal points to take up possible
minor misplacement during erection. The adaptor plates shall be drilled on Site.
(6) The joining of busbar sections shall be carried out by either bolting or welding. If
bolted, the bolting details shall not be subject to electrolytic action.
(7) All bolts and nuts shall be locked after erection. For electrical conducting
connections all bolts, nuts and washers shall be of non-magnetic stainless steel
grade 8.7. Belleville type washers shall be used at joints on the main connections.
Belleville washers shall comply with Clause 6.5.1.9.
(8) All jointing surfaces to copper busbars, intermediate or adaptor plates and flexible
conductors shall be silver plated.
(9) All jointing surfaces on aluminium busbars, intermediate or adaptor plates shall
be greased with Penetrox or other approved contact compound and wire brushed
before bolting up. Different method may be used only if approved by the
Employer.
6.5.1.5 Ductwork
(1) It is preferred that the ductwork be of all welded aluminium construction.
Inspection holes must be provided for maintenance purposes such as replacement
of insulators, and checking of joints between sections of busbars.
(2) The ductwork is to be pressurized to a level sufficient to prevent the ingress of
moisture and foreign particles into the busduct. The Contractor shall provide all
details in relation to the requirements of the pressurized air system during detailed
design.
(3) Provision shall be made to ensure that water leaks from any source will not
accumulate in the ductwork. Drains shall be provided at all low points of the
ductwork system i.e. voltage transformer cubicles, excitation transformer, unit
auxiliary transformer and generator transformer. Drains shall be of the sealed type
and description shall be given of the provisions made to maintain pressure within
acceptable limits. At each drainage location the drains from each phase shall
drain into a single drainage container located at ground level. The drainage
container shall be made from glass or UV protected plastic and fitted with a drain
valve.
(4) The ductwork shall be vermin proof.
(5) The enclosure around the generator terminals shall be so arranged that the current
carrying flexible connections and the bushing connections are easily accessible
for inspection and maintenance.

69
6.5.1.6 Aluminium Welding
(1) Aluminium welding shall comply with all clauses of ISO 9956-4, ISO 10043 and
ISO/TR 11069.
(2) All butt welds shall be complete penetration butt welds. Backing bars shall be
close fitting, centred at the joint and of sufficient thickness to avoid burn through.
Typical joint details shall be submitted by the Contractor to enable the Employer
to designate joints for non-destructive testing.
6.5.1.7 Support Structures, Framework and Brackets
(1) Supporting structures may be of ferrous or non-ferrous construction. Welded
construction is preferred.
(2) They shall be designed to withstand, with ample margin, the thermal stress arising
from the normal full load current and the mechanical and thermal stresses arising
from the maximum fault currents.
(3) It is preferred that no support be taken from the generator block. However, if the
design of the ducting is such that this is necessary, special provision shall be
made for preventing the transmission of vibration from the generator block to the
ducting. The design of anti-vibration mountings shall be submitted to the
Employer for approval.
(4) The temperature of any portion of the supports, etc., (excluding the ductwork)
shall be raised by not more than 40C above ambient temperature, measured by
thermometer when the bus is carrying full rated current. If necessary, the
Contractor shall provide suitable magnetic screens to ensure that this temperature
rise is not exceeded.
6.5.1.8 Busbar Support Insulators
(1) Busbar support insulators shall be of the outdoor type.
(2) The Contractor may offer either porcelain or epoxy resin type insulators.
(3) The Contractor shall provide detailed evidence in relation to the nominated
insulator manufacturer for each of the following items:
(a) Previous experience in manufacturing these insulators (detailing respective
clients).
(b) Facilities available for testing to prescribed standards (i.e. type test etc.). If
the manufacturer is unable to conduct certain tests, the Contractor shall
nominate the venue for such testing.
6.5.1.9 Dished Spring ("Belleville") Washers
(1) All Belleville washers shall be manufactured from suitable spring steel so that the
finished product will have the mechanical properties as indicated below.
Nominal diameter M16 M12 M10
Outside diameter (mm) 45 max. 45 max. 35 max.
Total height (mm) 6.5 max. 6.5 max.

70
(Thickness + dish dimension)
Flattening load (kN) 30,000 22,000 15,000
+2,000 +2,000 +2,000
(2) To avoid stress concentration, the internal and external edges shall be rounded.
The washers shall be suitably heat treated in order to avoid hydrogen
embrittlement. After the fabrication and heat treatment, all washers shall be
subjected to a suitable cleaning process to completely remove any grease, rust,
scale, dirt, etc.
(3) Immediately after cleaning, all washers shall be zinc plated.
6.5.1.10 Current Transformers
(1) Protection and metering CTs shall comply with requirements of Volume 2.
(2) All CTs shall be of the toroidal type suitable for installation at the following
locations:
(a) In the ductwork between the generator and GCB, as close as possible to the
GCB.
(b) On the generator neutral busbar terminals.
(c) In the unit transformer busbars.
The secondary windings of all CTs shall be brought out to suitable terminals via
isolating links for testing.
(3) Adequate supports shall be provided for all CTs and such supports shall not use
in any way the main busbar, generator terminals nor the terminals of the earthing
transformers. The Contractor shall include in their drawings details of the
proposed method of mounting CTs.
(4) All protection and metering CTs shall be insulated for the system highest voltage.
This system is non-effectively earthed.
(5) Interposing CTs shall be mounted adjacent to the main CTs and the leads between
them shall be joined by brazing. Each interposing CT cubicle shall contain an
anti-condensation heater.
(6) An interposing CT shall not be used in conjunction with a metering CT.
(7) Test links shall be connected into the CT secondary circuits so that only the
external burden is subject to isolation by these links.
6.5.1.11 Voltage Transformers
(1) VTs shall comply with the requirements of Volume 2.
(2) The high voltage neutral of the generator VTs shall be isolated from ground.
(3) The high voltage neutral of the generator transformer VTs shall be brought out
from the tanks and connected by means of an approved 18/30kV XLPE cable in
accordance with Volume 2 to the star point of the generator.

71
(4) The VTs shall be of the oil immersed, sealed non-breathing type mounted in sheet
steel tanks.
(5) The VTs shall consist of single phase, fully isolated metal clad units, comprising
single phase transformers for each phase, connected up so as to form a three
phase, star connected bank and shall be mounted in VT cubicles.
(6) The Contractor may offer arrangements consisting of either three single phase
metal clad units (i.e. one per phase) or three units combined into a single
compartmented tank: the star point connections in this case being made via
bushings through the compartment walls. The compartment walls shall be of
metal and each compartment shall be entirely scaled off from the adjacent
compartments.
(7) VT cubicles shall be provided with two phase isolated compartments for each
phase.
(8) One compartment shall house the VT truck for that phase and the second
compartment may be shared at a later stage by a surge diverter capacitor.
(9) The earthing switch (refer Clause 6.5.1.16) shall be situated in the VT cubicle.
(10) Each compartment shall be fitted with front and rear hinged access doors. The
Contractor shall note the clearance available when designing the access doors.
(11) Facility shall be provided for taking oil samples. For this purpose a drain valve
shall be installed.
(12) Fire resistant shutters shall be provided which automatically close over the
apertures in the busbar chambers and over all primary conductors when the VT is
racked out from the busbar. The shutters shall be provided with padlocking
facility in the closed position. Padlocking shall be easily accessible with the
transformers in the racked out position.
(13) The transformers shall be of the horizontal withdrawable truck type. The
arrangement shall be such as to enable the operation of racking out and replacing
a transformer to be done with ease by one operator.
(14) Floor rails shall be provided to prevent damage to the floors of the cubicle while
the trucks are being withdrawn or replaced. The rails shall be zinc plating to a
minimum thickness of 25 microns.
(15) A mechanical locking device shall be provided on each VT truck to secure VTs
against accidental movement in both racked in and out positions. It shall be
possible to close cubicle doors when VT truck is racked out and the shutters
closed.
(16) It is preferred that the high voltage connections to the VTs be of the spring loaded
male and female "spout" type. The insulation shall attain the specified lightning
impulse withstand level without the use of any ancillary means (e.g. rubber
glove). The Contractor shall comment on the method used to maintain contact
with the fixed conductors. Alternatives may be proposed but in such case full
details shall be included. The Contractor shall submit test certificates with their
offer proving their design obtains the required lightning impulse withstand level
with the VT in the in service position.

72
(17) Each compartment or individual tank shall be provided with an approved gas
impulse relay having two normally open contacts, one for tripping and one for
computer input. Each gas impulse relay shall be accessible for inspection and gas
sampling without withdrawing the truck. Secondary terminals and wiring shall
comply with the requirements of Volume 2. The secondary fuses shall be
accessible, in safety, with the transformer racked in and in service. It is preferred
that connection of the secondary wiring to the fixed part of the cubicle be by
withdrawable plug connections. The use of sliding contacts when the VT is
racked into position is unacceptable. All secondary wiring shall be brought back
to the "CT/VT marshalling cubicle".
6.5.1.12 Generator Neutral Earthing Transformers
(1) Earthing transformers shall be of the single phase distribution type and shall
comply with the requirements of all relevant parts of IEC 60076. One transformer
for each generator shall be supplied.
(2) The transformers shall be of the air natural cooling type.
(3) The transformers will normally operate without any appreciable voltage on the
primary circuit.
(4) The transformers shall comply with the following requirements:
Frequency 50 Hz
Rated voltage Primary: Generator line to line voltage
Secondary: 400V
Cooling AN (Enclosed type)
Tapping Not required
System earthing Effectively earthed on HV and LV sides
Rating 230 kVA for 30 minutes
Impedance 4.5%
HV test voltages Impulse test 125kV peak
Power frequency test 50kV rms 1 min
(5) The secondary terminals of the transformer shall be wired back to the marshalling
cubicle.
(6) The transformers shall be mounted within the generator foundation blocks.
Wheels are not required on the transformers.
6.5.1.13 Earthing Resistors
(1) The resistors shall be of the continuous strip type, shall be mechanically robust,
fireproof and mounted in wall or floor mounting weatherproof enclosures.
(2) The resistors shall comply with the following requirements:
Cooling AN
Frequency 50 Hz

73
Resistance 2 ohms
Resistance tolerance +5%
Tappings 0.5 ohms to 2 ohms in 0.1 ohm steps
Power factor 0.95 minimum
Insulation test voltage
(1 min. at 50 Hz)
17kV rms
30 minute current rating on each tap:
0.5 ohm - 551 A 1.3 ohm - 212A
0.6 ohm - 460 A 1.4 ohm - 197A
0.7 ohm - 394 A l.5 ohm - 184A
0.8 ohm - 345 A 1.6 ohm - 173A
0.9 ohm - 307 A 1.7 ohm - 162A
1.0 ohm - 276A 1.8 ohm - 153A
1.1 ohm - 251 A 1.9 ohm - 145 A
1.2 ohm - 230 A 2.0 ohm - 138 A
Temperature rise - 300
o
C maximum
Temperature co-efficient of
resistance
: Not more than 12% change at maximum temperature
rise
(3) The tappings shall be easily accessible and adjustments shall be made by
alterations to a bolted link arrangement.
(4) A connection diagram plate shall be provided showing clearly the relative
physical positions of the terminals and their markings, together with a table
listing the link connections to be made corresponding to the various resistance
values.
6.5.1.14 CT/VT Marshalling Cubicles
A marshalling cubicle for each generator shall house all the secondary wiring
terminals required for the whole installation, together with the current
transformers current test links, voltage test terminals and all auxiliary apparatus.
Terminals of the same function and voltage shall be grouped together.
6.5.1.15 Magnetic Screens
The Contractor shall provide and install, if necessary, shielding (Amortisseur)
grids to ensure that the rise in temperature of the reinforcing steel does not exceed
30
o
C.
Provision shall also be made to ensure that no part of the building steelwork or
sheeting (where the busbars pass through the turbine house wall) has a
temperature rise exceeding 30
o
C.

74
6.5.1.16 Earthing Switches
(1) Earthing switches shall comply with IEC 62271-102 for indoor type air break,
two- position equipment and shall have the following characteristics:
Rated voltage: Generator terminal voltage
Number of poles: Three phases isolated
Rated short time current time: 2s
(2) Each earthing switch shall consist of three single, fully isolated blades, one for
each phase, each phase being located in a separate compartment of the associated
VT cubicle and coupled together mechanically to form a three phase group.
(3) The operation of the earthing switch shall be by manual operation of a level or
handwheel.
(4) The blades action shall be positive in their open or closed positions.
(5) A viewing window shall be installed to observe the position of blades without the
need to open cubicle doors.
(6) All current carrying parts shall be made of suitable non-ferrous metals and all
bolts, nuts, washers, etc., on current carrying parts shall be of corrosion resistant
material.
(7) The contacts shall be of copper or similar approved material with a silver plated
finish.
(8) The operating mechanism shall have the following features:
(a) The mechanism shall operate the three phases of the earthing switch
simultaneously.
(b) The design shall be sufficiently sound to ensure that the reliability of the
mechanism is unaffected by long periods of inactivity.
(c) The operating mechanism shall be arranged so that it can be operated by
one man. The centre of the operating handle or wheel shall be
approximately 1000mm above ground level and the force required to
operate the handle shall be not more than 130N.
(d) Provision shall also be made for securing and padlocking the operating
mechanism in the open and closed positions. Such lockout facilities shall be
accessible to an operator standing at ground level.
(e) A durable and weatherproof label shall be attached to the handwheel or
handle to clearly indicate the direction of operation of the handwheel or
handle required to open or close the earthing switch.
(f) If a torsional shaft is used to couple the three poles, sliding and universal
joints shall be provided to prevent any axial thrust load being applied to the
gearbox bearings due to relative movement of the poles and to allow for a
reasonable degree of misalignment of the three poles.
(g) If drag links are used to couple the three poles, they shall be arranged to
operate under tension only.

75
(h) The handle or handwheel shall be finished to smooth contours, free of burrs
and adequately spaced from all fixed parts to eliminate hazards to operating
personnel. Particular attention is to be paid to hazards introduced by locking
facilities that could cause injury to fingers when operating the handwheel.
(9) The earthing switches shall be equipped with a type key interlock system for safe
operation the details of which must be approved by the Employer.
(10) Lightning impulse withstand voltage must be the same as PIB.
6.5.2 Generator Circuit Breaker
This Specification calls for the manufacture, delivery and setting to work at Site
of a three phase sulphur hexafluoride gas (SF6) GCB. Each single phase unit shall
consist of one SF6 gas circuit breaker complete with grounding switch and one
isolator (disconnecting switch) complete with grounding switch.
The equipment shall comply with the following standards of this specification:
(1) IEEE Standard C37.013 Standard for AC High Voltage Generator Circuit
Breakers Rated on a Symmetrical Current
(2) IEC 62271-100 High Voltage Alternating Current Breaker
(3) IEC 62271-200 AC Metal Enclosed Switchgear and Control gear for Rated
Voltage Above lkV up to and including 52kV.
6.5.2.1 Circuit Breaker, Isolator and Grounding Switches - General Description
(1) The breaker shall be comply with IEEE Std C37.013 - Standard for AC High
Voltage Generator Circuit Breaker rated on a Symmetrical Current and IEC
62271-100 - High Voltage Alternating Current Circuit Breaker.
(2) The circuit breaker and isolating switch shall be designed for horizontal mounting
in the phase isolated busbar system.
(3) Each single phase circuit breaker complete with isolating switch and grounding
switches shall be furnished with a separate enclosure to maintain the integrity of
the isolated phase bus ducting. The enclosure shall be a rigid self supporting
structure fabricated from aluminium and suitable for indoor installation. All
contact surfaces shall be silver plated.
(4) The circuit breaker shall be capable of clearing the following faults as well as
normal switching duty associated with large steam driven turbine-generator Plant.
(a) Fault in generator or between generator and GCB.
(b) Fault in generator transformer or between generator transformer and GCB.
(c) Fault in 220kV switchyard.
(d) Fault in unit transformer and excitation transformer or between unit
transformer, excitation transformer and GCB.
(e) It shall be possible to obtain full isolation including provision of a visible
break by the inclusion of a built-in isolating switch associated with the
GCB.

76
(5) The isolating switch and GCB shall both be provided with their own separate
grounding switches. Each grounding switch shall be rated for full fault current
closure.
(6) Interlocking (of electrical and mechanical operating systems) is to be provided
between the control cabinet and the isolating switch and GCB to ensure that the
grounding switches can only be operated when the isolating switch and GCB are
locked open and the phase isolated busbars are de-energized.
(7) The isolated phase bus ducting will be naturally cooled. The maximum air
temperature rise within the bus duct will not exceed 40
o
C above the ambient
conditions.
(8) The GCB shall be naturally cooled.
(9) Removable panels shall be provided on all equipment to permit access to all
working parts for maintenance.
(10) A mechanical locking device shall be provided to permit padlocking the GCB in
the open position.
(11) Single phase operation of the three pole assembly shall be prevented.
6.5.2.2 Circuit Breaker Operating Mechanism
(1) The GCB operating mechanism shall operate all three phases of the GCB by
means of a single (common) operating rod.
(2) The three phase GCB assembly shall be controlled by one of the following
methods:
(a) Hydraulic operating mechanism,
(b) Stored energy spring charged operating mechanism,
(c) A combination of stored energy spring charged / hydraulic operating
mechanism.
(3) The following accessories are to be provided:
(a) Mechanical position indicator marked I with a red background for the
closed position and O with a green background for the open position that
are visible externally to the operating mechanism.
(b) Manual mechanical trip, three pole.
(c) Operations counter (one per pole).
(d) Device for manual slow closing and opening during maintenance.
(e) The mechanism and its control circuit shall be such that "pumping" on to a
fault cannot occur if the "close" circuit is energized continuously. It shall
also be assumed for this purpose that the trip signal may be present before
the circuit breaker closes (controlled via a dedicated anti-pumping circuit).
The mechanism and its control circuit shall be such that the circuit breaker
is trip free as defined in IEC 62271-100.

77
6.5.2.3 Trip Coils
(1) Two electrically and magnetically separate tripping mechanisms, each operated
by a separate trip coil shall be provided for circuit breaker. If one tripping
mechanism fails or fails to operate correctly, it will not prevent the other
mechanism from operating correctly.
(2) Trip coils shall be suitable for nominal 220V DC operation and be capable of
operating within the voltage range of 176 V to 264V DC
6.5.2.4 Closing Coil
The closing coil shall be suitable for nominal 220V DC operation and be capable
of operating within the voltage range of 176V to 264V DC
6.5.2.5 Isolating Switch Operating Mechanism
(1) The isolating switch operating mechanism shall operate all three phases of the
isolating switch by means of a single (common) operating rod.
(2) The three phase isolating switch assembly shall be controlled by a 220V DC
(10%) motor driven device.
(3) The three phase isolating switch assembly shall be equipped for emergency
manual operation by means of a hand crank
(a) Mechanical position indicated marked I with a red background for the
(b) Key interlocking in the closed and open positions
(c) Interlock to prevent motor operation while isolating switch is being
manually operated.
6.5.2.6 Grounding Switch Operating Mechanism
(1) Each three phase grounding switch assembly shall have its own separate
operating device.
(2) The grounding switch operating mechanism shall operate all three phases of the
grounding switch by means of a single (common) operating rod.
(3) The three phase grounding switch assembly shall be controlled by a 220V DC
motor driven device.
(4) The three phase grounding switch assembly shall be equipped for emergency
manual operation by means of a hand crank.
(a) Mechanical position indicated marked I with a red background for the
(b) Key interlocking in the closed and open positions

78
(c) Interlock to prevent motor operation while grounding switch is being
manually operated.
6.5.2.7 Essential requirements
(1) Generator Circuit Breaker
The following parameters are required:
Nominal operating voltage: Generator voltage
Maximum operating voltage: Generator voltage plus 10 percent
Frequency: 50 Hz
Number of poles: 3
Rated continuous current: At least generator rating
Symmetrical breaking current (three-phase): 110 kA (at 19kV)
Asymmetrical breaking current (three phase): Refer IEEE Std. C37.013 Clause
4.9.2.2
Out of phase switching capability: To be agreed between the
Employer and Contractor
Short time current (1 second): Equivalent to breaking current
First pole to clear factor: 1.5
Amplitude factor: 1.5
Operating duty cycle: O-1min.-CO -3 min. CO
Rated short-circuit making current (1 second): Refer IEEE Std. C37.013
Short-Time Current Rating Period: 1 second
Full wave impulse voltage to ground: 125kV peak
Full wave impulse test voltage across contacts 145kV peak
Power frequency test voltage across contacts 60kV
Power frequency test voltage to ground 50kV
Transient recovery voltage To suit system requirements
(2) Isolating switch
The following parameters are required:
Nominal operating voltage Generator voltage
Maximum operating voltage Generator voltage plus 10
percent
Frequency 50 Hz
Number of poles 3
Rated continuous current At least generator rating

79
Rated short-time withstand current Refer IEEE Std. C37.013
Rated short-time making current Refer IEEE Std. C37.013
Power frequency test voltage to ground 50kV rms
Full wave impulse test voltage to ground 125kV peak
Power frequency test voltage across contacts 60kV rms
Full wave impulse test voltage across contacts 145kV peak
6.5.2.8 General Design Considerations
(1) It is required that the construction details and the design of the equipment should
be such that it will continue in reliable service with a minimum of maintenance.
Furthermore, this maintenance should not require that personnel be especially
trained and skilled in the details of this particular equipment because unusual or
sensitive component designs have been incorporated.
(2) In the assessment of switchgear offered, close attention will be paid to the manner
in which the following principles of design have been observed.
(a) All similar mechanical parts are to be strictly interchangeable without
special adjustment or individual fitting.
(b) The assembly of parts shall be easy and simple without requiring special
skill in adjustment of alignment. This requirement is to be provided by
dowels, spigots, counter bores, etc.
(c) The design should be such as to avoid as much as possible the necessity of
close tolerances and fits to ensure that the presence of foreign bodies, dust
and moisture or the occurrence of high or low temperatures cannot cause
any mal-operation.
(d) The performance of the design particularly that of individual component
shall be checked not only many times at normal operating conditions, but at
conditions above and below normal to establish the limits at which
equipment fails to operate correctly, thus establishing the safety margin to
allow for variations.
(e) All mechanical parts and linkages shall be robust, requiring a minimum of
maintenance.
(f) Operating forces available from electrical and mechanical sources should be
a suitable multiple of and where possible may times the forces required for
functioning under designed conditions to ensure beyond any doubt that all
elements will operate correctly and reliably for an indefinite period under
minimal maintenance attention, most normal service conditions, and taking
into account the variations in manufactured materials, workmanship and
tolerances.
(g) When components of well-tried designs but with lower operating forces are
to be used at higher operating forces and speeds, the operation should be
thoroughly examined to ensure that the operating margins are still intact

80
(h) Where the Contractor offers a design which is generally well proved in
service he must draw attention to any components which may have had to
be modified recently or which may in fact be newly designed, even though
he regards these as minor components. Changes will not be accepted which
in any way invalidate the type test certification of the whole device in any
respect.
(i) It is required that the circuit breakers, isolators, grounding switches and
operating mechanism should be of the highest reliability.
(j) All rubber components of the circuit breakers should be completely suitable
for their duty and should maintain their effectiveness indefinitely in the case
of joints, gaskets and other such non-working parts. In the case of rubber
parts subject to dynamic stresses, e.g. valve faces, they should also maintain
their effectiveness indefinitely.
(k) However, where they can readily be replaced without replacing the
components in which they are mounted then they should be effective for a
period of at least ten years under service conditions without replacement
and without detriment to circuit breaker operation.
(3) The Contractor shall state in his technical description of the GCB offered such
details as are necessary to assess their offer in the light of the above design,
construction and maintenance principles.
(4) A lightning arrester and a surge capacitor at each phase should be provided at
19kV line side. Technical data of lightning arrester and surge capacitor shall be
quoted by Contractor.
6.5.2.9 Control Philosophy
(1) The GCB isolating switch and grounding switch controls shall operate at 220V
DC
(2) Mechanically latched contactors shall be provided on all controls.
(3) Motors shall be protected by thermal overload protection.
6.5.2.10 Circuit Breaker Control Cubicle
(1) A control cubicle shall be provided for the GCBs, isolators and grounding
switches.
6.5.3 Diesel Generator
6.5.3.1 General
A Diesel generator set shall be provided for the plant, one per Unit. These
generators shall be supplied complete with accessory components required for the
operation of the Diesel engine includes: one fuel tank, unit control structure,
lubricating oil system, cooling system, DC starting power system, and
synchronizing equipments, etc.
Diesel electric generators and its auxiliaries shall be independently operated and
capable of meet all emergency power requirements in the power plant.

81
6.5.3.2 Type of Plant
The Diesel generator set shall be a stationary industrial type installed on
foundations inside a building. The fuel oil tank, cooling system and exhaust
silencer shall be suitable for outdoor installation. Both Diesel engines and
generators with its exciter shall be close coupled with outboard bearing and
mounted on a substantial bed plate.
6.5.3.3 Design and Selection
(1) All auxiliaries shall be selected to give matched performance.
(2) The Diesel generators shall be from an established manufacturer and the models
offered shall be well proven in service with a minimum of 5 years operating
experience.
(3) The design shall be such that overall functional reliability, ease of maintenance
and simplified controls are given due consideration.
(4) Adequate instrumentation for control and monitoring shall be provided.
(5) All parts shall be easily accessible for operation and maintenance. Where
necessary, the Contractor shall provide all necessary platforms and steps.
(6) Spare parts shall be interchangeable and satisfactory inventories shall be
available.
(7) The Contractor shall describe the type and nature of after sales facilities available
in Vietnam.
6.5.3.4 Rating of Plant
The Contractor shall determine the rating of each Diesel generator based on the
philosophy and parameters described hereafter. The rating is expected to be about
1000kVA. These ratings are for indicative purposes only and not a mandatory
constraint on the Contractor.
(1) The Diesel generator set with its auxiliaries shall be capable on it own of
providing electrical power to maintain the boiler turbine unit 1 and unit 2 and
associated auxiliary plants together at the power station in a safe condition
following a shut-down under emergency conditions with a margin of at least
10%. A typical case is the loss of all external power supply to the station.
The loads to be supplied by the Diesel generators in an island condition shall as a
minimum include the following:
- AC turbine turning gear
- AC turning gear oil pump (if forming part of the Contractors design)
- AC hydrogen seal oil pump (if forming part of the Contractors design)
- AC turbine oil tank vapor extractor
- AC main oil pump
- AC steam feed pump turning gear

82
- AC steam feed pump oil pump
- AC flame scanner fan
- boiler fans oil pumps
- gas air heater lube oil pump
- Diesel oil forwarding pump
- gas air heater main drive
- any other AC drives required for a safe shutdown
- battery chargers
- Diesel generator auxiliaries
- plant control room lighting (via battery chargers/UPS)
- switchyard control room lighting (via battery chargers/UPS)
- stack obstruction lighting (via battery chargers/UPS)
- remote plants emergency lighting (via battery chargers/UPS)
- Human Machine Interfaces (via battery/UPS)
- CCTV (via battery/UPS)
- lifts
- fire fighting system
- control air compressor
Contractor will be required to make their own assessment of Diesel generator
loads for generator capacity.
(2) For any motor being supplied from the islanded Diesel generator, the voltage
drop at the motor terminals during starting shall be no greater than 15% from the
pre-start voltage level.
(3) The frequency drop during the connection of any block of load to the islanded
Diesel generator shall not exceed 2.5 Hz of rated.
(4) For design purposes the ambient temperature (outdoor) shall be that given in
Volume 2.
(5) The Contractor shall describe the loads to be connected to the Diesel generators
and submit calculation sheets to the Employer for approval.
(6) The Contractor shall guarantee the performance of the Diesel generator with
acceptance tests in accordance with ISO 3046/2 and IEC 60034-1.
6.5.3.5 Operating Philosophy
The Diesel generator shall form part of the emergency power supply system
whose purpose is to protect the boiler/turbine-generator plant and to maintain
systems necessary for the safety of personnel in the event of loss of normal AC
supplies refer to single line diagram in Volume 9 Drawings. In the immediate

83
aftermath of loss of AC supplies, plant safety shall be maintained by DC
auxiliaries supplied from the 220V DC systems. The batteries will be sized to be
capable of maintaining the safety of plant of the generating unit without
restoration of the battery chargers for 1 hour with both station batteries available
and 1/2 hour with one.
The Diesel generator shall start automatically and excite to rated generator voltage
as soon as possible after loss of normal AC supply, then restoring power supplies
to the 400V station emergency bus. The ICMS will initiate automatically the
loading sequence to the AC safe shutdown supplies and the 220V battery
chargers. Once emergency shutdown supplies are established, the Diesel generator
shall maintain voltage and frequency of the island system within specified ranges
while the critical AC auxiliaries are re-started to replace the DC shutdown
auxiliaries until normal AC supplies are restored. Also refer to Clause 6.3.1.5 for
further details.
Shutdown of the Diesel generator shall not occur automatically on restoration of
normal AC supplies, but only by manual operator action.
For a description of the AC power distribution system operation, refer Clause 6.3.
For a description of the DC power distribution system operation, refer Clause 6.4.
6.5.3.6 In Service Testing
Provision shall be made for testing the Diesel generator from the PCR via a single
control command. The aim of the tests is as follows:
(1) Prove reliable starting. The point in the control system at which the test is
initiated should ensure that as much of the automatic start logic as possible
is included in the test.
(2) Prove the ability of the Diesel generator to successfully respond to step load
changes up to the largest single load both in load addition and load
rejection.
(3) Prove the ability of the Diesel generator to continuously supply its
maximum isolated load and its rated output when connected in parallel with
the normal 400V source of supply.
The Diesel generator shall have its own controller to enable periodic testing of the
Diesel generator following a command to start from the PCR. Shutdown of the
Diesel generator shall not occur automatically after the load tests, but only by
manual operator command.
6.5.3.7 D.C. Auxiliaries for the Diesel Generators
In the event that the Contractor requires a DC supply to the Diesel generator for
control purposes, for the supervisory system, or for the running of its stand-by
pumps etc., prior to establishment of Diesel alternator voltage, he shall include for
the provision of the appropriate battery systems complete with trickle/boost
charging equipment local to the Diesel generator. See also Clause 6.5.3.6.

84
6.5.3.8 Extent of Supply
This clause shall be used solely as a guide to the works involved. It in no way
alters the responsibility of the Contractor as detailed elsewhere in this
Specification.
The Diesel generator shall be complete with all necessary associated ancillary
Plant, controls and services as follows:
(1) A starting system capable of starting the Diesel engine in any position
without the need to use the barring gear.
(2) A lubricating oil system with pumps, filters, oil cooler, piping and controls
not relying on AC supplies.
(3) An engine cooling system which does not depend on the operation of
cooling systems elsewhere in the power station and has sufficient capacity
to maintain safe operating temperatures within the specified ambient
temperature range.
(4) Local and remote control facilities including a Diesel generator control
cubicle and Diesel generator auxiliary switchboard, both located in the
Diesel generator room, together with instrumentation protection and alarms
and all necessary provisions for starting, loading, testing, control and shut
down.
(5) A complete engine air intake system.
(6) A lagged exhaust system with silencers mounted on separate structure
outside the building and an unlagged discharge above the level of the engine
room roof.
(7) All water, and fuel services systems.
(8) A fuel oil day storage tank and complete reticulation for start-up and
running purposes.
(9) Provision of all appropriate control, protection and alarm signals to the
PCR.
(10) Provision of all necessary instrumentation on Diesel generator and
auxiliaries, and associated cabling.
(11) Provision of all necessary fire detection devices on Diesel generator,
auxiliaries, and associated cabling to PCR.
(12) All local power and control cabling.
(13) Batteries supplied with chargers and DC distribution system if applicable.
(14) Removable guards for any exposed moveable part of the Diesel generator or
an auxiliary, for personnel protection.
(15) Provision for connecting / disconnecting generator neutral point to the
station earth grid.

85
6.5.3.9 Particulars of Plant
(1) Diesel Engine
(a) General
The Diesel engine offered shall operate on either the 2 or 4 stroke cycle and
be suitable for operating with the same fuel oil used by power station
mobile Plant. It shall be of proven design, with a record of successful and
low maintenance performance in the size and configuration offered and
with a proven record of start reliability. The maximum speed of the Diesel
Plant offered shall not be more than 1,500 rpm. Units are required to be
capable of rapid loading.
(b) Barring Gear
Manual barring gear only shall be provided. It shall not be necessary to
operate the barring gear in order to start the generator.
(c) Engine Design
The engine shall comply with the requirements of ISO 3046 as applicable.
The engine shall be designed and constructed to achieve low wear rates and
low oil consumption in the cylinders, to give adequate cooling to cylinders
and valves and to minimize dismantling for access to components requiring
regular maintenance.
The Contractor is required to set out particulars of the design offered and,
where practicable, substantiate the claims with records of actual engine
performance.
It is preferred that the following design features be incorporated:
- Cylinder liners manufactured wholly from a single high quality
material with inherent anti-galling and oil retaining properties with the
working surfaces finished in a manner to enhance these properties.
Chrome plated liners will not be accepted.
- Piston and ring materials are fully compatible with the
abovementioned liner properties.
- Inlet and exhaust valves in separate removable cages with renewable
guides fitted to all valve stems.
- Valve, valve seats and valve cage materials selected for operation over
a whole range of engine loading. Valve seats deposited by welding on
base metal will not be accepted.
- A separate fuel pump to each injector is preferred but fuel pumps and
injectors shall be of a well proven type and full details shall be
submitted by the Contractor for approval by the Employer.
- Covers over the valve gear shall be of robust construction with strong
locking facilities.

86
- The engine crank case shall be provided with suitable safety devices to
minimize the possibility of a rapid increase in pressure in the crank
case above the permissible level.
- The engine shall be tested in the maker's works in accordance with ISO
3046-1 and ISO 3046-2.
(d) Combustion Air
- The pressure charger shall be of an approved make and type and driven
by the exhaust gases. For engines of the two-bank construction there
shall preferably be a pressure charger for each bank.
- The air inlet of each pressure charger shall be arranged so that the
ingestion of air borne dust is minimized. The inlet shall incorporate a
silencer and filter. The filter shall be suitable for operation in a heavily
dust laden atmosphere and shall comply with ISO 5011.
- The air filters shall be readily accessible and any necessary platforms
and ladders shall be provided to facilitate easy removal and washing.
(e) Exhaust System
- The exhaust duct from the engine to the silencer shall pass through the
side wall of the building and shall include adequate thermal expansion
bellows. This ducting shall be supported such that no loads are
transmitted onto the generator casing or onto the building structure.
- The exhaust duct and silencer shall be either hot dipped galvanized or
alternatively constructed in stainless steel of adequate thickness to
withstand all structural, thermal and wind loads. Expansion bellows
shall be in stainless steel. Unlagged portions of the exhaust system, if
not in stainless steel, shall be painted externally with approved paint.
- Silencers shall be mounted on independent structures outside the
building and the exhaust piping shall be arranged to discharge above
the level of the building roof. For limits on noise levels see Volume 2.
- The exhaust piping up to and including the silencer shall be lagged and
the section outside the building shall be sheet metal clad.
(f) Access Requirements
- Adequate platforms and stairways shall be provided to facilitate
inspection, maintenance and overhaul.
- All such platforms and stairways shall be kept well clear of crank case
doors or any other removable items.
- Rung type ladders will not be acceptable.
(g) Vibrations and Noise Level
- In order to reduce noise levels and vibrations within the Diesel
generator building, the sets shall be mounted on resilient mountings.

87
- These mountings shall preferably be of the steel spring type in
combination with rubber pads. The Contractor shall ensure that
sufficient mountings are provided to reduce foundation loadings to an
acceptable level.
- The mountings shall be of the adjustable type to equalize the loading
and for levelling purposes to uneven foundations.
- Flexible connections shall be provided between the engine and fuel
lines, exhaust system, radiator air discharge duct, combustion air inlet
duct, conduit for control and power cables and any other externally
connected support systems.
- The Contractor shall be required to support all pipes and ducts on one
or both sides of such flexible connections as necessary.
- Sound levels in accordance with Volume 2.
(2) Lubricating Oil System
(a) General
- The engine shall be provided with a forced lubrication system
incorporating oil pump, oil coolers, filters, oil reservoir, pipework,
valves, and instruments.
- If the main oil pump is driven from the engine then facilities shall be
provided for priming the system by a 100% duty electric motor driven
pump, supplied from the emergency Diesel generators battery system,
which will be arranged to pump for 10 minutes in every hour whilst the
Diesel is shut down or at an interval considered sufficient to ensure
that the Diesel engine bearings are ready for an instant start. The
electric stand-by pump shall be arranged to start automatically on loss
of lubricating oil pressure. A hand operated priming pump shall also be
supplied and fitted for hand priming purposes.
- The capacity of the lubricating system shall be adequate for the
combined requirements of the Diesel engine and generator.
- Where an engine driven pump is fitted, it is preferred that the pump
can be readily isolated from the engine (without affecting its
reliability) so that the engine may be placed in service on the stand by
pump in the event of a failure of the engine-driven pump only.
- Means shall be provided to collect any lubricating oil likely to leak or
drip from the unit and return it by suitable drains to a collecting point
for disposal.
- The Contractor shall indicate in the Schedules the guaranteed
lubricating oil consumption in litres per engine hour and the period of
running necessary to achieve stable oil consumption conditions.
- Facilities for draining the lubricating oil from the sump shall be
provided. The Contractor shall include a description of how the
draining and replenishment is done during the detailed design stage.

88
(b) Filters
- At least two lubricating oil filters shall be provided. They shall be
suitable for the nominated grade of oil and be of the total flow type.
- The filters shall preferably be capable of being cleaned by one man
without the use of tools.
- Each filter shall be fitted with a differential gauge and alarm and shall
have interchange valves interlocked to prevent total isolation of the oil
filtration system.
(c) Coolers
- Oil coolers shall preferably be of the tube in shell type and the tube
bundle shall be removable.
- Facilities shall be provided to enable oil from the engine sump to be
discharged into drum containers for disposal.
(d) Supply of Lubricating Oil
- The Contractor shall provide all necessary lubricating oils and greases
for initial running.
(3) Fuel Oil System
(a) Fuel Supply
- The light fuel oil supply for power station mobile Plant is received by
road tanker and this oil will be used as Diesel fuel.
- Each Diesel generator day tank shall be supplied from the bulk storage
tank, in an arrangement which automatically maintains enough fuel in
the day tank to achieve the required running time of the Diesel
generator, when it is required for emergency power supply.
- A local filling branch for each day tank with valve and screw cap shall
also be provided.
(b) Day Tank
- The day tank shall have sufficient capacity for at least 8 hours of
engine operation at full load. An alarm shall be provided which warns
that the volume of fuel in the day tank is less than this amount.
- The tank shall be horizontal mild steel cylindrical welded construction
with plate thickness not less than 4 mm.
- The tank shall be mounted on a platform at a height such as to feed the
engine by gravity. All steelwork, access ladders, platforms for access
and maintenance shall be provided.
- The tank shall be fitted with high and low level switches and an inlet
control valve to automatically maintain the level of the fuel between
pre-set levels. The inlet control valve shall be mounted externally to

89
the tank. A manual by-pass valve shall be provided around the inlet
control valve.
- A remote reading level indicator shall be mounted on the control
cubicle.
- The fuel tank shall be enclosed in an oil retaining bund with fire walls.
The inlet and outlet isolating valves shall be located outside the fire
walls in a suitable position for safe access during a fire situation.
(c) Recirculation
- The Contractor shall supply all piping, isolating valves, non return
valves, drains, overflows, air release valves, vents, supports,
recirculation valves, piping, safety devices, alarms and initiating
devices necessary for the safe and convenient operation of the Plant.
- The filtering system shall include at least two (2) stages of filters
capable of retaining all particles above five microns in size, and a
water separator.
(d) Flow Meter
- An accurate flow meter for measuring the fuel consumption of the
Diesel generator shall be provided.
- Indication of the fuel consumption shall be provided on the control
panel.
(4) Engine Governor
(a) Governor Operation
- The engine shall be provided with a suitable governor in accordance
with ISO 3046/14 and as specified hereunder so as to operate steadily
at any load within its rated load.
- The maximum change of speed expressed as a percentage of the rated
speed on sudden application or rejection of the largest load specified in
Clause 6.5.3.4 shall not exceed 10%.
- The recovery time for temporary disturbance within the steady load
speed band at the new load shall not exceed 5 seconds after a change of
load of 20% of the rated load.
- Means shall be provided so that the speed of the engine may be varied
gradually over a range of 5% below rated speed to 5% above rated
speed, either manually at the engine or by means of a speeder motor, or
equivalent, controlled from the Diesel generator control cubicle. The
speeder gear shall also be controllable from the PCR.
- The speed droop characteristics of the governor shall be readily
adjustable both for islanded operation and for parallel operation.
(b) Emergency Governor

90
A suitable independent emergency governor shall be provided to stop
the engine in case of overspeed, adjustable between 10% and 15% of
rated speed.
(5) Starting System
The starting system shall be capable of five attempts at starting in the absence of
external sources of power.
It is expected that the Contractor will offer an electric starting system. However, if
a compressed air system is offered, non-return valves shall be fitted to a sufficient
number of cylinders to enable the machine to be started from any angular position
without the need to bar the unit.
The Contractor shall provide a description of the starting system offered as part of
his bid submission.
A compressed air starting system shall comply with the following clauses.
(a) Receivers
- Each receiver shall be complete with pressure gauge, alarm contacts,
relief valve, automatic moisture trap and by-pass, isolating and drain
valves. Adequate provision shall be made for internal inspection.
- Each air receiver shall have a storage capacity sufficient to provide the
air required for at least five engine starts without recharging the
receiver.
(b) Compressors
- 2x100% electric driven compressors should be provided, alternatively
one electric driven compressor and one combustion engine driven
mobile compressor of same rating. Each receiver shall be provided
with one 400V AC electric motor-driven air compressor of sufficient
capacity to charge the receiver in a period not greater than 30 minutes.
The compressor shall be arranged to automatically maintain the
required air pressure in the receiver.
- All necessary interconnecting pipework in butt welded steel and
automatic drain traps shall be provided.
(6) Cooling System
Cooling of the engine shall be provided by a closed loop pressurized water
system(s) with pump(s) circulating the water between the engine and a fan cooled
radiator.
The water shall be suitably dosed with corrosion inhibitor.
The fan(s) shall be enclosed in a substantial shroud for physical protection of
personnel and for increased efficiency. If the radiator is located within the room,
flexible ducting shall be provided between the radiator and the wall of the
building to ensure that all heated air is directed out of the engine room.
(a) Water Heating

91
The offer shall include a thermostatically controlled heater in the cooling
water system to maintain the water temperature in the 25C to 40C range to
facilitate easy starting of the Diesel. A water circulating pump driven by
400V electric motor and associated controls shall be included in the system.
(b) Make-Up Water Tank
A make up water tank of adequate capacity shall be provided. It shall be
located at a suitable position giving sufficient head by gravity. The tank shall
be complete with all fittings, inlet ball valve, and drain and overflow piping
and isolating valves. Materials used shall be corrosion resistant.
(c) Alternative Cooling System
- The Contractor may offer as an alternative an evaporative type cooling
tower arrangement complete with fans, pumps and all integral pipework.
- In this case the Contractor shall state any improvement in engine output
that may be expected using this method and the amount of make-up
water required.
(d) Pipework and Valves
- The cooling water circulating pipework shall be in solid drawn copper.
- All necessary integral pipework and valves shall be provided and all
necessary precautions shall be taken to ensure that the piping will be free
from vibration problems. Compression fittings will not be acceptable.
- Pipework shall be installed such that it does not prevent free and easy
access around the Diesel generator unit and auxiliaries.

- All pipework and valves, shall comply with the requirements of the
relevant portions of Volume 2.
(7) Instrumentation
The Plant shall be supplied with all necessary instrumentation for control and
monitoring purposes and shall comply with the requirements of the relevant
portions of Volume 2 and Volume 7.
(a) A minimum requirement for local instrumentation, as a guide, is given
under Clause 6.5.3.9 (13)
(b) All instruments shall be easily accessible. The installation shall be in
accordance with Volume 2.
(c) In addition to local indication, all vital instrumentation and controls shall be
transmitted to and mounted on the Diesel generator control cubicle as
specified under Clause 6.5.3.9 (13)
(d) All calibrations shall be in metric units.
(8) Generator

92
(a) General
The generator shall be of the horizontal shaft, brushless, rotating field,
solidly coupled to the Diesel engine flywheel, and shall meet the
requirements of IEC 60034 and this Specification.
(b) Rating
The continuous maximum rating of each generator shall match the ISO
3046/1 rating of the engine and satisfy the requirements of Clause 6.5.3.4,
6.5.3.5 and 6.5.3.6. The generators shall be designed for the following
conditions.
Rated voltage 400V
Rated frequency 50 Hz
(c) Enclosures
- Generators shall be totally enclosed air circuit air cooled type to IEC
60034-6 with a degree of protection of IP56 to IEC 60529.
- Exciters shall be totally enclosed fan cooled type to IEC 60034-6 of
with a degree of protection of IP56 to IEC 60529.
(d) Insulation
Insulation of generators and exciters shall be rated at Class F to IEC
60034, but the limit of temperature rise shall be that nominated for Class B
insulation.
(e) Stator
- The stator casings shall be of fabricated steel construction, and the
stator core shall be made of high permeability low loss stampings
tightly clamped so as to reduce noise and vibration to a minimum.
- The stator windings shall be of copper, star-connected, with all six
terminals brought out. The windings shall be effectively braced and
blocked to withstand, without damage or permanent deformation, the
forces resulting from single or three-phase sudden short circuits at the
terminals. The stator windings shall have full insulation; graded
insulation is not acceptable.
(f) Rotor
- The rotor shall be of the outboard pedestal bearing arrangement with
over-hung exciter. Bearings shall be of the sleeve type with flood or
pressure lubrication from the engine lubricating oil system, fitted with
embedded thermostats for alarm purposes, and sight flow provision in
the oil drain. They shall be insulated.
- Pole and damper windings shall be suitably braced to prevent damage
in service, and damper windings shall be adequately rated for currents
due to transient and/or cyclic irregularity conditions.
(g) Temperature Detectors

93
- At least three embedded temperature detectors shall be provided in the
generator stator winding, brought out to a common terminal box in the
stator frame in a position accessible during normal operation i.e.
separate from the power cable terminal box and the space heater
terminals.
- Temperature indication derived from these detectors shall be provided
on the Diesel generator control cubicle and be relayed to the PCR. The
detectors shall also be used as a basis for initiating high stator
temperature alarms.
(h) Space Heaters
Space heaters shall be provided to maintain the generator internal
temperature above dewpoint when the generator is at rest. Terminals for
space heaters shall be separately housed from those for power cable and
instrument cable termination.
(9) Exciter
The exciter shall be of the over-hung brushless type with rotating rectifier
assemblies. Excitation of the exciter may be by permanent magnet generator or
DC flashing. Excitation shall be possible in the absence of normal station AC
supplies.
(10) Neutral Earthing
Each generator neutral point shall be connected to the station earth grid in a
manner described in Volume 2.
(11) Excitation Controller
Each generator shall be provided with a solid-state excitation controller which, by
controlling the field current of the brushless exciter, will provide automatic
regulation of generator terminal voltage with changing load. Manual control of
excitation current shall also be provided as backup to the voltage regulator and
for maintenance purposes.
The excitation controller shall provide for automatic build-up to rated generator
voltage as part of the starting sequence of the Diesel generator set. The sequence
shall end with the automatic voltage regulator being in control, in preparation for
synchronizing.
(a) Automatic Excitation Control
The voltage controller shall include at least the following features:
- Load drop compensation
- Under and over excitation protection
(b) Manual Excitation Control
The manual excitation controller shall follow-up the automatic voltage regulator
to ensure bumpless transfer of control on trip of the automatic controller.
(12) Diesel Generator Auxiliary Switchboard

94
Each set shall be provided with a Diesel generator auxiliary switchboard which is
physically separate from the other. They shall comply with the requirements of
Volume 2.
Anti-condensation heaters shall be provided in accordance with Volume 2.
(13) Diesel Generator Control Cubicle and Controls
(a) General
The Diesel generator shall be provided with a Diesel generator control cubicle to
be mounted in the Diesel generator room adjacent to the set of the Diesel engine
skid. The cubicle rating shall be that applicable to a switchboard in the same
location - refer Volume 2. The Diesel generator control cubicles shall contain all
the controls, alarms and indication, with certain functions repeated in the PCR.
Anti-condensation heaters shall be provided in accordance with Volume 2.
(b) Diesel Generator Controls
The following controls shall be provided on the Diesel generator control cubicles:
- Local/remote (PCR) control selector switch (with key lock)
- Test start Diesel generator: initiation of automatic start and run-up
sequence and excite the generator to rated voltage as per Clause 6.5.3.6
- Run Diesel engine only: start engine and run-up to rated speed
- Excite generator: establish generator rated voltage ready for manual
synchronizing
- Normal stop
- Emergency stop, which shall also trip the Diesel generator circuit breaker
and excitation
- A.V.R. voltage raise/lower
- Governor speed raise/lower
- A.V.R. auto/manual selector switch
- Excitation manual raise/lower
- Generator circuit breaker open/close
- Synchroscope on/off (also provides an interlock to enable closure of
generator circuit breaker)
- Anti-condensation heaters on/off
- Jacket water heaters on/off
(c) Diesel Generator Indication - Control Cubicle
The Diesel generator control cubicles shall include the following minimum
indication:
- Generator power output (kW)

95
- Generator reactive power output (kVAR, centre zero meters)
- Generator frequency (Hz)
- Generator voltage (V)
- 400V station switchboard voltage
- Generator current (in A for each phase)
- Synchroscope
- Generator kWh - Meter
- Hours run meter
- Exciter field voltage (V)
- Exciter field current (A)
- Generator bearing temperatures
- Generator winding temperatures
- Shaft speed (rpm)
- Day fuel oil tank level
- Fuel consumption indicator
- Lube oil pressure
- Lube oil temperature
- Jacket water temperature
- Engine exhaust temperature
- Intake air cooler temperature
- Air receiver pressure
- Battery charge current (A)
(d) Diesel Engine Indication - Local to Engine
In addition to the above the Contractor shall provide to the Employer for approval
the details of locations and number of instruments he will be providing for local
indication. Such gauges shall be of sufficient number for monitoring the status of
the Plant and shall include the following:
- Cooling water inlet and outlet pressure and temperature
- Lubricating oil inlet and outlet pressure and temperature
- Differential pressure across lube oil and fuel oil filter
- Compressed air pressure
- Jacket water outlet temperature of each cylinder
- Intake and exhaust gas temperature

96
- Bearing temperature.
(e) Plant Status Indication and Alarm Annunciation
The philosophy and style of display of Plant status and the annunciation of alarms
associated with the Diesel generators shall be consistent with that applied to Plant
controlled from the PCR so as to avoid confusion on the part of the operators as
to what a particular display indicates.
The status of any Plant which may be unavailable for automatic start of the Diesel
generator shall be indicated on the Diesel generator control cubicle to provide the
operator with sufficient information to assess the overall status of the Plant
without having to inspect equipment individually. Unavailability for automatic
start or remote control shall be indicated in the plant control room.
Each Diesel generator shall have its own annunciator system mounted in the
Diesel generator control cubicle, and incorporating first-up fault indication. It
may be part of the sequence control system. All necessary equipment shall be
included to enable repetition of a general alarm in the PCR. Allowance to
enable up to 20% additional alarms to be added shall be provided.
An audible alarm shall be provided in each Diesel generator control room, to be
operative only when the Diesel generator is under local control.
The operation of any Diesel generator protective device shall be individually
alarmed.
(f) Plant Control Room
The Contractor shall provide feedbacks to the PCR of all the status conditions of
the Diesel generator system to allow operator to monitor remotely all conditions
of the Diesel generator from the PCR.
The following list is included as a guide. The Contractor shall state in his offer
what facilities he recommends to provide for safe, reliable, automatic and manual
starting and operation.
Control
- Manual start Diesel generator: operator shall be able to start the Diesel
generator by making a single start command remotely from the PCR. Once
receiving the remote start command, the Diesel generator shall automatically
start up and run-up the loading sequence to restore power for emergency
drives.
- Stop Diesel generator. After a successful start, the Diesel generator can only be
stopped when receiving stop command from the operator, either via the local
control panel or remotely from the PCR.
- Periodic test Diesel generator: operator shall be able to initiate the testing of
the Diesel generator by making a single test command remotely from the
PCR. Once receiving the remote test command, the Diesel generator shall
automatically start up and run-up the test sequence to its full capacity. After
a successful test, the Diesel generator can only be stopped when receiving

97
stop command from the operator, either via the local control panel or
remotely from the PCR. See Clause 6.5.3.6 for further details of test runs.
Indication
- Generator power output (kW)
- Generator reactive power output (kVAR, centre zero)
- Generator frequency (Hz)
- Generator voltage (V)
- Station 400V switchboard busbar voltage (V)
- Generator current (A)
- Diesel engine speed (rpm)
- Lubricating oil pressure (kPa)
- Jacket water temperature (C)
- Battery voltages
Status
- Diesel ready to load
- Limit of excitation adjustment reached
- Limit of governor speed adjustment reached
- Diesel generator unavailable (conditions monitored to be listed)
- Generator reactive power limiter operating
- Excitation high
- Local / remote indications
Alarms
- Diesel generator general alarm
- Lubricating oil pressure low
- Lubricating oil temperature high
- Jacket water temperature high
- Diesel failed to start/shut-down
- Diesel generator overload
- Battery failed.
Control Circuit Supply Supervision
Control supplies shall be monitored and raised undervoltage alarms if they are
absent.
(14) Generator Protection

98
Generator protection shall generally comply with the requirements of Electrical
Protection included in this Specification. The Contractor shall provide at least the
following generator protections:
- Differential
- Back-up overcurrent
- Back-up earth fault
- Reverse power
- Thermal overload
All protections listed above shall trip the 400V circuit breaker, generator excitation and
the Diesel engine and raise an alarm, except for thermal overload which shall alarm
only.
The Contractor shall describe the proposed generator protections to the Employer for
approval.
Test links shall be provided in current and voltage input circuits to electrical protection
relays. Trip isolation links or other means of providing isolation of in-service protection
relays for test shall be provided.
(15) Batteries
(a) If batteries are required (see Clause 6.4), they shall be of the valve regulated
lead acid (VRLA) batteries complying with IEC60896-21 and IEC 60896-
22 and shall be provided with 100% rated duty float/boost chargers. The
batteries shall be sized to supply at least five black starts and in addition
one black shut-down without the need for recharging. Under normal
operation the chargers shall supply the required DC load and at the same
time automatically float charge the battery to keep it fully charged within
the correct voltage limits.
(b) Selection of boost charge shall be manual, and controlled by a preset timing
switch. The boost charge shall be such that the time for recharging the
battery from the discharged condition to 90% of the fully charged
condition, and at the same time supplying the DC load requirements, does
not exceed eight hours.
(c) Chargers shall be of the natural cooled type.
(d) Batteries and charger should not be installed in the Diesel engine room but
in a dedicated battery room close to the engine complying with standard
IEC 60079.
(16) Fire Protection and Detection
Fire protection for the Diesel generator and associated Plant shall comply with
the requirements of Volume 4 and the relevant NFPA Code.
The Contractor shall provide fire detection devices for the Diesel generator and
associated Plant and alarm status feedbacks to the PCR.
(17) Painting and Finishing

99
Painting and finishing for the Diesel generator and associated Plant shall comply
with the requirements of this Specification.
(18) Platforms, Walkways, Stairs and Ladders
The Contractor shall provide all necessary platforms, galleries and stairways
required for access to all parts of the Plant requiring inspection and maintenance.
Such access facilities shall include the tops of all engine cylinders, engine
controls and instruments, fuel tank, make-up water tank and cooling tower fan (if
any).
(19) Piping
Piping shall comply with the Specification and shall be of butt welded
construction. Flanged joints shall be used only for connection to equipment,
valves and fittings. Screwed joints and compression type joints shall not be used
for fuel, lubricating oil and compressed air supply. Copper piping shall not be
used for fuel or lubricating oil services.
Piping shall be neatly arranged and adequately supported. The Contractor shall
submit detailed arrangement drawings of all pipework for approval by the
Employer before erection at Site.
(20) Valves
Valves shall conform to the Specification.
Valves shall have flanged end connection. Screwed valves shall not be used
unless specifically approved. Valves for air, water, fuel and lubricating oil
services shall be globe or gate type.
All valves shall be provided with a valve number and nameplate inscription
approved by the Employer. IEC 81346 RDS-PP (Reference Designation System
Power Plants) shall be used.


100
6.6 HIGH VOLTAGE SWITCHYARD
The appendices take precedence over this sections content.)

6.6.1 General
6.6.1.1 Scope of Works
The Works for the power station high voltage switchyard covers the design,
manufacture, delivery, installation, construction, testing and commissioning. The
scope of the works for the switchyard shall include but not be limited to the
following:
(1) Design and construction of electrical works.
(2) Design, manufacture, testing, delivery and installation of switchgear, protection
and communication systems and all Plant and materials.
(3) High voltage busbars and connections.
(4) All AC and DC power systems.
(5) All power and control cabling.
(6) Interfaces to the power station for control, protection, communications, power
supplies, earthing, etc.
(7) Any Plant, materials or services required for the satisfactory completion and
placing into operation of the works.
Detailed Scope of Works for the power station high voltage switchyard as follows:
(1) The diagram of 220kV side is designed as a 1 breaker with 3 circuit breakers
for 2 outgoing feeders. This design ensures high reliability and the combined
control-protection equipment works simply and reliably. 220kV side is composed
of:
2 feeders for main transformers (GT1, GT2)
2 feeders for 220kV transmission lines to Thai Binh Substation
01 feeder for 220/6.6-6.6kV-44MVA Station Transformer
Number of spare bays: 9 bays (connection with Thai Binh 2 TPP).
The switchyard layout Drawing included in Volume 9 provides a physical arrangement
of the initial development and space for the ultimate development for the switchyard.
The Contractor is at liberty to offer alternative designs for the layout of the switchyard
which meet the requirements of this Specification. Preliminary layouts and single line
diagrams shall be submitted as part of the bid.

101
Please refer to Plant overall single line diagram in Volume 9 Drawings for scope of
work.
Contractor shall submit the names of manufacturers and types and models of equipment
offered. Technical data, descriptive information, drawings and brochures showing all
significant characteristics and details, principle of operation, general arrangement and
dimensions shall also be included for determination of the suitability of the equipment
for its purpose.
6.6.1.2 Design Parameters
(a) Nominal system voltage kV 220
(b) Highest system voltage kV 245
(c) Rated voltage kV 220
(c) Lightning impulse voltage (pk) kV 1050
(d) Frequency Hz 50
(e) Power frequency (rms) kV 460
(f) Minimum creepage distance mm/kV 31
(g) Rated short circuit current (sym) kA 50/3s
(h) Protection standard
- for indoor equipment IP-44
- for outdoor equipment IP-56
(i) Auxiliary electric source
- AC 400/230V
- DC (use for control-protection) 220V
- Pollution level Heavy
- Tropicalisation Required on all equipment
- Ambient conditions Refer to Volume 2
- Standards Vietnamese and International
6.6.1.2.1 Switchyard Equipment Ratings
Circuit Breaker
- Standard: IEC 62271-100
- Rated voltage: 245kV
- Type: SF6, outdoor 1 pole per phase, outdoor location (3 phase)
- Rated current: 3150A
- Short-circuit current: 50kA/3s
- Operating mechanism type: spring charged or hydraulic (motor/ manual)
Disconnector

102
- Operating mechanism type:
- motorized for disconnector switch
- manually operated mechanism for earthing-blade
+ electrical and mechanical interlocking device
- Type: three-phase, outdoor, centre break
- Rated voltage: 245kV
- Type: 3 phase
- Rated current: 1600A
- Short-circuit current: 50kA/1s
Capacitor Voltage Transformer for protection
- Standard: IEC-60044-5
- Type: outdoor, single phase
- Rated voltage: 245 kV
- Ratio: kV
3
11 , 0
/
3
11 , 0
/
3
11 , 0
/
3
11 , 0
/
3
220

(main metering points)
kV
3
11 , 0
/
3
11 , 0
/
3
11 , 0
/
3
220

(standby metering points)
- Capacity: 4400 -:- 6400pF
- No. of secondary windings: 2
- Accuracy: 0.2, 0.5 and 3P
- Burden: 50 VA
Current Transformer
- Standard: IEC-60044-1
- Type: outdoor, single phase, oil-immersed
- Ratio: 600-800-1200-2000/1A
- Number of secondary winding: 6
+ Core for protection class 5P20 (core 3,4,5 & 6) 30VA
+ Core for measuring standby No.1 & No.2 class 0.5 (core 1,2) 30VA
+ Core for measuring at main tariff points class 0.2 (core 2) 30VA
Surge Arrestor

103
- Type: outdoor, ZnO, single phase
- Maximum voltage: 245 kV
- Maximum continuous working voltage: 154 kV
- Residual voltage with lightning impulse (8/20s): 505 kV
- Capability of energy absorption: 7.8 kJ/kV(U
r
)

- Includes lightning counter.
6.6.1.2.2 Reclosing Equipment
The 220 kV line switchbays shall be equipped for slow speed three-pole automatic
reclosure and fitted with standard blocking equipment
6.6.1.2.3 Synchronizing Facilities
The 220 kV line switchbays shall be equipped with synchronizing check facilities.
6.6.1.3 Insulation Co-ordination
6.6.1.3.1 Electrical Equipment
The co-ordination of insulation of electrical equipment and the application of
protective devices to safeguard the equipment shall conform to the requirements
and recommendations of IEC 60071. Insulation levels shall be as specified in
Clause 6.6.1.2.
If required, coordinating rod gaps shall be fitted to the line side of line
disconnectors and the bus side of one bus disconnector on each bus.
Surge arrestors shall be located at a distance of not more than twenty (20) meters
from the 220 kV terminals of the generator and station transformers.
The pollution performance of all insulators and bushings shall comply with the
heavy pollution level of IEC 60815.
All switchyard Plant and high voltage conductors shall be protected against direct
lightning strikes by means of lightning rods on strain structure columns, separate
lightning protection masts or overhead earth wires. For design purposes, the
protection shall be based on a charged strike sphere of 24 m radius from all
directions.
Columns, masts and earth wires shall be connected to the earth grid. Overhead
earth wires shall be galvanized steel cored conductor, 7/3.75 SC/GZ.
6.6.1.3.2 Access for Operation and Maintenance
The following minimum ground safety clearance, section safety clearance and
work safety clearances shall be provided in the designs to allow access at ground
level and at all operating positions for operation and inspection in the vicinity of

104
exposed high voltage conductors and equipment, without the need for the
apparatus to be taken out of service.
Ground safety clearance is the clearance from the ground to the base of bushings
and insulators which are part of equipment or those carrying high voltage
conductors.
Section safety clearance is the clearance from the ground or foot position of a
working platform vertically to the nearest live conductor whether on the same
circuit or on an adjacent circuit or from the foot position over guard rails or
screens by taut string measurement to the nearest live conductor. It is a distance
which is the sum of the ground safety clearance plus the phase to earth non-
flashover distance clearance.
Horizontal work safety clearance is the clearance where work is carried out from
a ladder or from the equipment, from the extremities of the work object
horizontally to the nearest live parts.
Vertical work safety clearance is the clearance where work is carried out from a
ladder, from the highest part of the work object vertically to the nearest live parts.
Such clearances shall also allow maintenance work to be carried out at ground
level or operating positions.

Ground Safety Clearances for Operation Purposes and Maintenance Work as following below
(Table 6.6.1: Ground Safety Clearances);

Table 6.6.1 Ground Safety Clearances

Voltage
Minimum
Phase to
Earth
Clearance
Non-
flashover
distance
Ground
Safety
Clearance
Ground Safety Clearances for
Operation Purposes and Maintenance
Work
Section
Safety
Clearance
Horizontal
Work
Safety
Clearance
Vertical
Work
Safety
Clearance
220 kV 2100 mm 2010 mm 2440 mm 4450 mm 3910 mm 3350 mm

Where the maintenance requires the use of a crane with slings and davits (for
example for circuit breakers), clearance distances shall be provided from the
ground to the live overhead conductors at maximum sag to allow for the sum of
the above section safety clearance, the sling height, the height required to clear
the largest component part of the equipment which may require removal from the
body of the equipment (for example circuit breaker interrupters), other heights
determined by the type of the crane which may be used and a further distance to

105
provide an appropriate safety margin. This clearance shall also provide for the
erection of equipment in future switchbays under existing live busbars.
Where live overhead conductors pass over access roads, clearance distances shall
be allowed from the road surface to the conductors at maximum sag to provide
the vertical work safety clearance on top of the highest vehicle which could use
the road.
The design of the switchyard shall provide for road access to all major items of
equipment and safety clearances to allow maintenance vehicles to utilize these
roads without the need for circuit outages.
All clearances determined as above shall be to the approval of the Employer.
6.6.1.4 Training
The Contractor shall provide training for the Employer personnel generally in
accordance with Volume 1 and this shall cover the design, manufacture, operation
and maintenance of switchyard, switchyard equipment and systems, testing and
commissioning.
In addition to that covered in Volume 1, the following training shall be provided
for systems specific to the switchyard.
Protection Equipment
Training shall cover the design, operation and maintenance of all protection
equipment including:
- Each protection scheme, including settings.
- Remote interrogation.
- Analysis and fault location.
- Microprocessors relay software and hardware.
6.6.2 Switchgear
6.6.2.1 General
6.6.2.1.1 Scope of Work
The Contractor shall design, manufacture, test and erect all high voltage
equipment.
The equipment shall be manufactured and tested in accordance with the
appropriate parts of IEC 62271. If the requirements of this specification conflict
with any standard, this Specification shall be applied.
Erection shall be in accordance with the manufacturers instructions.
6.6.2.1.2 Equipment Ratings
Ratings and design parameters for all equipment shall be in accordance with
Clause 6.6.1.2 and any specific requirements stated in the individual Clauses.

106
6.6.2.1.3 Name Plates
Each item of equipment shall be provided with a name plate in accordance with the
standard appropriate for that equipment.
The name plates shall be made of a durable, corrosion resistant material, engraved
or stamped to provide permanent marking.
6.6.2.1.4 Terminal Palms
The main terminals shall be in accordance with the relevant standards unless
otherwise stated in this Specification. The non-mating face shall be spot faced or
medium machined for correct seating of the bolt heads and nuts.
The terminals shall be capable of withstanding the forces arising from system
faults acting concurrently with the maximum wind loading.
6.6.2.1.5 Low Voltage Cable Terminations
The terminals for external connections may be of the stud type, using studs of at
least 5mm diameter, or of the rail mounted insertion type. Pinch screw terminals
where the screw bears directly on to the conductor shall not be used. Terminals
shall have a positive locking feature provided by spring washers etc.
Wire terminations to stud type terminals shall be by means of solderless
compression type lugs or another type approved by the Employer. Any links shall
be of copper, studs, nuts and flat washers shall be of brass, and spring washers of
stainless steel. All links, studs, nuts and flat washers shall be chromium plated.
6.6.2.1.6 Terminal Board
Each item of Plant shall be provided with a terminal board to which all auxiliary
power and control supplies and all control, indication, trip and alarm circuits and
instrument transformer secondary circuits which are required to leave the Plant
shall be connected.
The terminal board shall be housed in a weatherproof metal enclosure or control
cubicle, as specified in Clause 6.6.2.1.14.
6.6.2.1.7 Earthing Terminal
Provision shall be made for the attachment of a flat copper earthing strip near the
base of the equipment and to control cubicles. Holes for bolts to attach the strip
may be drilled in channel or angle members of the equipment or provided in a lug
at least 10 mm thick welded to the equipment. Tapped holes and studs are not
acceptable.
6.6.2.1.8 Surface Finish
All external ferrous surfaces shall be hot dip galvanized. If galvanizing is not
practical, alternative surface finishes may be used, subject to approval by the
Employer.

107
6.6.2.1.9 Insulating Medium
The insulating fluid shall comply with the requirements of the appropriate IEC
60296.
PCB shall not be used. The insulating oil or other fluid used in the equipment shall
contain no PCB.
6.6.2.1.10 Porcelain
All bushings, porcelain shells and insulators shall be of the same Colour, to the
approval of the Employer.
6.6.2.1.11 Pollution Performance
The pollution level for the equipment, with regard to creepage distance and profile,
shall be not less than heavy as specified in IEC 60815 - Guide for the selection of
insulators in respect to polluted conditions.
6.6.2.1.12 Insulators
All insulators of each voltage shall be of the same type and shall be
interchangeable between items of Plant of the same voltage.
6.6.2.1.13 Fittings and Accessories
The equipment shall be fitted with the following accessories:
(1) Inlet and outlet valves for oil sampling and filling of all oil filled equipment. Only
gate type valves shall be supplied.
(2) Oil level indicator.
(3) Level indicator for any diaphragm or bellows.
(4) Pressure relief device.
(5) Lifting lugs or similar provision.
6.6.2.1.14 Control Cubicles
Control cubicles shall have doors with internal hinges and provision for padlocks.
The doors of each cubicle shall be provided with stays to prevent them from
swinging free. All equipment in the cubicles shall be accessible and where
applicable, internal panels shall be hinged to allow access to the back of panel
wiring. All joints and external attachments shall be fully seal welded.
Each cubicle shall be weatherproof with degree of protection complying with IEC
60529 designation IP55. Each cubicle shall be provided with a heater of adequate
rating to prevent condensation within the cubicle under the specified service
conditions. Each heater circuit shall be fused. Heaters shall be controlled in each
cubicle by a humidistat with adjustable operating range and a cut-out thermostat
with adjustable operating range, to prevent overheating.
A weatherproof, outdoor, 10A, single phase, 230V general purpose combination
switch-plug outlet shall be fitted on the outside of each cubicle. It shall be wired to
a fuse and shall be rain-protected by a canopy.

108
6.6.2.1.15 Inspection and Testing
(1) General
The cost of all routine and acceptance tests and specified type tests shall be
supplied as part of the bid.
Where type tests have been previously carried out for the same design of
equipment being offered, these shall be listed in the schedules and copies of test
certificates included.
Where such tests are for equipment not exactly as that specified, then Contractor
shall provide additional information in support of the relevance of such
certificates to the equipment specified. A technical assessment will be made of
the information provided and where the information is considered inconclusive
and further tests are required, they shall be performed at the Contractor's expense.
Where the standard provides for alternative rated dielectric test levels, the higher
test level shall apply.
(2) Tests on Insulating Oil
The Contractor shall take oil samples from all equipment and perform electrical
and chemical tests listed below in the following manner:
(a) One sample per processing batch prior to HV testing.
- Electrical - electric strength 65 kV (min) and dielectric dissipation
factor at 90C.
- Dissolved gases - hydrogen, oxygen, nitrogen, carbon monoxide,
carbon dioxide, methane, ethane, ethylene and acetylene.
(b) On completion of HV testing, oil samples shall be taken from all units of
each batch and tested.
Dissolved gases - hydrogen, oxygen, nitrogen, carbon monoxide, Carbon
Dioxide, Methane, Ethane, Ethylene and Acetylene
(c) Samples shall also be tested for water content, in (b), only.
(3) Check Tests by the Employer
the Employer reserves the right to direct the Contractor to carry out additional
check tests. Such tests may include repetition of tests carried out at the maker's
works (modified in intensity and value where provided in the relevant standards)
and other such tests as may be considered necessary by the Employer to prove
compliance with this Specification. The costs of these tests shall be borne by the
Contractor.
the Employer shall have the right during the General Warranty Period to carry out
such field tests on the equipment whilst in operation on its system as is deemed
necessary.
In the event of these check and/or field tests proving that the Plant is satisfactory,
all costs will be borne by the Employer, but in the case of faulty Plant, the

109
Contractor shall bear the cost of the tests, of replacing or amending the Plant and
all further tests in connection therewith.
Any expense in having Contractors representatives present at the tests shall be
borne by the Contractor.
6.6.2.2 Circuit Breakers
6.6.2.2.1 General Requirements
The Circuit Breakers shall comply with IEC 62271-100, IEC 62271-1 and other
relevant international standards
6.6.2.2.2 Operation Mechanism
Circuit breakers shall be motor wound spring or hydraulically operated. Motors
shall be 400/230 VAC. Pneumatic operation is not acceptable.
220kV circuit breakers shall have independent pole operation to minimize the
possibility of a stuck breaker prolonging the duration of a multi-phase fault.
They shall be capable of single pole, one shot, automatic, slow speed reclosing.
6.6.2.2.3 Accessories
The following accessories shall be provided with each operating mechanism:
(1) Mechanical position indicator visible externally to the mechanism enclosure
marked "I" (red background) - closed; "O" (green background) - open.
(2) Duplicate trip coils for each pole which shall be mechanically, electrically and
magnetically separate.
(3) One "CLOSE" push button, for each three phase breaker.
(4) Separate TRIP push buttons for energizing either trip circuit locally.
(5) Trip operation counter.
(6) Anti pumping relay
(7) SF6 gas density monitor shall be provided for alarm and lockout when the gas
density is below the normal operating density range.
(8) Eight spare auxiliary contacts capable of being set N/O or N/C.
(9) Indicators in the form of relay flags or LEDs for monitoring alarms which shall
be capable of being reset locally.
(10) Device for manual slow closing and opening of the circuit breaker during
maintenance. Provision shall be made for prevention of a spring - charging motor
turning the manual - charging handle if inadvertently energized during the manual
charging operation. The manual operating device shall be located inside the
operating mechanism box.
(11) Lifting lugs.

110
6.6.2.2.4 Insulating Medium
SF
6
gas is the preferred medium for arc extinction and the circuit breaker shall be
supplied filled with gas complying with IEC 60376.
6.6.2.2.5 Characteristic of Equipment
The required rating for all circuit breakers shall be as follows:
(1) 220kV Circuit Breaker
(a) Standard IEC 62271-100
(b) 1 pole per phase, SF6 type and outdoor location (3 phase)
(c) Rated voltage 245kV
(d) Rated current 3150A
(e) Rated breaking current 50 kA
(f) Short circuit withstanding current 50 kA/3s
(g) Number of pole chamber 1
(h) Operation cycle O-0.3s-CO-3minutes-CO
(i) Total breaking time s 70ms
(j) Total closing time s 100ms
(k) Number of rated short circuit
current breakings
> 20 times
(l) Auxiliary contacts 12NO+12NC
(m) Spring gear set ( motor / manual)
(n) Instantaneous & time O/C protection for circuit breaker
(o) Auxiliary electric source
1) motor 400/230V AC
2) Closing and tripping coil 220V DC
(p) Attached equipment support
(q) Attached equipment pole clamping
The CTs shall comply with IEC 60044-1 and all other relevant IEC standards.
The single line diagram included in Volume 9 Drawings shows the location and
number of cores for CTs. However, it is the Contractors responsibility to design,
supply and locate CTs to meet the requirements of his designs for control,
protection and metering provided under the Contract.

111
6.6.2.3.2 Ratings
The rated or assigned values of CTs being offered by the Contractor shall be stated
in Schedule Vol. 12 Information shall also be provided of the short time overload
capabilities during periods of continuous operation at normal rated current.
6.6.2.3.3 Secondary Terminals and Terminal Box
Each end and each tapping of each secondary winding shall be brought out to a
terminal board in a weatherproof and dustproof terminal box and shall be labeled
in accordance with the standard. Suitable earthing terminals shall be provided in
the box for earthing any unused windings.
6.6.2.3.4 Ratios
Change of ratio shall be by means of secondary tappings and not by primary
reconnections. Intermediate ratios on metering "M" type CTs shall be possible by
selection of any of the secondary terminals and the class must be maintained for all
such ratios.
All secondary windings shall be of the multi-ratio type and have secondary
tappings suitable for the initial loads and the future development of the substation
and power system.
6.6.2.3.5 Secondary Windings
The windings shall be evenly distributed around the core to produce a negligible
leakage reactance on all ratios.
Secondary windings and connected equipment shall be protected against damage
by electrical contact with windings at system voltage as the result of breakdown of
insulation, by the provision of an earthed shield between primary and secondary
windings. This shield shall be earthed at the end closest to the "P2" primary
terminal.
6.6.2.3.6 Current Transformer Monitoring Facilities
Monitoring facilities shall be provided for each unit and shall include:
(1) Oil level indicator and pressure indicator.
Any indicator shall have Coloured safe/danger zones and be easily visible from
ground level.
6.6.2.3.7 Arc Gaps
Arc gaps shall be provided between secondary terminal S1 and the terminal of the
highest turns ratio on all secondary cores where the induced open-circuit voltage
between these terminals (across the full secondary winding) can equal or exceed
5kV peak with rated sinusoidal current flowing in the primary winding.
6.6.2.3.8 Partial Discharge Test
The CT shall have a partial discharge free service performance. The Contractor
shall provide a table of guaranteed partial discharge magnitudes and routine test
voltages for the purpose of evaluating performance.

112
6.6.2.3.9 Magnetization Curve (Protection Cores)
The exciting current in the secondary winding of each core shall be measured at a
number of voltages such that the saturation curve can be drawn for each core from
approximately 1% to 200% of rated secondary current.
The Contractor shall present the test results obtained as a series of magnetization
curves, with complete scale multiplying factors for each ratio on tapped secondary
windings. Each curve shall be clearly labeled with the current transformer serial
number, core number and ratio.
6.6.2.3.10 Dielectric Dissipation Factor
The dielectric dissipation factor of the high voltage insulation shall be measured as
a routine test in accordance with IEC 60044-1.
6.6.2.3.11 Characteristic of Current Transformer
(1) 220kV current transformer:
Standard IEC 60044-1
Type
Rated voltage
outdoor, one pole
245kV
Transformation ratios 400-800-1200/1A
800-1200-2000/1A (Feeders)
Accurate level of coil No.1, 2 0.2, 0.5 - 30VA (for
measurement)
Accurate level of coils No.3, 4, 5, 6
Terminal connector
5P20 - 30VA (for protection)
6.6.2.4 Voltage Transformers
The VTs shall be of the capacitor divider type and shall be manufactured and
tested in accordance with IEC 60044-5 unless otherwise stated in this
Specification.
The single line diagram included in Volume 9 Drawings shows the location,
voltage ratios and capacitance of VTs. However, it is the Contractors
responsibility to design, supply and locate VTs to meet the requirements of his
designs for control, protection, and metering provided under the Contract.
The rated or assigned values of VTs being offered by the Contractor shall be stated
in his bid.
6.6.2.4.2 Characteristics of Voltage transformer:
(1) 220kV Voltage Transformer:

113
Type of single phase, coupling capacitor and VT, outdoor.
Rated voltage 245 kV
Transformation ratio
kV
3
11 , 0
/
3
11 , 0
/
3
11 , 0
/
3
11 , 0
/
3
220

Number of secondary coils 4 Main Metering points
Transformation ratio
kV
3
11 , 0
/
3
11 , 0
/
3
11 , 0
/
3
220

Number of secondary coils 3 Standby Metering points
Rated capacity 50VA
Attached equipment pole clamping

6.6.2.5 Disconnectors and Earth Switches
Disconnectors and earth switches shall comply with IEC 62271-102.
6.6.2.5.2 Operating Mechanisms
Disconnectors shall be power operated by means of 220V DC motors. Motors shall
be protected with thermal overload devices and all open and close contactors
shall be fitted with mechanical and electrical interlocking.
Earthing switches shall be manually operated and shall be designed to be mounted
on either or both ends of the disconnectors.
The power operated disconnectors shall be capable of being operated manually.
The handle or operating mechanism shall be provided for the manual operation of
disconnectors and earthing switches and this shall be positioned so that it allows
convenient operation by one man. The maximum length of the earthing switch bar
type handle shall be 1200 mm and the maximum operating force shall be 250N.
The maximum operating force for the general type handle for disconnectors shall
be 90N.
The earthing switch shall be designed such that if closed onto live conductors,
there will be no backlash force imposed on the operator.
All disconnectors and earthing switches shall be capable of being padlocked in the
open or closed position.
6.6.2.5.3 Accessories
The following accessories shall be provided, when applicable, for each operating
mechanism:
(1) With power operated mechanisms - a control switch for local operation, marked
open-normal-closed. This switch shall be spring return to the normal
position.

114
The selector and control switches shall be mounted inside the control box.
(2) A mechanical open-closed position indicator. This shall accurately show the
open and closed positions to reduce the possibility of causing strain to the
operating gear when operating manually.
(3) Four spare auxiliary contacts capable of being set to N/O or N/C.
(4) If required by the design of the switchyard insulation co-ordination, rod gaps
shall be fitted to all three phases, mounted on the required side of the
disconnector.
6.6.2.5.4 Main Contacts
All contacts fixed or moving shall be made of copper for the base material with
silver for the contact face material. The thickness of contact face material shall
meet all service and design requirements.
6.6.2.5.5 Earthing
Each operating handle and down rod or drive shaft, shall be provided with:
(1) A flexible earth connection of not less than 70 mm equivalent copper cross
sectional area
or
(2) A suitably tensioned non-ferrous wiping contact connected to an earthing
terminal in the case of multi-turn handles or shafts. The earthing arrangement of
the operating handle shall be separate from all others.
6.6.2.5.6 Characteristics of Disconnector
(1) 220kV disconnector:
Outdoor type 3 phase, centre break
Rated voltage 245kV
Rated current
Rated short-time withstand current
1600A
50kA/1s
Driven
- The main blade is controlled by motor - motor voltage: 220V D.C
- Earthing blade controlled manually or by motor.
With interlocked earthing blade and main blade.
Auxiliary contacts
- 6NO+6NC for the main blade
- 6NO+6NC for earthing blade
Attached equipment support
Attached equipment pole clamping

115

6.6.2.6 Insulators
The insulators shall comply with IEC 60815 unless otherwise stated in this
Specification.
6.6.2.6.2 Cementing of the Components of an Insulator Unit
The metal fittings and the porcelain components of an insulator unit shall be
cemented together, preferably with Portland cement or alternative approved by the
Employer. Sulphur cement shall not be used for outdoor insulators to cement the
porcelain to the metal fitting in contact with current carrying components. A
description of the method of cementing shall be supplied.
6.6.2.6.3 Test Requirements
All type, batch and routine tests for the insulators shall be carried out in
accordance with the relevant IEC Standards.
6.6.2.6.4 Characteristics of Insulator
(1) 220kV supporting insulator
Standard IEC 60273 & IEC 60168
Creepage distance 31mm/kV
Minimum damaged strength
- Bending strength > 6000 N
- Tension strength > 80000 N
- Twisting strength > 5000 N
Withstand voltage
- Power frequency in dry/wet conditions 530 kV/460 kV
- Lightning impulse 1050 kV

(2) 220kV string insulator
Creepage distance 31mm/kV
Mechanic-electrical damaged strength 2 x160kN
1 x160kN
6.6.2.7 Surge Arresters
6.6.2.7.1 Standards
The Plant shall be in accordance with IEC 60099 and other relevant IEC standards.

116
6.6.2.7.2 Type
The surge arresters shall be outdoor, metal oxide resistor type.
6.6.2.7.3 Sealing and Filling
The arrester shall be effectively and hermetically sealed.
The method of sealing against atmosphere shall be of a well proven type and shall
be direct and positive.
Sealing surfaces shall be treated to prevent corrosion and moisture accumulation.
6.6.2.7.4 Pressure Venting
A pressure relief device shall be incorporated where there is a risk of explosive
shattering of the insulator should the surge arrester malfunction. The design of the
device shall be such that it may be visually determined from ground level if the
device has operated.
6.6.2.7.5 Characteristics of Surge arrester
(1) 220kV surge arrester (nominal voltage)
Standard IEC 60099-4, IEC 60099-1
Type of out-door, ZnO 1 phase
Rated voltage 192 kV
Maximum working voltage 154 kV
Neutral earthing conditions effective grounded
Residual voltage (8/20s - 10kA) 505 kV
Energy absorbent ability 7.8 kJ/kV U
r

Accessories counter and insulated base
terminal connectors

(2) 19kV surge arrester:
Rated voltage 15.7 kV
Maximum working voltage 12.5 kV
Neutral earthing conditions insulator grounded
Energy absorbent ability 3.6 kJ/kV Ur
terminal connectors
(3) 6.6kV surge arrester

117
Rated Voltage 8.4kV
Neutral earthing conditions insulator grounded
Maximum working voltage 9 kV
Energy absorbent ability 3.6 kJ/kV Ur
terminal connectors
6.6.2.8 Tariff Metering
(1) General
The Contractor should refer to the Regulation of Ministry of Industry and Trade
(MOIT) on Technical Requirement of Metering System for Power Station in the
Circular of MOIT No. 12/1010/TT-BCT dated April 15, 2010 for the detail
requirements of tariff metering design for the power plant.
Active power and reactive power of revenue metering system operate for trading
purpose. The metering equipments are placed on cubicles at switchyard control
room. This system is included main and spare meter.
Main meter is placed on high voltage terminals of generator transformers and
station transformer.
Backup meter is placed at the 220kV outgoing feeder of Plant.

6.6.2.9 Conductors and Busbars
The 220kV system uses AAC-910, ACSR-500 conductor for connection.
a) 220kV busbar uses 2 x ACC-910 conductors.
b) Connection of 220kV equipment uses 1xACSR-500 conductor for feeders.
GT1, GT2 main transformer feeders uses 2xACSR-500 conductor.
c) These conductors are fixed by clamps spaced 4m to 5m..
6.6.3 Technical Service
6.6.3.1 Protection Systems
The scope of the Work covered by this Specification includes the design, supply,
installation and commissioning of protections for the following:
1. 02 feeders for main transformers (GT1, GT2)
2. 02 feeders for 220kV transmission lines:
3. 01 feeder for 220/6.6-6.6kV ST transformer

118
6.6.3.2 Protection Policy
Protection and control system used for switchyard of the Project will be designed
according to Vietnam standards and regulations of Vietnam Electricity (EVN) as
well as applying national standards. Protection and control system used for
switchyard of the Project will be designed according to following documents:
Electric protection of MOI - Part IV-11TCN-21-2006

Document No. 5498/EVN-KTSX dated 27/11/2008 of EVN on the
manufacture of relays.
(1) Protection Definitions
A fault is an unintended connection which may occur between phases or from
phase(s) to ground. Such connection may be solid (zero impedance) or may
contain impedance.
The faulty circuit is the smallest part of the system which is bounded by circuit
breakers in which the fault is contained.
Reliability is the measure of a protection scheme's ability to operate when
required.
Security is the protection scheme's ability to refrain from operating when not
required.
Local backup is the facility installed at the local busbar to provide for a single
contingency failure of protection equipment by utilizing two independent
protection schemes for fault sensing and trip initiation, and a scheme of
sequential tripping to cater for circuit breaker failure.
(2) Basic Protection Policy
The basic aim of protection of a switchyard is to provide accurate recognition of a
fault condition and to ensure rapid isolation of the faulty circuit from the system.
In achieving this, the protection scheme should embody the following features:
(a) High reliability and security
In the event of a trade-off, the former takes priority.
(b) Fast operating times:
- To minimize damage both to the faulty circuit and to the adjacent
parts of the system due to the passage of fault current
- To maintain system stability.
(c) A complete backup system which employs either a remote protection
system or local backup in accordance with standard practices and which
will provide fast fault clearance in the event of a single contingency
failure of any element of the protected scheme.

119
(d) Where necessary, a protection signalling system shall be provided to
accelerate tripping, including remote tripping due to local breaker
failure.
(3) Protection for Circuit Breaker Failure
Duplicate breaker failure protection shall be applied locally and the necessary
relays shall be provided either externally or in-built within protection schemes.
Failure of any circuit breaker to trip within its normal time shall result in a local
trip and lockout of all the appropriate circuit breakers necessary to isolate the
fault.
Duplicate circuit breaker failure intertrips protection signalling via optical fibre to
the remote end of the line shall be provided for both of the 220kV Thai Binh TPP
to Thai Binh lines. Automatic reclose of remote line circuit breakers shall be
blocked following a permissive receipt of a circuit breaker failure intertrip signal.
6.6.3.3 General Specification for Protection Equipment
All high voltage apparatus in the substation and all associated transmission lines shall
be protected in accordance with the basic protection policy, Clause 6.6.3.2 (2)
(1) Equipment Considerations
In general, the following considerations shall apply to protection relays and
equipment:
(a) Each of the duplicate protections shall be either from different
manufacturers, or if from the same manufacturer, shall employ different
operating principles. This is to prevent any common mode failure between
duplicate protections causing a failure to operate under fault conditions.
(b) Independent duplicate tripping supplies shall be provided from two
batteries.
(c) Relays shall be flush mounted in cubicles or on rack type panels.
(d) Each protection system shall be connected to its own separate CT core.
(2) General Protection Relay Requirements
All protection equipment supplied under the Contract shall comply with the
requirements of IEC 60255 Electrical Relays.
Main protection relays such as line and transformer differential relays, distance
relay or overcurrent relay, etc, will be manufactured by manufacturers approved
by the Employer such as ABB, Siemens, AREVA, SEL, and Toshiba or
equivalent.
Main protection relay should be digital type with interface according to
procedures of IEC 60870-5-103, DNP, Modbus, etc.
Type test certificates shall be provided for each type of protection relay proposed
for use under the Contract and in particular, the certificates shall indicate that the
relays have met the requirements of the following:
IEC 60255-5 Insulation Tests for Electrical Relays

120
IEC 60255-1 Measuring Relays and Protection Equipment
IEC 60255-22-1 1 MHz Burst Disturbance Tests
IEC 60255-22-4 Fast Transient Disturbance Test
IEC 60255-22-3 Radiated Electromagnetic Field Disturbance
Tests
The relays operating within the voltage range shall not result in a change in
accuracy greater than 5% at any setting.
(3) Relay Settings
The Contractor shall:
(a) Determine the appropriate CT ratios and relay settings for the protection of the
equipment.
(b) Provide details of all calculations used to determine the settings for all
protection equipment.
(c) In the case of microprocessor based relays, provide a copy of the software for
the application of relay settings and remote interrogation.
(d) The Contractor shall make arrangements with the relay manufacturer to supply
firmware upgrades to the Employer at no cost where it is can be shown or it is
known that a firmware upgrade is essential for the correct functioning of the
relay. The upgrades shall be carried out by a change in EPROMS or by
downloading the new firmware version from a PC.
(4) Remote Interrogation
Remote interrogation facilities shall be provided (via an external serial interface
or equivalent) for the line protection relays.
These relays shall be interrogable either by the power station control and
instrumentation system or by separate stand-alone communication facilities.
(5) Protection Analysis and Fault Location
Fault location facilities shall be provided for the 220kV feeders. This may be
provided either as a feature of the distance relays or as separate remotely
interrogable stand-alone units or as part of the disturbance recorder facility
which shall be provided to monitor the equipment. To assist in post fault
analysis, fault recorders shall be installed to record waveforms of currents and
voltages, and event recording of the status of protection relays, including details
of phase and zone of fault as appropriate. This information will be transmitted
to the National Load Dispatch Centre (NLDC) and Northern Regional Load
Dispatch Centre (NRLDC).
6.6.3.4 Specific Requirements for Protection Equipment
Protection relays shall be of the digital or numeric type and incorporate such
features as remote interrogation, fault recording, fault location and self checking.
The relay shall incorporate a self checking feature which continuously monitors or
automatically checks at regular intervals the condition of the relay and provides a

121
warning of incipient or actual failure by means of an alarm contact which shall be
connected to the switchyard alarm system.
Protections shall be mounted in the relay room in cubicles or on rack type
framework with links and fuses provided in all protection circuits.
Duplicate protection devices on any one circuit shall be physically separated from
each other on the racks or in the cubicles to allow maintenance to be carried out on
one protection device without affecting the other protection device.
6.6.3.5 Distance Protection for 220kV Transmission Lines
The relays shall be able to be used with signalling equipment to permit high speed
accelerated tripping of the circuit breakers at both ends of the line. To meet system
stability requirements fault clearance time at the faulted end of the line shall be not
more than 5 cycles and at the remote end, not more than 6 cycles.
The relays shall include all the necessary scheme options to permit selections to be
made for permissive under reach, permissive overreach, or blocking, and
weak-infeed. To cater for the failure of a tower which may result in total loss of
protection signalling, it is preferred that one of the distance schemes be configured
in a blocking mode.
Duplicate local backup for 220kV circuit breaker failure shall be provided with
permissive (fault detector checked) transfer tripping to the remote end using
optical fibre where provided. For low level faults associated with breaker failure
where it may not be possible to achieve permissive transfer tripping, the security of
the transfer trip signal shall be ensured by a 0.5 second Timer Check.
Any additional equipment required for the correct functioning of the line
protection shall be provided by the Contractor.
6.6.3.6 Busbar Protection
Low impedance busbar differential relays shall be used for the protection of high
voltage busbars. The differential relay shall be stable for external faults. The
operating time shall be less than 30 milliseconds and the busbar protection shall be
capable of detecting all combinations of phase-phase and phase-earth bus faults
within the protected zone.
(1) Each of the 220kV busbars shall be protected by two high speed, low impedance
protections (busbar differential relay)
A bus fault associated with line circuit breaker failure shall initiate a permissive
transfer trip to the remote end of the line. Circuit breaker failure protections shall
be duplicated.
(2) The 220kV connection between the generator transformers and the switchyard
shall be protected by duplicate protections comprising high speed, high
impedance protection. Alternately, the 220kV connections shall be included in
the generator transformer protection. Duplicate circuit breaker failure protection
shall be provided.

122
6.6.4 Equipment layout in the switchyard
In the switchyard there is one switchgear section of 220kV. Refer to Volume 9
Drawings.
6.6.4.1 220kV Equipment
(1) The 220kV switchgear equipment in the switchyard includes: circuit breakers,
disconnectors, current transformer, voltage transformer, supporting insulators,
towers, arms, feeders and busbars etc.
(2) Busbars are 2 x AAC 910.
6.6.5 Measurement, control and protection system
6.6.5.1 General
Rated frequency 50Hz
Rated input current 1A
Rated input voltage 110V AC
Auxiliary voltage 220V DC
Mounting of equipment
- Control equipment Front of cubicle
- Protection equipment Inside of cubicle
Relay:
- Type of digital with microprocessor manufactures should be approved
by the Employer.
- Applied standards of protection relays: IEC 60255
Level of protection:
- Indoor cubicle IP41
- Outdoor cubicle IP55
Cubicles shall be equipped with thermostatic controlled heating elements and
door controlled operated lights.
The circuit breakers, disconnectors and earthing switches shall be provided with a
mechanical and electrical interlock mechanism.
6.6.5.2 Switchyard control system
A computerized control system shall be equipped for the switchyard of the Project.
This system is used to do control, monitoring, data acquisition, measuring,
signalling functions for the substation complying with the relevant parts of IEC
61850. This system shall also perform communication functions between NLDC
and substation via the SCADA system complying to standard IEC 60870-5-101.
The control system shall meet the following requirements.

123
(1) Basic conditions
The computerized control system shall be designed by the same computerized
control system manufacturer as for the whole plant, for easy operation. The
applied design standards are international standards. The system shall be suitable
for the operation of high voltage switchyards.
The control system is a distributed system that means each control unit is
physically separate. The control units shall be connected to each other through a
local area network (LAN).
(2) Basic principles:
(a) The principle of switchyard control is that failure of any single control unit
shall not affect main high voltage switchgear equipment and not affect the
whole control system. The incidental action of operator on control system
(change, installation etc.) shall be minimized.
(b) The complete computer system and peripheral equipment shall conform to
international standards and be made up of the latest generation of
equipment. The computer control system is configured by modules to allow
for flexible installation, operation, replacement, expansion and upgrading in
the future. Optical fibre cable is to be used for connection between control
equipment. Communication procedures shall comply with international
standards.
(c) Maintenance, replacement and expansion of system components shall not
lock the whole control system.
(d) The control system shall be designed to derive power from the switchyard
auxiliary power system.
(3) Mimic displays consisting of simplified overviews and detailed bay diagrams
identifying all H.V. operational equipment shall be supplied.
(4) Operator control of circuit breakers and motorized disconnectors shall be possible
from the switchyard control room, the PCR and NLDC via SCADA connection.
(5) Dual return status for all controllable high voltage switchgear.
(6) Dual indication for all other high voltage Plant, such as earth switches.
(7) Display and trending of analogue data.
(8) High speed Sequence Of Event (SOE) recording to 1 mS resolution with clock
synchronised to the GPS system.
(9) Auto-reclose on all feeders with facilities for dead line, dead bus or check
synchronising as appropriate.
(10) Automatic synchronising.
(11) Switchyard alarms shall be displayed and logged by the system to identify all
abnormal conditions experienced by switchyard apparatus, auxiliary services and
power supplies (AC and DC), control, protection and communications systems.

124
(12) Switchyard status changes such as protection relay flags and output signal
indications that are necessary to clearly identify the correct sequence of
protection operation for a H.V. system fault shall also be logged.
(13) Control equipment connections to the switchyard apparatus shall be designed to
interface to conventional CT and VT contacts and coils as well as transducers.
(14) Remote control will be initiated through the operator VDU interface but backup
electrical control of circuit breakers and switches shall be provided such that no
single failure will affect both normal and backup positions. Minimum backup for
controls is a control switch for breaker operation and an ammeter for indication.
The control switch shall be such as to prevent inadvertent or accidental operation.
Where synchronising is required, synchronising facilities for the backup controls
is also required.
(15) Control for motor driven earthing switch is carried from control system of power
plant.
(16) Interface to the NLDC and NRLDC:

Supervision:
(a) Status indication of: circuit breaker: OPEN/CLOSED, disconnectors:
OPEN/CLOSED, earthing switches: OPEN/CLOSED
(b) Signalling: switchyard alarms including but not limited to:
Circuit breaker low gas pressure
DC system fault
AC system fault
Communication fault
Line protection fault
Main protection trip, etc.
(c) Measured values:
For busbar: frequency f (Hz), voltage U (kV)
For 220/6.6-6.6kV transformers: current I (A); voltage U (kV), active power P
(MW), reactive power Q (MVar), tap changer position.
For transmission lines: current I (A); voltage U (kV), active power P (MW),
reactive power Q (MVar).
(17) Functions of computer control system:
(a) Control function
Control functions include:
Opening - closing equipment: motor driven circuit breakers,
disconnectors and earthing switches.
Controlling on load tap changers.

125
Cooling system for transformers.
The switchyard control is performed by computer control system at 5
levels:
Level 1 From NRLDC and NLDC through SCADA.
Level 2 Control from the PCR of the plant by ICMS.
Level 3 Control from switchyard level. Substation level is performed
at switchyard control room with server computers, operation
station, and LAN network with communication protocol IEC
61850. The operation station must be able to perform all
control and supervisory functions of all active equipment
within the switchyard. Switchyard level shall communicate
with higher level SCADA.
Level 4 Control from bay level. Bay level, is installed with I/O sets
to assemble and process digital and analog data of bay. I/O
sets are fixed on control-protection cubicles and connect to
LAN network. I/O sets have control functions to enable
opening/closing of circuit breakers, motorized disconnector
switches, and earthing switches as well as being able to
control transformer on load tap changers. Bay control unit
display screens will show switchyard single line diagram,
position of circuit breaker, disconnector switch, earth switch,
measurement parameter of bay, etc.
Level 5 Control at equipment level shall be performed by control
switches/button devices on switchgear (circuit breaker,
disconnector switch and earthing switch).
The program determining the priority for each control level cannot be controlled
from two different locations at the same time. The status of controlled equipment
shall be displayed on the screen. The control software is able to select or cancel
operation command, reject commands causing faults, unsafe operation for the
power system in general and the switchyard in particular.
(b) Measurement signal:
Measurement signals and data shall be recorded in real time. This data shall be
stored in a database forming part of the Switchyard Control and Monitoring
System (SCMS). The following information can be viewed on the screen or
printed out:
- Current operating scheme of the switchyard and state of equipment including
- Circuit breakers, disconnectors and earthing switches.
- Tapping of the transformer on load tap changer.
- Operating states (local/remote etc.) of switchyard components (circuit
breakers, transformers, auxiliary sources etc.).
- Operating states of control equipment.

126
- Measurement data U, I, P, Q, f, Wh, VARh of electric components such as
transformers and outgoing circuits.
- Alarm data.
- Reporting (performance data, equipment state and emergency data).
(c) Storage and treatment of data function
- The data includes operating parameters, measured values and status of
equipment which shall be transmitted to the main computer and saved in the
memory in real time.
- Record data and event sequence, prior to, during and after a system
disturbance, irregular operation state or fault occurance.
- Each action of operator shall be recorded in the operation diary.
(d) Data processing function
Necessary calculations shall be conducted regularly for received information.
When there is irregular information, it should be recorded and alarmed to
operators (example: overload, AC or DC source shut-down, transformer oil
temperature, etc.).
Time shall be synchronous for all system equipment via GPS clock.
The above information can be studied at any time through computers or print
outs, as well as being able to copy and store the information on floppy discs or
other removable media for other uses.
(e) Interlock function of circuit breakers, disconnectors and earthing switches.
This system will use the above information in order to perform the interlocking
function in actuation of switching units according to the correct orders of
hierarchy.
(f) Monitoring and relay adjustment function:
The system shall be in contact with the switchyard protection relay system. With
capacities of:
- Observation and monitoring of relay data.
- Adjustment of relay data.
(g) System interface and extension
The computerized control system is equipped with ports for being able to
interface to SCADA system of NRLDC and NLDC with the current version
(complying with the national standards).
(h) Self test function:
The system shall have self-test function for all hardware & software and shall
alarm when a fault or abnormal state occurs.

127
(i) Configuration and technical requirement:
The SCMS shall operate according to the control configuration of the power
station ICMS.
6.6.5.3 Protection - Automatic equipment
The methodology for automatic protection of switchyard equipment is as follows

(a) 220kV Transmission line feeder:
220kV Transmission line feeder is installed 2 sets of protection as:
* Protection No 1 integrated function protection as:
Line differential protection (87 L) with teleprotection interface (85) by
optical fibre
Directional overcurrent protection and earth fault protection (67/67N)
Instantaneous and time overcurrent and overcurrent earth fault protection
(50/51) (50N/51N)
Breaker failure protection (50 BF)
Trip circuit supervision
Test block
Auxiliary relays, time relays, fuses, links, terminal blocks, labels,
conductors for connecting cubicle internals etc.
* Protection No 2 integrated function protection as:
Distance protection (21/21N) with teleprotection interface
Synchrocheck and reclosing (25/79)
Low voltage and high voltage protection (27/59)
Fault recorder (FR) and fault locator (FL)
Power swing protection
Test block
(b) Station transformer ST 220/6.6-6.6kV:
ST-220/6.6-6.6kV is installed sets of protection as:
Differential protection with restricted earth fault protection (87T, 64) and
fault recorder (FR)

128
(50/51) (50N/51N)
Over load of transformer (49)
Auxiliary relay and signal relay of transformer protection: Buchholz
relay, oil temperature relay, oil level, windings temperature
Trip/lockout relay
Test block
(c) 220kV side incoming feeder of ST- 220/6.6-6.6kV:
(50/51 & 50/51N)
Breaker failure protection (50BF)
Busbar voltage selection circuit suitable with disconnecting switch
position
Auxiliary relay to trip/lockout
Test block
(d) 220kV Busbar protection:
220kV busbar has two sets of independent busbar differential protections
which operate with Low or high impedance principle and operates each
feeder by module. Busbar protection cubicle is to be convenient for
expansion in the future as planned.
Accessories: MCBs, auxiliary current transformers, busbar selectors,
auxiliary relays, test blocks, terminal blocks, labels, conductors for
connecting cubicle internals etc.
(e) Fault Recorder cubicle:
220kV transmission line feeders and ST-220kV transformers will be
equipped with fault recorder systems which records the currents and
voltages in the process of a fault occurring and record the active time of
relay protection, etc.
Record system of transient process is composed of the following :
Record transient process set.

129
Microprocessor set
Computer set: CPU, screen, keyboard, printer, fault analysis
software, etc.
6.6.6 Auxiliary systems
6.6.6.1 AC - DC auxiliary power sources
(a) AC auxiliary electrical system is a 400/220V AC system consisting of two
independent distribution busbars supplied from two independent AC sources from
the power station auxiliary systems:
All AC auxiliary demands of the switchyard are capable of being supplied
from either of the two independent busbars and are protected by MCBs.
Coupling of two auxiliary busbars is equipped with coupling busbars MCB
with 2/3 electrical interlocking diagram and F27, F59 protection relay.
AC cubicles are placed in AC/DC room in the switchyard control building.
The 230/400V AC loads of the switchyard are as follows:
Motors for cooling transformer
Motors for on load tap changers
Motors for operating drive mechanism of circuit breakers, etc.
Lighting for switchyard.
Electric power for environmental equipment such as heaters, lighting,
ventilation, air conditioner for cubicles.
(b) 220V DC auxiliary electric source consists of two independent busbars, which are
supplied from two 220V-300Ah independent battery sets. These battery sets are
charged by two battery chargers.
DC auxiliary demands of substation are supplied from two independent
busbars and are protected by MCBs.
Coupling of two auxiliary busbars is equipped coupling busbars MCB with
ACO diagram and F27, F59, F64 protection relay.
DC cubicles is placed in AC/DC room in the switchyard control building
The 220V DC auxiliary loads include:
Signal circuits
Control circuits
Actuation circuits of circuit breakers.

130
(c) The AC and DC circuits in the switchyard are fed from separate power sources
from the station auxiliaries source and power supply circuits shall be able to take
power from one of two power sources.
6.6.6.2 Charger
Input voltage: 400/230 10%V AC, 50 5% Hz
Output voltage: 220 1,5%V DC with load 0-100%
Rated current: 63A.
6.6.6.3 Battery
Acid, sealed type.
Rated power for 8h: 300 Ah
Rated voltage: 220V 10%.
6.6.7 Lightning Protection system
In order to protect against over-voltage waves transmitted through transmission
lines into the transformer, all the high and medium voltage sides of the
transformer 220kV/6.6-6.6 kV and 220kV outgoing feeders shall be equipped
with surge arresters.
- Direct lightning protection
Earth wires are used for protecting against direct lightning strikes. They are set on
gantry structures in the switchyard.
220kV switchyard uses earth wires at the top of 220kV gantry structures, at a
height of 22m. They shield all equipment up to 17m.
Details of earth wire and lightning rods arrangement as well as areas shield
reference in Volume 9 Drawing. The protected areas shield all equipment and
items in the switchyard.
- Overvoltage wave protection: overvoltage wave protection from OHL to the
switchyard and the Plant by using ZnO surge arrester:
At the ends of 220kV transmission line
High-medium-low side of GT1-GT2, and Station Transformer

6.6.8 Electrical Works
6.6.8.1 Extent of Work
The Contractor shall design, supply all materials and construct the electrical
works and miscellaneous minor works for the switchyard.
This shall include, but not be limited to the following, together with any other
items deemed necessary to complete the switchyard:
(1) H.V. busbars and connections.

131
(2) Kiosks.
(3) L.V. cabling.
(4) Earthing.
(5) Lighting.
(6) AC and DC distribution.
(7) Batteries and chargers.
(8) Cubicles in relay room.
The Works shall comply generally with Volume 2 and specific requirements for
the switchyard as provided in the following Clauses.
The erection of major items of H.V. electrical Plant is covered by Clause 6.6.2.
6.6.8.2 General Specification
6.6.8.2.1 Labels
Identification plates shall be attached to each item of H.V. equipment and to
kiosks and boxes. This plate shall have a short description of the function of that
equipment, kiosk or box and the circuit in which the equipment is connected. For
equipment involved in switching operations, the description shall contain an
operating number which will become the basis for identification of this
equipment in control, indication and operation functions for the switchyard. This
operational numbering system will be provided by the Employer.
Coloured phase identification plates shall be installed on:
(1) Each side of each circuit breaker.
(2) Each disconnector.
(3) Each voltage transformer.
(4) Each set of longitudinal busbar supports.
Plates shall be attached to the outside of switchyard enclosure walls and gates
warning of the danger of high voltage equipment within the switchyard. Standard
design of plates shall be used if available.
Clause 6.6.8.4 specifies labelling of marshalling kiosks.
6.6.8.2.2 Painting
All outdoor metal surfaces, as far as is practical, shall be galvanized, either by hot
dip galvanizing in accordance with Volume 2 or by use of galvanized sheet steel.
Ungalvanized metal surfaces shall be provided with an effective vapor sealing
paint finish, applied in accordance with the best trade practice and generally in
accordance with Volume 2.
Before painting, all ungalvanized parts shall be completely clean and free from
rust, scale and grease and all external rough metal surfaces on castings shall be
filed.

132
The paint system shall be in accordance with best practice for hot and humid
locations.
All external surfaces shall receive a minimum of three coats of paint. The primary
coat shall be applied immediately after cleaning. The second coat shall be of an oil
and weather resisting nature and of a shade of colour easily distinguishable from
the primary coat.
The final coat shall be of glossy oil based and weather resisting non-fading paint of
a grey Colour.
Switchboards and cubicles shall be thoroughly degreased and passivated followed
by a corrosion inhibiting primer undercoat and finish coat. The inside of cubicles
shall be painted white, the outside colour shall be nominated by the Employer.
6.6.8.3 Busbars and Connections
Busbars and electrical connections in the switchyard shall have ratings as
specified in Clause 6.6.1.2 and be in accordance with IEC 61089 in respect of
current rating and material analysis. The conductor used shall be ACSR/GZ and a
common size shall be used for all connections.
Provision shall be made for expansion and contraction with variation in conductor
temperature. The design of joints and connections shall be such as to permit ready
dismantling.
Busbars shall be in continuous lengths between supports. Connectors for the
aluminium conductor shall preferably be compression type, and if necessary shall
be type tested.
Unless otherwise approved, busbars and connections shall be so arranged and
supported that under no circumstances, including short circuit conditions, shall the
clearances between live metal and earthed metal work or between conductors be
less than the specified distances.
Overhead conductors carried by the switchyard structures shall be erected with
sags and tensions to suit the electrical clearances in Clause 6.6.1.3. The design
shall allow for forces due to short circuit, wind and seismic loadings.
Disc insulators for overhead busbars shall be porcelain or toughened glass, ball
and socket type complying with the relevant parts of IEC 60383 and shall be
tested in accordance with this standard to meet the design parameters specified in
Clause 6.6.1.2 and mechanical requirements of the design. Type test certificates
shall be provided.
Overhead earth wires shall also be erected with sags and tensions to suit the
electrical clearances in Clause 6.6.1.3. The earth wires shall be connected to the
steel strain structure to provide a connection to earth through the structure.
Overhead conductors shall be strung preferably before the erection of switchgear,
busbars or other equipment in the switchyard.
When dissimilar metals are in contact, approved means shall be provided to
prevent electrochemical action and corrosion. Unless otherwise approved by the
Employer, joints and surfaces of copper or copper alloy fittings shall be tinned.

133
Suspension and tension conductor clamps shall be of approved types and shall be
as light as possible. They shall be designed to avoid any possibility of deforming
the stranded conductor and separating the individual strands.
Tension conductor clamps shall not permit slipping of, or damage to, or failure of
the complete conductor or any part thereof at a load less than 95 per cent of the
ultimate strength of the conductor. Clamps and fittings made of steel or malleable
iron shall be galvanized. All bolts and nuts shall be as specified and shall be
locked in an approved manner.
For inter-equipment connections with two or more conductors per phase, spacers
shall be installed at approximately 1 meter intervals to restrain dynamic short
circuit forces. The number of spacers in overhead spans shall be determined by
taking into account the avoidance of conductor abrasion during low velocity wind
conditions, and limiting the total tension in the span and on the supporting
structure during short-circuit conditions.
Care shall be taken to ensure that conductors are not damaged in any way. They
shall be free of scratches, cuts, protruding strands, bird caging, deposits of grease
or dirt, deformation or adhesion, which could increase corona discharge or radio
interference.
If the conductors are laid on the ground for erection purposes, they shall be
protected by hessian or timbers and shall not be moved unless raised clear of the
ground. No vehicles shall run over and no person shall walk on the conductors.
If the conductors are found to be damaged to a degree that simple cleaning or
polishing will not rectify the imperfections then the Contractor shall replace the
defective sections.
The Contractor shall determine the length required for each A.C.S.R. connection
so that when erected there is no bird caging of the conductor. The ends of the
conductors shall be cleaned by wire brushing, the terminating clamps fitted and
bolted to terminal palms or conductors. Where a tee or parallel connection is to be
installed, the conductor at this joint shall also be cleaned by wire brushing.
Before any aluminium contact surface is bolted, a liberal layer of aluminium
jointing compound shall be applied to each contact surface.
Where tubular aluminium busbars or connections are used, they shall be erected
and all necessary adjustments made on the equipment and/or supports so that they
are straight, in line and level before any Site welds are carried out. Tubular
aluminium busbars are preferred for the switchyard with bolted clamps for joints
in the busbars.
Where Site welds are required, the Contractor shall ensure that the busbars bed
truly in the supports and if necessary the busbars shall be supported in mid span
so that after welding a minimum and uniform sagging is achieved.
Erection of the busbars and connection shall not result in any load being placed on
equipment or supports other than the dead weight of the busbars and connections.
All surfaces which are likely to rub due to thermal expansion shall be liberally
coated with graphite.

134
6.6.8.4 Kiosks
For each circuit switchbay, a marshalling cubicle or kiosk shall be provided for
the marshalling of all ancillary equipment cabling associated with the circuit, e.g.,
busbar and line disconnectors, current and voltage transformers, etc., to be routed
by trunk multicore cables to remote control and relay panels in the switchyard
control building.
Alternatively, the Contractor may decide to marshall cabling within the relay
room and provide small CT and VT marshalling boxes and AC and DC
distribution boxes throughout the yard.
Busbar protection CT summation kiosks shall be provided to marshall the CT
cabling for each section of busbar. Each circuit shall be provided with isolation
links and be clearly labelled.
The kiosks shall be free-standing and of weatherproof and vermin-proof
galvanized sheet steel or aluminium construction. The degree of protection shall
be IP54 rating to IEC 60529. They shall be mounted at ground level.
A kiosk for the marshalling of all cabling going from the switchyard to the power
station proper, with the exception of control system cabling, shall be provided and
mounted in the relay room. The finish of this kiosk shall be compatible with other
protection and control cubicles in this room.
Kiosks shall be provided with the necessary terminal blocks, cable gland plates,
etc., for termination of multicore cables.
One fire protection equipment kiosk shall also be provided at each end of the
switchyard to house portable and mobile fire extinguishers, hoses, drums, etc.
required for fighting fires in the switchyard. The kiosks shall be painted red and
shall be equipped by the Contractor with suitable locally available equipment.
All kiosks shall be labelled on the front door with a description approved by the
Employer. Labels shall be non-corrosive, non-hygroscopic with lettering of a
contrasting colour and of an appropriate size.
6.6.8.5 L.V. Cabling
The Contractor shall design a cabling system for the effective control and
protection of all items of equipment. All cabling shall be PVC/PVC insulated
cable except connections between terminals in the same item of equipment,
cubicle, kiosk, box or panel, which shall be single core PVC insulated cable.
Manufacturing requirements for L.V. power and control cables, telephone cables
and communication co-axial cables are specified in Volume 2.
6.6.8.5.1 Conduits
Cables shall not be buried directly in the ground. Between cable trenches and
switchyard equipment and between items of equipment cables shall be installed in
heavy duty UPVC conduit to IEC 61386 and be of a minimum 100 mm diameter.
The top of the conduit shall not be less than 300 mm below the surface of the sub

135
grade. A cable pulling pit shall be constructed every 50 meters or less and
wherever conduits change direction.
Conduits shall be terminated at items of equipment using a haunch. Where
conduits terminate in cable trenches they shall be bell-mouthed.
Conduits will generally not be required for L.V. cables installed between ground
and equipment boxes. If additional mechanical protection is required, heavy duty
UPVC and other flexible conduit shall be used. Metallic flexible conduit shall be
galvanized or non-ferrous.
Holes drilled in steelwork members for the attachment of conduits shall be treated
with a corrosion inhibiting compound.
At the completion of cabling, cable haunches shall be sealed with 6:1 sand cement
mix or an approved cold setting compound 25 mm thick and crowned to drain.
6.6.8.5.2 Installation of Cabling
Cables shall be installed in the switchyard and between the switchyard and the
power station buildings generally in accordance with Volume 2.
The Contractor shall produce cable schedules showing full details of each cable
including cable number, core size, number of cores, type of cable, route
information and other details deemed necessary for cable identification and
tracing. Each cable shall have a unique number and a logical numbering system
shall be developed.
Cables between connection boxes and the ground not enclosed in conduit shall be
secured to the supporting structures using approved cable cleats with saddles.
Cables entering marshalling kiosks shall be suitably grouped and the space
surrounding them either in the base of the kiosk or in the opening at the top of the
kiosk footing shall be blanked off by pieces of plasterboard or approved
alternative, cut approximately to the shape required. A pliable mix of cement, sand
and vermiculite (1:2:4) shall then be packed about the cables and on top of the
plasterboard to a depth of approximately 50mm to provide a satisfactory air and
vermin seal from the trench entry.
A seal shall be placed on cable trenches where they enter buildings. The seal shall
take the form of a removable 3mm thick aluminium plate positioned across the
trench 50mm above the cables and attached to the trench walls at the point where
the trench enters the building, the gap between the plate and cables being sealed
off with a (1:2:4) mixture of cement, sand and vermiculite 150mm thick.
Alternative methods of forming this seal will be considered by the Employer.
6.6.8.5.3 Termination
Spare cores shall be left long enough to reach the furthest terminal on the item of
equipment and shall be insulated and safely and neatly secured to their parent
cable. As a rule, 20 percent spare cores shall be allowed for in a multi-core cable
except where there is no possibility of future requirements e.g. CT and VT cabling.
The type of lugs used to terminate wiring shall be of the pre-insulated compression
type, which grip the insulation as well as the conductor.

136
Wires terminating at pinch-screw type terminals shall be fitted with a sleeve
connector to protect the wire against damage. Where the terminal is fitted with a
pressure plate, the sleeve is not required and the wire shall be terminated bare.
These terminating on pin-strips shall be soldered.
The Contractor shall supply and fit to all terminations, approved flexible plastic
slip-on type wire identification ferrules with a wire number as shown on the
schematic diagrams. The numbering system for all terminations shall be in
accordance with IEC 81364.
Telephone type cabling shall be terminated by a technician experienced in
telephone wiring and in accordance with an approved Colour coding scheme.
Identification ferrules are not required.
6.6.8.6 Earthing System
6.6.8.6.1 General
The design and installation of the earthing of all equipment and of the earthing
systems electrodes and connections shall be in accordance with the
recommendation in the "Guide for Safety in Substation Grounding" IEEE No. 80,
Vietnam standards and regulations and the requirements of Volume 2.
6.6.8.6.2 Installation
The earthing system of the outdoor switchyard is designed following the electrode-
conductor earthing system. The earthing grid uses 300mm
2
section copper
conductors and u22mm copper electrodes which are 3m in length. Earthing grid is
embedded at a depth of 1m. Earthing conductors and earthing electrodes are
connected together by electric welding. Earthing resistance of the switchyard is
calculated to ensure the requirement of the standard: Rd < 0.5O. All equipment in
the switchyard is earthed and connected to the earthing system of the switchyard
by 95mm
2
section copper or equivalent galvanized steel cable or bar for above
ground connections. Earthing system of the switchyard will be connected to
earthing system of the plant.
Except as hereunder provided, the earth grid shall be installed after all civil works
have been completed. The conductor shall be laid at a minimum depth of 450 mm
below the finished earthworks levels. The grid shall be run across the tops of
foundations.
Where the earth grid passes under cable trenches, roads or foundations, the
Contractor shall install earthing conductor on the base and up the sides of
excavations before concrete is poured or base course placed.
If the design requires deep electrodes to be installed, a hole of minimum diameter
75 mm shall be drilled to the required depth, a galvanized steel strip inserted
leaving 500 mm above the ground and the hole filled with a suitably slurried 50-50
mixture of Bentonite and gypsum.
To minimise touch potentials earth mats shall be positioned near the operating
handle or operating mechanism cubicle of disconnectors and earthing switches
such that an operator's feet are on the mat when operating the handling or touching

137
the operating mechanism cubicle. The earth mat shall be bonded to the handle and
not directly to the earth grid.
Supplementary earth electrodes shall be 15 mm diameter copper rods of a length to
suit the earth grid design.
6.6.8.6.3 Portable Earthing Attachments
Provision shall be made at the following positions for the attachment of portable
earths:
(1) As close as practicable to earthing switches to permit maintenance to be
carried out upon the switches.
(2) Every section of bus or an associated busbar connection.
The design of the attachments shall suit the type of portable earths used by the
Employer.
6.6.8.7 Switchyard Lighting
Outdoor lighting system is arranged on three lighting towers with height of 20 m.
Each tower has a panel of 6 headlights with capacity of 500W each. The control
board of each lighting panel is arranged at the feet of lighting tower at the height
of 1.35m. Lighting cable is of steel wire armour. Cable on the tower is put in the
steel conduits. A lighting system shall be supplied for the switchyard which
provides an illumination level of approximately 15 lux for high voltage Plant, and
operational labels and access ways throughout the switchyard. A level of 3 lux
shall apply to other areas to provide security of the Site.
Either high or low level lighting, or a combination of the two, is acceptable. The
design of high level lighting shall be such that re-lamping does not require an
outage of H.V. equipment.
The lighting shall be supplied from the 400/230 V AC distribution boards, with
the load divided equally between the two boards and the circuits arranged such
that a loss of a circuit will not cause all lighting in a section of the switchyard to
fail.
6.6.8.8 L.V. AC Switchyard Power Outlets
400/230 V AC switchplug outlets shall be provided to service various
maintenance, testing and operation functions in the switchyard as follows:
6.6.8.8.1 100A Outlets
400V 100 A continuous rated switchplug outlets with connections for 3 phases,
neutral and earth shall be supplied from the AC distribution boards and installed in
each switchbay for H.V. testing of Plant and CT injection testing.
6.6.8.8.2 15A General Purpose Outlets
230V, 15A outlets shall be provided throughout the switchyard as follows:
(a) Two installed in each H.V. circuit breaker control box.
(b) One in each disconnector control box.

138
(c) One in each bay marshalling kiosk.
(d) One in each busbar protection summation kiosk.
The circuits for these outlets shall originate from the AC distribution boards in the
switchyard building.
6.6.8.9 Building Equipment
Rooms in the switchyard building shall contain equipment as detailed below.
The control room shall contain the switchyard control system cubicle, racks or
cubicles as specified in Clause 6.6.3.
Clearances around cubicles for operational, testing and maintenance requirements
shall be as follows:
1. 800mm minimum between wall and rear of cubicle where access only is
required to rear of cubicle; 1700mm where wiring or other work may be
required.
2. 1700mm minimum between front of cubicles and walls and other cubicles
All cubicles in the room shall be painted the same colour.
6.6.8.10 220V DC Distribution Boards
Two 220V DC distribution boards shall be provided in the control room to supply
all switchyard equipment, control, protection and emergency lighting
requirements. The equipment for the board may be cubicle mounted or rack
mounted.
Each board shall be connected to a battery and a switch provided on one of the
boards to parallel the two systems in the event of one of the batteries being
rendered unserviceable or when a boost charge is necessary.
Other features to be included on the boards are:
(1) Battery earth fault system consisting of a relay and a centre tapped resistor
which is connected between the positive bus and negative bus.
(2) Battery voltmeter selection switch and voltmeter wired to indicate positive
to negative, positive to earth, negative to earth.
(3) Ammeter measuring input amperes.
6.6.8.11 400/230V AC Distribution Boards
Two AC distribution boards shall be supplied and installed in the control room.
The outgoing circuits shall be arranged to allow for the redundancy of one board.
The equipment for each board shall be cubicle mounted.
These boards shall be supplied from the power station 400V station auxiliary
switchboards and shall supply all 400/230 V AC requirements in the switchyard.
The construction of the switchboards shall be generally as specified in Volume 2.

139
The switchboards shall incorporate circuit breakers of the appropriate current
rating for each subcircuit. Spare circuit breakers shall be installed for possible
future requirements.
The neutral busbar shall have a rating of not less than that of the associated phase
busbars.
Supply contactors shall be provided to automatically switch the other supply to a
board in the event of loss of the normal supply.
The following features shall also be included:
(1) Voltmeter indicating busbar phase to phase volts.
(2) Ammeter indicating current in one of the phases.
(3) Switches to isolate each incoming supply.
(4) Indicating lamps for each incoming supply.
(5) Busbar supervision relay with alarm contact.
(6) High temperature thermostat, set at 45C, with alarm contact.
(7) Earth leakage circuit breaker.

140
6.7 COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS

6.7.1 Scope of Supply
Communication and monitoring system for the Project shall be installed as the
following items:
6.7.1.1 SDH (Synchronous Digital Hierarchy) telecommunication system for connecting the
Project to the national power network.
The system is required to provide the following communication channels:
Supply transmission channels for protection relay system between the Project
and the related station (Thai Binh 220kV substation).
Supply transmission channels to serve supervision - dispatch - control system:
Transmission channels for hotline telephone between the Project and
NLDC (A0) and NRLDC (A1).
Transmission channels for SCADA between the Project and NLDC
(A0) and NRLDC (A1).
6.7.1.2 Inside-Plant Communications System
The system shall consist of all provisions necessary to service the following:
Communication between shift engineers and shift staffs in production areas in
the plant (boiler, turbine, CHP, etc.).
Management communication between areas in the plant.
Person-seeking announcement and production information (public address
system).
Mobile communication between areas in the plant
Image monitoring of the plant
The Contractor, after having done his survey work, shall co-ordinate his work
with the Employer and the Employers subsidiaries such as EVN Telecom,
NLDC (A0), NRLDC (A1) and Power Transmission Company No. 1 (PTC1) in
order his design, supply, installation, testing and commissioning of the
communication and SCADA/EMS systems are compatible with the existing
EVNs network.
The Contractor shall design, procure materials, install and test the complete items
of communication and SCADA/EMS systems as follows, but not limited to:
STM-4/ADM equipment at Thai Binh 220kV switchyard.
MUX/PCM 2x2 Mbit/s (electrical interfaces) at the Site.

141
Teleprotection
Modems
Non-metallic optical cable unit.
ODFs, patchcords, JBs
Main PABX, capacity of 700 ports; back-up PABX and subscriber network
Public address system
Supervision camera system.
UHF radio and paging system.
Local area network.
DC-48V power supplies, grounding and lightning protection for above
communication systems
Necessary equipments and remote-end integration for connection between the
power plant DCS (gateway) and EVNs SCADA/EMS system.
CCTV system including all cameras, monitors and recording equipment.

6.7.2 Equipment Operating Conditions
6.7.2.1 Operating Conditions
(a) Working temperature range
(i) Performing to Specification: Refer to Volume 2
(ii) Operational: Refer to Volume 2
(b) Supply output voltage range
Performing to Specification: Contractor to state
Operational: Contractor to state
(c) Current consumption: Contractor to state
(d) Noise potentials impressed by equipment onto the -48 V DC power supply:
- Psophometrically weighted to CCITT
- Rec O. 41 Blue Book Volume 4
- Fascicle IV.4, 1988: less than 0.5 mV
- Flat above 3 KHz: less than 1.0 mV
(e) No damage to equipment if equipment is subjected to an impulse on the
supply of 5.0 kV peak 1.2/50 microsecond of either polarity with a source
energy of 0.5 joules.
(f) Equipment tolerance to EM radiation better than:
10 KHz to 250 MHz : 2 mV/m

142
Over 250 MHz : 0.5 mV/m
(g) Be immune to, or be fitted with ancillary equipment to protect against the
effects of:
- Lightning strikes;
- Stray electromagnetic fields;
- Electrostatic fields;
- DC voltage surges on external lines;
- Earth grid voltage rise;
- Low frequency induction on external lines;
- Power supply voltage and current surges;
- Card failure or mal-operation on extraction/insertion with power
applied.
Terminals carrying potentially lethal voltages (greater than 32 V AC or
115 V DC) shall be covered and have a caution label attached.
All equipment must comply with relevant technical regulations and standards and
must be approved by the Employer.
6.7.2.2 Equipment Racks and Cubicles
All equipment shall be supplied mounted on steel equipment racks or cubicles of
maximum height of 2750 mm. All non-equipped space on the racks or cubicles
shall be covered with blank panels.
All equipment racks or cubicles shall be supplied complete with mounting
hardware appropriate to the height of the rack or cubicle and the overhead cable
runways. Suitable arrangements shall be made for the support of all cables
leaving the cable runway to the equipment rack or cubicle.
All racks and cubicles shall be earthed to the station electrical earth.
6.7.2.3 Equipment Alarms
All equipment shall include (where applicable):
(a) Local alarm/status/control display;
(b) Interfaces for extension of alarm/status/control to remote master; and
(c) Group (urgent/non-urgent) alarm interfaces for local extension within the
Site.
6.7.2.4 Communication Room Facilities
(a) Communication Room in the Central Control Building
The room has to ensure environment conditions according to TCN 68-
149:1995 standard:
Equip precision air conditioning.

143
Temperature: 5C 27C.
Relative humidity: max. 80% at the whole temperature range.
Equip CO
2
fire extinguisher.
The room shall be designed to minimize dust ingress. Access doors and
corridors shall be of sufficient size and layout to allow access for 2750 mm
communication racks and other communication equipment.
Racks shall be arranged in the room 1.5 m apart for ease of rack
manoeuvring and access to the front and rear. The room shall accommodate
the main exchange, a duplicated power supply and an alarm system.
Plinths shall be placed under the racks, packed to keep them level.
Access shall be provided for cables entering and leaving the room.
(b) Cable Runways
Cable runways, cable trays or cable mesh to run cables between racks shall
be provided in the room over each bayline, and shall be interconnected with
each other and extended to the main distribution frame and to the cable
entry points to the room. Separate runways or conduit shall be provided for
AC mains cables.
All cable runways shall be earthed to the station electrical earth grid. The
Contractor shall provide earthing details for approval by the Employer.
(c) Main Distribution Frame (MDF)
The MDF shall be installed in the room and shall use insulation
displacement technology in modular format. Sufficient 600 pair verticals
shall be supplied and installed to cater for the termination of all multiplex
channels. Provision shall be made in the design to cater for the number of
jumper wires interconnecting the services to the multiplex channels.
The MDF shall be earthed to the station electrical earth grid.
(d) Miscellaneous Equipment Racks (MERs)
MERs shall be placed strategically in the baylines to accommodate the DC
distribution panels, alarm panels, and any other general apparatus that may
be required.
(e) AC Supply
The Contractor shall supply a wall mounted AC distribution circuit breaker
panel to provide for the AC distribution within the room. Suitably rated
circuit breakers shall be supplied and installed to cater for the 50V modular
power supplies and other AC loads.
50% spare capacity of circuit breakers shall be provided.
General purpose 230V 10A twin socket wall outlets shall be provided at
each end of each bayline to power test equipment etc.
(f) 48V DC Distribution

144
Distribution shall be through circuit breaker panels and further distribution
for minor circuits through fuse panels. Spare capacity shall be provided.
(g) Alarm Requirements
A bay alarm panel shall be supplied and installed on each MER to cater for
all equipment alarms generated within the bayline. Equipment alarms shall
be accepted causing a LED, or lamp, to operate to indicate the source of the
alarm and an alarm buzzer to sound. Each alarm shall be classified as
priority 1 (requiring urgent attention) or priority 2 (not requiring urgent
attention). The alarm panel shall extend the priority 1 or 2 alarms to the
master alarm panel.
One bay alarm panel shall be designated as the master alarm panel (usually
located on MER1) and shall accept the priority 1 or 2 alarms from the bay
alarm panel which shall cause a LED, or lamp, to light to indicate the
bayline generating the alarm. The master alarm panel shall also extend a
communication alarm to the power station alarm panel on receipt of a
priority 1 or 2 alarms.
On alarm condition, all communications apparatus supplied under this
Contract shall provide a visual display of the fault on the apparatus front
panel, as well as an external general alarm output via a voltage free contact.
This contact shall extend an earth for connection to the bay alarm panel but
if other alarm outputs are proposed by the Contractor, they shall be
specified for approval by the Employer.
The communication room temperature shall be monitored and an alarm
shall be extended to the communication room master alarm panel if the
temperature moves outside a fixed temperature range or if the air
conditioners malfunction.
As well as the above earth alarms, the master alarm panel shall be able to
monitor 48V DC inputs and raise an alarm if the voltage drops below a
fixed reference level.
6.7.2.5 Grounding for telecommunication equipment
Use common grounding of substation and machine room to ground
telecommunication systems at the Site. Each grounding (surge voltage,
protection, task) is connected to system by separate ground wire. The value of
ground resistance base on TCN 168-141:1999 standard.
6.7.2.6 Lightning resistance
Lightning protection for telecommunication equipment conforms to TCN 68-
135:2001 standard, including:
Lightning resistance spread on AC power supply line.
Lightning resistance spread on information cable line.
Equipment lightning resistance; combine wire connection board of MDF to resist
the lightning that spread on information cable.

145
6.7.3 SDH Telecommunication System
6.7.3.1 Overview
This system will be furnished for the purposes of providing communication
channels for SCADA and hotline from NLDC (A0) and NRLDC (A1) to power
plant and channels for protection relay between the Project and relevant power
plant and substations of the Employer.
The configuration of the optical fibre communications system is shown on the
structure of optical transmission network in Volume 9 Drawings. Drawings of
equipment connection layout 1 and equipment network connection layout 2
(outside-plant) shows the detailed connection of equipments.
The Contractor shall be completely responsible for the successful design,
fabrication, testing, installation, supervision, Commissioning and after sale
services of all equipment to be supplied under this Project. This document
requests proposal from the Contractor for all of the hardware, software and
services needed to provide a full function and fully operational communication
system that shall meet the technical requirements stated hereinafter.
6.7.3.2 Optical Fibres and Accessories
(a) Purposes
To develop the maximum existing capacity of communication equipments and
link to the electric utility communication system, it is necessary to install optical
fibres links using of SDH/STM-4 (ADM configuration) and SDH/STM-1 (ADM
configuration) equipments between Thai Binh 220kV switchyard and central
control building, as well as between the Project and relevant power plants and
substations.
These links use synchronous optical equipments, multiplexer with optical
interfaces. These links will support telephone communication, PABX networking,
data transmission and computer networks, tele-protection signal transmission.
(b) Non-metallic fibre optical cable (NMOC)
Cable Construction:
The supplied cable shall be a non-metallic type for direct ground burial and
cabling in duct, single mode fibres. The core and the cladding shall consist of
glass, which is predominantly silica (SiO
2
). Coating usually made from one or
more plastic materials or composition shall be provided to protect the fibre during
manufacture, handing and use.
Around a dielectric central member will be made of fibre reinforced plastic, buffer
tubes and filling compounds are stranded to form the core of the cable. The
central member, which perform mainly as anti buckling element shall be coated
with a PE-jacket, if this is required to obtain the correct stranding radius. A
dielectric core wrap or binder is applied around the stranded loose tube core.
Water blocking material shall be made of either super-absorbent polymer
yarns/types or filling compound.

146
The cable must be of stranded loose buffer construction where fibres are
contained in a series of tubes (usually 6). The inner diameter of the tube must be
greater the diameter of the fibre bundle contained in the tube. The ratio of inner
diameter of the tube and the size of the fibre bundle must be large enough so that
the fibre does not adhere to the inner surface of the tube. At the same time, the
fibres must have enough free space inside the tube to provide the required level of
the mechanical and environmental performance.
The buffer tube shall be filled with a non-hygroscopic, non-fungus-nutritive,
electrically nonconductive, homogenous gel. The gel shall be free from dirt and
foreign matter. The gel shall be readily removable with conventional non-toxic
solvents; the fibre shall not adhere to the inside of buffer tube. Each buffer tube in
the finished cable is distinguishable from the others by means of colour coding.
The jacket shall not promote the growth of fungus and shall be free of holes,
splits and blisters. The cable jacket shall contain not metal elements and shall be
of a consistent thickness.
Non-metallic Optical fibre technical characteristics:
Standards: The relevant parts of IEC 60793
Optical fibre: single mode
Number of fibres: 24
Working wavelength: 1550 nm
Diameter fibre mode field:
Wavelength: 1550nm
Range of nominal values: (8.6 - 9.5) m
Tolerance: 0.7 m
Core concentricity error: s 0.8 m
Cladding noncircularity: s 2 %
Cladding diameter: 125 m 1 m
Max attenuation index
at 1310 nm: s 0.34 dB / km
at 1550 nm: s 0.22 dB / km
Transmitted signal dispersion
at 1310 nm: s 3.5 ps/nm.km
at 1550 nm: s 18 ps/nm.km
Cut-off wavelength: s 1260 nm
Operating temperature range: -20C +80C
Mechanical properties:
Type: non-metallic for duct installation and direct burial

147
Sheath: polyethylene
Type of sheath: anti-rodent and termite
Maximum tension strength:
>
2700N
Bending radius
During installation: s 20 times outer diameter
Post installation: s 10 times outer diameter
Working temperature: -5C
+70C
Relative humidity: (0 100)% non-condensing
(c) Optical Fibres joint box for line towers
The joint box shall be designed for connecting and branching OPGW cables at the
tee off-line and between OPGW and FO (non-metallic fibre optical cable) at the
terminal towers, wherever practical. The OPGW shall be brought down the towers
on the inside of the tower legs to a joint box located approximately (4
5) meters
above ground.
The Contractor shall supply the joint boxes, and associated mounting hardware, to
provide a protected environment for joining the OPGW to OPGW with
attachment of the OPGW to the tower and OPGW to FO. The joint boxes shall
suitable for mounting on the lattice steel towers. The joint boxes shall be fully
protected against corrosion and be dust and water proofed. The joint box shall be
designed for connection of the two OPGW conductors. Each joint box shall
provide access from one side only for both installation and maintenance. Access
to the joint boxes shall be a single lockable hinged door. Each joint box assembly
shall include all mounting hardware optical fibre splice bits cable seals and other
accessories for a permanent joint.
(d) Fibre optical cable terminal box with ODF
The Contractor shall supply terminal joint boxes with ODFs and associated
mounting hardware to provide a protected environment for the jointing and
terminating of the fibre optical cable.
Each joint box with ODF shall be fully protected against corrosion and dust.
Each joint box with ODF shall be included all mounting hardware, optical fibre
splice tray, pigtail, connectors, fusion point protector, cable seals and other
accessories for a permanent termination and distribution.
6.7.3.3 Equipment
a) Specific requirement for STM-4 equipment at Thai Binh 220kV Switchyard
- Configuration: ADM 1+1
- Optical STM-4 Interface L-4.2
>
06 ports
- Optical STM-4 Interface S-4.2
>
04 ports
- Optical STM-1 Interface L-1.2
>
04 ports

148
- Optical STM-1 Interface S-1.2
>
02 ports
- Optical STM-1 Interface I-1
>
02 ports
- Electrical E1/120 PDH interface (2Mbps)
>
63 ports
- Fast Ethernet 10/100BaseT interface
>
08 ports
b) Specific requirement for STM-1 equipment at the Site central control
building
- Configuration: SDXC
- Optical STM-1 interface L-1.2
>
24 ports
- Optical STM-1 interface S-1.2
>
02 ports
- Optical STM-1 interface I-1
>
02 ports
- Electrical E1/120 PDH interface (2Mbps)
>
42 ports
- Fast Ethernet 10/100BaseT interface
>
08 ports
c) Optical attenuator
For the achievement of suitable signal strength at the receiving ends of the optical
fibres, there will be additional equipment to avoid overload. This equipment will be
installed in the SDH system at the Site.
The Contractor shall be responsible for investigation, design, installation, testing and
Commissioning of the optical attenuator at the Site, compatible with the Employers
equipment.
6.7.3.4 PCM Multiplexer
- Configuration: drop-insert
- 64Kbps/G703.1
>
16 ports
- 4W E&M, G714
>
12 ports
- 2W remote subscriber (exchange side), Q552
>
08 ports
- 2W remote subscriber (subscriber side), Q552
>
08 ports
- 2W hotline, Q552
>
02 ports
- Data channel ITU-T V24/RS-232C/1200bps
>
04 ports
6.7.3.5 Teleprotection
- Standard: IEC-60834-1; IEC-60870-2; IEC 60793
- Function: transmit line distance protection signal over fibre optical.
- Number of commands:
>
3
- Security/dependability: better than IEC 60834-1
- Digital interfaces: ITU-T recommendations G703.6/2.048Mbps
- Respond time:
s
10ms

149
- Protection mechanism: 1+1
- Power supply: 48 or 220V DC (30%, +25%)
- Maximum consumption: 15W
- Operating temperature: 100C to 550C
- Operating relative humidity at 400C : 95%
- Storage temperature 250C to 700C
- Storage relative humidity at 230C : 100% without condensation
- Insulation-EMC: IEC 60384-1 and IEC 61000-4-2
6.7.3.6 Rack 19 Type
Standard: ETSI
Protection class: IP20 (minimum)
Rack shall be indoors, freestanding with door and lock for accommodating
equipment with dimension of standard structure 19. Hinged frame for
communication equipment mounting with insect screens and provision for cable
entry from bottom. The rack can be installed on the floor, against a wall, side-by-
side or back-to-back.
Rack shall have DIN bars, clamps, connection cable and fittings.
Colour: RAL
6.7.3.7 DDF/MDF Cubicle
Standard: ETSI
Protection class: IP20 (minimum)
Colour: RAL
Cubicle shall be indoor installation, freestanding with hinged front door and lock
for mounting DDF and MDF with insect screens and provision for cable entry and
exit from bottom and top. The rack can be stand-alone mounting.
Rack shall have bars, clamps, 2Mbps and subscriber terminal blocks, connection
cable and associated fittings.
6.7.3.8 Modem
(a) Modem for transmitting SCADA/EMS signals to A0
- Transmission: asynchronous
- Modem line speeds: 14400; 9600; 4800; 2400; 1200; 300bps
- DTE rate: 57.6; 38.4; 19.2kbps
- Standards: V.32bis, V.32,V.22bis,V.22, Bell 212A,Bell 103
- Dial up: Supported
- 2 & 4-Wire leased line: ready

150
- Compatibility: Hayes extended AT command set
- Error correction / data compression: MNP 2, 4, 5 & 10, V.42, V.42bis
- Power Supply: 48V DC
- Case size: rack modem 5.25
- Digital port: connectable with the back plane connections.
- Analog port: connectable with the back plane connections.
- Surge protection (power line): 8kV (exceeds IEC 61000-4-4)
- Surge protection (analog line): 3.75kVac
- Compatible with the existing system at NLDC (A0)
(b) Modem for transmitting SCADA/EMSs signals to A1
- Transmission: asynchronous, full/half duplex or simplex
- Interface 1: EIA RS-232-C/CCITT V.24/V.28, 9-pin D-sub female or 9-
pin detachable screw block
- Interface 2: EIA RS-422/RS-485/CCITT V.11 detachable 9-pin screw
block
- Interface 3: CCITT V.23 2- or 4- wire, 4 pin detachable screw block
- Transmission rate: up to 1200bit/s
- Overvoltage protection:
- Mains: breakdown voltage 440V at 230V AC and 220V at 115V AC
- Line: zener diodes, breakdown voltage 68V, discharge 600W for 1ms, gas
tubes 300V
- Power supply: 230V AC +15% -10%, option 115V AC
- Power consumption: <2W
- Compatible with the existing system at NRLDC (A1)
6.7.3.9 Power Supply
Two batteries 48V- 200Ah, 02 AC-220V/DC-48V/50A battery charger cubicles
and two 230VAC/16A power surge voltage protectors at the Site central control
building and 220kV switchyard.
Main source: AC from AC-230V/DC-48V/50A battery charger cubicle.
Standby source: From 48V-200Ah battery.
(a) Battery Charger Cubicle
Function:
- Charges in to the battery in boost mode and float mode
- Provides power source at 48VDC to communication equipment.
Mechanical Properties

151
- AC/DC Power source and its component shall be placed in metal
cabinet, which will be as compact as possible. It shall be equipped with
voltmeter, ampere-meter and input-output breaker
- The maximum height of cabinet shall be less than 2200mm
- Power supply shall have high efficiency and long lifetime
- Rise in temperature of rectifier shall not more than 650C in normal
operating condition.
Electrical characteristics
- Input voltage: 230V AC
10%, 50Hz
- Output voltage: 48V DC
15%
- Nominal output current: 50A
- Lightning surge resistance:
>
10kV
- Insulation resistance: earth to AC input 5M
- Withstand voltage: earth to AC input: 200V per minute
- PC interface: RS-232
- 230VAC/48V DC power sources should be regulated in equalizing
mode and supply of 48V DC at nominal load from 10% to 100%.
- In addition to disconnecting the load at the end of battery discharge as
standard function, load shall be re-connected automatically when 230V
AC power is restored.
- Built-in protective circuit shall be provided to prevent overload, surge
power short circuit condition.
Charger will have an automatic battery test facility, display to indicate the
operating parameters and alarm when load voltage drops over
10% nominal
voltage, including:
- High voltage
- Module failure
- Low battery
- Main failure.
Will have meter and control mode to indicate the following features
- Output voltage
- Load voltage.
Total metering and indicating error less than 1% of meter scale.
Installation materials, power cable, signal line, earth wire, connectors and control
software shall be also provided by Contractor.
Environmental Conditions: TCN 68-149.

152
(b) Battery
Type: free-maintenance, sealed lead acid environmental friendly
Rated voltage: 48V
Rated tank voltage: 12V
Capacity: 200Ah
Operating temperature: (5 - 45)C
Float charge: 2.23V/cell
High rate charge: 2.65V/cell
Average self-discharge level not more than 0.5% in 24 hours
Including connectors and clamps for interconnection of battery tanks.
(c) Power Surge Voltage Protector
Function will be as follow:
- Shunt surge diverter
- Shunt reduction filters
Rated voltage: 230V AC
15%
Operating voltage (max): 275V AC
Operating current: 16A
Indication: time of protection discharge
Guarantee (minimum): 5 years
Dimension: shall be module type for easy installation and maintenance
Protection level: II
Environmental conditions: TCN 68-149
All equipment must comply with relevant technical regulations and standards and
must be approved by the Employer.
6.7.4 Private Automatic Branch Exchange (PABX) System
6.7.4.1 Scope of Supply
The Contractor shall provide, install, test and commission digital main PABX and
back-up PABX located in the central control building telecommunications room
which extends to other buildings and plant areas under approval of the Employer.
6.7.4.2 Particular Requirements of Main PABX
All-in exchange include: cabin, power supply,
lightning support, MDF shelf, connector, attached
accessory, etc.:

Minimum capacity: 16

153
Analog subscriber: 500
Digital subscriber: 18
E1/2Mbps trunk line: 16
4W E&M trunk line: 16
CO trunk line: 8
Numbering capability: 07
Ethernet port for network management: 02
6.7.4.3 Console Table
Two console tables shall be equipped for dispatching duty table of the Project.
Console tables functions:
To be able to connect to hotline channels (hot-line)
Display on LCD about busy or idle statuses of hotline channels
It shall be possible for the shift operator to selectively answer incoming calls to
the console table. The other calls will remain in the call announcement queue
until they are answered.
Connecting console table to hotline channels:
Digital subscriber ports of the exchange are connected to MDF. One of that is
connected to console table by 5x2x0.5 cable which is zinc-covered cable to guard
against interference. To be able to connect to hotline channels (hot-line).
02 Hot-line channels transfer to A0, A1 are connected with CO ports on the MDF
rack.
The hotline channels which will be used to communicate with the dispatch
centres from the plant are connected to the exchanges subscribers and can be
programmed into speed dial.
6.7.4.4 Subscriber Network
The PABX switchboard subscriber network come out from main distribution
frame (MDF rack) located at the communication room in the central control
building.
In order to protect the switchboard gates against the lightning through subscriber
routes, the subscriber lightning protection units shall be provided with the
connection paddings on MDF.
6.7.4.5 Back-up PABX
The backup telephone private branch exchange (back-up PABX) provides an
independent telephone system for managers offices and operating staff offices.
The backup telephone private branch exchange (back-up PABX) will provide for
up to 100 extensions capacity. Major operation positions and working rooms
provided for persons who directly involves in the power plant operation shall be

154
supplied with at least two hand sets of separate connection links (one for the main
PABX and the other for the back-up).
The back-up PABX will be accommodated in the central control building and
have a separate DC supply. It will provide voice communications within the
power station as well as to the external public network of Vietnam (PTN).
The back-up handsets will be provided for a simple dialling code or programmed
push buttons. Location of these handsets is to be advised by the Employer.
6.7.4.6 Telephones (Main and Back-up)
Standard telephones shall have at least the following features capabilities:
Approved for connection to the public telephone network;
Capable of pulse or tone dialling with 0-9, * and # keys;
A 100 millisecond loop-break PABX recall key;
Be capable of storing at least 10 x 20 digit telephone numbers;
Stored telephone numbers are to be retained when the telephone is removed from
its socket.
Be capable of being wall mounted; and switchyard telephones shall be of
weatherproof construction.
In areas where the noise level is high, handsets shall be located in acoustic booths
or hoods which shall have a beacon mounted immediately on top which shall
flash when the extension number is dialled and a horn which shall sound.
Acoustic booths (or hoods) shall be lined with absorbing acoustic material and be
complete with a writing shelf. They shall be designed to reduce the background
speech interference level to 60 dB. Telephone boxes sound-proof telephone boxes
shall be provided on each of the three floor levels in the boiler/turbine areas. A
large flashing blue light shall be mounted on the outside of the box to indicate
that the phone is ringing.
6.7.4.7 Telephones Cable
The supply and installation of telephone cables is covered under Volume 2.
6.7.4.8 Intermediate Distribution Frames (IDFs) and Final Distribution Points (FDPs)
In locations other than communications room IDFs and FDPs shall consist of 2
verticals (of various sizes) consisting of 10 pair KRONE disconnection modules.
They shall be mounted in a communication cabinet or contained in a wall
mountable plastic box and be accompanied by a suitable termination record book.
6.7.4.9 Telephones Sockets
Telephone sockets shall be provided at each required terminal equipment location
and shall consist of a flush mounted RJ45 socket and matching faceplate with
suitable icon indicating its function.

155
6.7.4.10 Location of Telephones
Extension telephones from the main PABX shall be provided generally as
follows:
Plant control room 2
Managers offices 1 each
General offices 1 per 10 m
2

Switch/control rooms 2 each
Equipment/Plant rooms 1 each
Turbine floor 4 per floor level
Gate house 1
Storage areas 1 per 100 m
2

Workshops 1 per 50 m
2

Chemical laboratory 2
Library, medical room, shop, reception 1 each
VIP and staff dining rooms 1 each
Extension telephones from the back-up exchange shall be provided as follows:
Plant control room 2
Station managers office 1
Shift managers office 1
Guard house 1
Coal handling control room 2
Other managers offices 1 each
Final quantities and locations of phones will be determined during the design
phase.
6.7.5 Public Address System (PA System)
6.7.5.1 Scope of Supply
The public address system shall consist of but not be limited to the following:
Pre-amplifier and central processing unit
End-amplifier
Loudspeaker
Paging phone
Microphone

156
6.7.5.2 Technical Requirement
Pre-amplifier and central processing unit
Pre-amplifier and central processing unit shall be designed in opened module
structure or compact structure.
Input voltage : 230V AC 50Hz
Pre-amplified power : 100W
Number of microphone inputs : 4
Minimum zone : 18
End-amplifier
Input voltage : 230V AC 50Hz
Amplified power : 200W
Minimum output : 5
End-amplifiers shall be located in protective cubicle with high protection level
(IP54), waterproof and fire fighting cover. They shall be mounted on the wall.
Loudspeaker
Loudspeakers using indoor shall be high wet condition withstand type
Input voltage: 100,70 V
Power: 10W, 20W, 30W
Sound pressure level: :>110 dB
Resistance: 8O
Frequency range: 280 - 12500 Hz
Protection class: IP55
Paging phone
Paging telephones shall be specialized, high waterproof level, wet condition
withstand level with good noise filtering ability. They shall be equipped with
connection box for loudspeakers.
Mounting type: Suspended type
Minimum protection class: IP54
Microphone

Type: Desktop, handy
Frequency range: 280 12500 Hz
Sensitive level: s -70dB
Minimum protection class: IP54

157
6.7.5.3 Location of Loudspeakers
Loudspeaker system is located around the Site and in the specific locations.
At central control building
Switchyard area
Administration area
Water treatment area
Mechanical workshop and material storage area
Security gate.
Outside areas of plant: The outside of plant such as: oil pump station, water return
pump station and coal & oil unloading jetty: provided loudspeaker is type of 10W
and 20W at stipulate locations. The announcement sound level shall be at least
20dB(a) above surrounding base sound level.
6.7.6 Supervision Camera System
This function and location of this equipment is covered by Volume 7.
The Contractor will have his design for supervision camera system including the
number of cameras at appropriate locations, mode of connection of equipment
and submit to the Employer for approval.
6.7.7 UHF Systems
6.7.7.1 Two-Way Radio System
a) General
The UHF 2way radio system shall allow communication from the control rooms
to the operating and maintenance staff in the field. The base units shall be located
in each PCR, coal handling control room, and guard house.
The coverage area shall include at least the remote location of the cooling water
intake house.
If applicable at least nine (9) individual communication channels shall be
selectable.
The base units shall have a battery backup power supply. The battery charger
shall be connected to the safe 230VAC (Diesel powered).
The standby operation time of the hand held units shall be at least eight (8) hours.
The battery charger and the batteries shall include a smart charging scheme to
avoid premature capacity degradation.
The UHF radio system shall be delivered, installed, and commissioned as ready
for use and be available before commencing the first units performance test.
The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining the necessary operation
licences.

158
The Contractor will have his design for UHF system and submit to the Employer
for approval.
b) Scope of Supply
- Four (4) base stations, complete with connected antenna,
microphone, and loud speaker;
- 36 multi channel hand held units, including carrying gear;
- Twelve (12) external microphones for the mobile units;
- Twelve (12) battery charger station (on 230VAC), or four (4)
equivalent fixed multi slots charging stations for the mobile
units (batteries);
- Necessary power supplies, fix mounted antennas, cables, and all
fixing material;
- Six (6) spare battery packs for hand held units;
- Documentation.
c) Technical Details
- Working mode: half-duplex
- Operating frequency: (403 470) MHz
- Central antenna: multi-directional 2 x 5/8 (stacked), installed
on antenna pile.
- Feeder cable of antenna: type 10D-FB with surge voltage
protector for feeder
- Electricity charger: use converter battery charger cabinet 230V
AC/13,8V DC
- 45W UHF radio machine has interface port with the PABX
switchboard through 2-wired subscriber cable
For more technical details refer to Volume 2, General Technical
Provisions.
6.7.7.2 Pager System
A pager system shall be supplied to enable alarming operators, engineers, and
administrative personnel on special occasions even when the public mobile phone
system is unavailable. The power supply shall be battery backed and charged
from the safe 230VAC (Diesel powered)
The covering range shall include at least the nearby city of Thai Binh and its
vicinity.
The operation frequency shall be preferable in the 900MHy band.
The personnel pager devices shall have a one-way operation mode, capable of
displaying numeric and text characters.

159
A paging request shall be possible at least from every control room, preferable
form each and every in-house telephone set (PABX).
The pager system shall comprise of, but not limited to:
- Base station, including power supply (safe 230VAC), and HF
transmitting devices;
- Three (3) operation stations, if applicable;
- Fifty (50) personnel units, including their battery charger;
- Necessary repeater stations;
- Documentation;
The pager system shall be delivered, installed, and commissioned as ready for
use and available before commencing the first units performance test.
The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining the necessary operation
licences.
The Contractor will have his design for pager system and submit to the Employer
for approval.
6.7.8 Local Area Network
Scope of Supply
The Contractor shall provide, install, test and commission the LAN located in the
central control building and other buildings and plant areas under approval of the
Employer. This network shall consist of but not be limited to the following:
Server
Router
Switch 24 ports
Modem
PCs
ODF
UTP/CAT-6 and FO cable
RJ-45 connector and accessories

Technical data shall be as per the requirements of Volume 7.
The Contractor will have his design for LAN and submit to the Employer for
approval.

160
6.7.9 Installation and Cabling
6.7.9.1 Power Cables
The total voltage drop from the power supply to the apparatus shall be less than
1V. Power supply cabling shall be of sufficient size to produce less than 0.5V
drop between the power supply and the distribution panel in each MER, and 0.5V
drop between the distribution panel and the apparatus.
6.7.9.2 Miscellaneous Equipment Racks
The MERs circuit breaker and fuse panels shall be installed as appropriate.
Circuit breaker and fuse panels shall be connected to the power supply using
cables that conform to Clause 6.7.9. (1) above.
Alarm panels shall be connected to a master alarm panel according to the
suppliers instructions. The master alarm panel alarm extension relay shall be
connected to the power station alarm system.
6.7.9.3 Other Equipment
The Contractor shall:
(a) Erect all equipment racks and/or cubicles to be supplied under this
Contract.
(b) Connect all equipment racks and/or cubicles to the communication room
earthing system.
(c) Connect all equipment racks and/or cubicles to 48V circuit breaker or fuse
panels as appropriate.
(d) Connect all equipment racks and/or cubicles to the appropriate alarm panel.
(e) Interwire all multiplex equipment to the MDF.
(f) Jumper MDF to services and IDFs and telephone extensions.
For equipment being supplied under the Contract, items (a) to (e) above will be
carried out by that Contractor.
The Contractor shall carry out such tests as are necessary to prove that the
equipment installed is performing according to the manufacturer's specifications.
After all cables have been installed and the equipment commissioned, the cable
entries to the communication room shall be sealed against vermin entry. The
sealant used for the cable entries shall be removable to allow for the addition, or
removal, of cables at a future date without impairing the effectiveness of the
vermin proofing.
The vermin proofing method adopted shall be subject to approval by the
Employer.

161
6.8 TEST AND INSPECTION
6.8.1 Application
The following test and inspection clauses are applicable to the electrical systems.
They cover tests in the works, tests on Site and Commissioning tests. In addition
to these requirements reference must be made to Volume 2 which details test and
inspection on electrical Plant components.
6.8.2 Generator
6.8.2.1 Test and Inspection at Workshop
(1) General
Where no specific test is specified then the various items of Plant, materials and
equipment shall be tested in accordance with the applicable standard, acceptable
to the Employer. Where no appropriate standard is available, tests shall be
carried out in accordance with the maker's standard practice, subject to the prior
approval of the Employer. In all cases, Works tests shall include electrical,
mechanical and hydraulic tests in addition to any tests called for by the Employer
to ensure that the Plant being supplied fulfils the requirements of the
Specification.
If considered necessary by the Employer, any multi-part assemblies shall be fully
erected in the works prior to packing and dispatch to the Site.
(2) Tests on Materials
Representative samples of plates, bars and pipes, etc., which form components of
the Plant shall be tested to the relevant approved standard or code at the request
of the Employer.
All test pieces shall be prepared and supplied by the Contractor at his own cost.
If any test piece fails to comply with the requirements of the Specification for the
material in question, the Employer may reject the whole batch of material
represented by that test piece.
All important forgings are to be examined jointly at the maker's works by the
Employer, together with representatives of the manufacturer during forging and
heat treatment.
The test shall be carried out on the following but be not limited to:
(3) Generator rotors
The generator shall be subjected to tests to prove compliance with IEC 60034 to
prove that it has been manufactured correctly and for the determination of
characteristics.
(4) High Voltage Tests
All parts of the generator shall be subjected to a high voltage test in accordance
with the requirements of IEC 60034-1.

162
(5) Temperature Rise
Tests shall be carried out to prove that the temperature rise of the various parts of
the generator are within the limits required by IEC 60034-1.
Temperature rise tests shall be carried out also at Site in accordance with
performance testing criteria to prove the guarantee of performance.
(6) Insulation Tests
(a) The insulation resistance of the stator and rotor windings shall be measured
with the windings cold and at the completion of the temperature rise tests.
(b) The polarization index of each stator phase winding and of the whole
winding shall be measured with the windings cold and hot.
(c) Repetitive surge tests shall be carried out on the rotor winding to confirm
the integrity of interturn insulation.
(d) The insulation of stator bars and coils shall be tested in accordance with
IEC 60894.
(e) Each phase of the stator windings shall be tested to determine its
capacitance (in nanofarads) to earth and dielectric loss angle (in
milliradians) in 0.2 Un steps from zero to rated phase-phase voltage, both
raising voltage and lowering voltage. Each test will involve energizing one
phase winding with the other phase windings earthed.
The same tests shall also be carried out with the three phase windings
connected together to measure combined values.
The report of test results shall include a description of the testing technique
used, the Plant conditions (including gas and water coolant arrangements
and temperatures) and the test equipment used.
The Contractor shall submit the proposed test procedure for approval by the
Employer.
(f) Each phase of the stator windings shall be tested to determine the levels of
partial discharge (in picocoulombs) of insulation in 0.2 Un steps from zero
to rated phase-phase voltage both raising and lowering voltage. Each test
will involve energizing one phase winding with the other phase windings
earthed.
The report of test results shall include a description of the testing technique
used, the Plant conditions (including gas and water coolant arrangements
and temperatures) and the test equipment used.
The Contractor shall submit the proposed test procedure for approval by the
Employer.
(7) Tests to Determine Generator Parameters
(a) The Contractor shall determine the following parameters for each generator.
The Contractor shall nominate, for approval by the Employer, the tests to be
performed to determine the parameters with reference to IEC 60034-4.

163
Where a nominated test is not in accordance with IEC 60034-4, the
Contractor shall justify its use.
The Contractor shall nominate expected values of the generator parameters
in Technical Schedules.
(b) Saturation Curves, Segregated Losses and Efficiency
Open-circuit and short-circuit tests shall be carried out to determine:
- Open-circuit saturation curve and air gap line
- Short-circuit saturation curve
- Zero power factor overexcited saturation curve for rated armature
current
- Segregated losses (core loss; stray-load loss; friction and windage loss;
armature and field losses)
- Efficiency
(8) Waveform Deviation
The waveform of the generated voltage shall be measured and analyzed in
accordance with IEC 60034-1.
(9) Shaft Current
Tests shall be carried out with the generator at rated speed and excited to rated
voltage on open circuit to prove that circulating shaft currents are prevented by
the bearing insulation and shaft earthing provided.
6.8.2.2 Test and Inspection at Site
(1) General
All Plant and Equipment shall pass such tests at Site as are required by the
Employer to prove compliance with the Specification independently of any tests
which may have already been carried out at the manufacturer's works.
The tests at Site shall include, but not necessarily be limited to, those specified in
this section.
In particular all functional and pressure tests on fully assembled and complete
items of Plant which have not been carried out at the manufacturer's works, shall
be carried out at Site.
The commissioning tests shall be carried out in accordance with the requirements
of Volume 2.
(2) Turbine/Generator
(a) No load Plant Commissioning test shall include the following:
- Test of intervention of the stand-by oil pump automatically
- Measurement of the thermal expansion of the casings

164
- Verification of the speed control and safety trips operated locally and
remotely
- Tests on all safety devices
- Tests on trip valves and alarms
- Measurement of vibration (generator not excited)
- Checking of speed measuring instruments
(b) Load test shall include:
- Adequacy of gland steam sealing system
- Temperature of bearings
- Vibration reading at various loads (generator excited and
turbine/generator synchronized.)
- Synchronizing tests
- Bearing inspection after 5 days operation at RO
- Automatic changeover of all stand-by equipment
- Verification of the start-up time to attain the RO from cold, warm and
hot conditions
- Tripping of the unit at loads 30%, 50%, 75% and 100% RO.
No malfunction or endangering of the equipment shall take place and
all controls shall operate safely.
- Capability of House Load Operation.
After having the unit load at RO, the turbine/generator shall be
disconnected from the network and it will remain in operation at "house
load" feeding only the unit auxiliary service.
- Rapid load reduction when the load is above 50% RO, by manually
tripping of one circulating water pump (CWP) or one Boiler Feed
Pump (BFP) without the intervention of the stand-by pump.
- Any other tests required by the Employer to check the specified
conditions of the plant.
6.8.3 Excitation System
6.8.3.1 Test and Inspection at workshop
The Contractor shall submit a list of proposed excitation system tests for approval
by the Employer it will include but not necessarily be limited to those items listed
below.
(1) Thyristor Bridge
Tests shall be carried out on the thyristor bridge as required by IEC 60134.

165
With reference to the temperature rise test, the temperature rise must remain
within limits for a duty cycle no less than that specified in Volume 2.
(2) Excitation Transformer
The Contractor shall carry out temperature rise tests at the manufacturers works,
using a higher than rated current to prove that in-service rated temperature rises
will not be exceeded. The test current shall take into account the extra losses due
to harmonics and shall be determined by reference to IEC 60354.
(3) Complete Excitation System
The tests listed in the following clauses, except for Clauses (a) and (b), shall be
carried out on both excitation systems. The tests listed in Clauses (a) and (b)
need only be carried out on the first manufactured system.
(a) A transfer function test shall be carried out on the excitation system for the
determination of all time constants, gains, input/output limits and frequency
response curves. The block diagram Drawing T-showing the transfer
functions of the excitation system shall be amended from the results of
these test and included in the test report.
(b) An excitation system nominal response test shall be carried out to determine
the excitation system nominal response V
E
. The voltage error step to be
used in the test is 10% of rated voltage. Where the test is not in accordance
with IEC 60034-6, the Contractor shall justify its use.
(c) Checks shall be carried out on the operational features of the automatic
excitation regulator; including automatic changeover from one controller to
another; and to manual operation of limiters; follow-up controls and alarms.
(d) All other tests as necessary shall be carried out to prove compliance of the
excitation system with the specified requirements.
6.8.3.2 Test and Inspection at Site
(1) Tests shall be carried out to prove that the stability and damping of the automatic
excitation regulator (AVR) complies with the specified requirements. Tests with
the stabilizing signals connected and disconnected shall be carried out to
demonstrate the effect of all stabilizing signals used in the AVR. The tests shall
be carried out with the generator operating on open circuit and rated voltage, and
also with the generator on load.
(2) With the generator on-load and feeding into the system, the operation of the AVR
over and under excitation limiter, and limiter failure detectors shall be proven.
(3) With the generator on open circuit and under AVR control, the generator terminal
voltage shall be measured at speeds corresponding to 47, 50 and 52 Hz without
changing the voltage set point.
(4) The voltage drop compensation shall be proved effective. the Employer will
arrange for variations in system voltage to permit reasonable reactive load
changes to be made on the generator. The Contractor will make electrical
measurements to confirm the degree of compensation.

166
(5) The control system for coordinating reactive power loading of the generator shall
be proved to be able to carry out its function by in-service test. the Employer will
arrange for variations in reactive power demand on the generators for this test.
(6) With the generator on open circuit and under AVR control, changeover of the
AVR from one control function to another (i.e. auto-auto, auto-manual) shall be
proven for each fault condition.
(7) All necessary tests shall be carried out to check the excitation system transfer
function block diagram.
6.8.4 AC Auxiliary System
6.8.4.1 Unit Load Power Consumption
The auxiliary power system shall be set up with the station to unit 6.6kV and
400V links broken - i.e. such that unit auxiliaries are being supplied from the unit
auxiliary transformer (machine voltage to 6.6kV) and station auxiliaries are being
supplied from the 220/6.6kV station transformer. The total unit auxiliary kW load
shall be measured at the unit auxiliaries 6.6kV switchboard incoming power
supply to a level of accuracy equal to or less than 1.0% error. To achieve this, the
necessary incoming circuit metering current transformers shall have accuracy of
class 0.1 and the switchboard busbar voltage transformer class 0.2.
The generating set shall be stabilized and then run continuously at 100% RO for 2
hours and the power consumption figure shall be taken as the average across the
period. The Contractor shall submit the following correction curves or formulae
and apply for the tests:
(a) ID fan consumption related to draught at the point of connection to the stack
inlet.
(b) CW pump consumption related to variations in river level.
(c) Other(s) - to be recommended by the Contractor.
6.8.4.2 Transformers
(1) Test and Inspection at Manufacturers Works
(a) The following tests shall be conducted on each transformer (except that
tests (13), (18) and (22) are only applicable to oil filled).
1. DC insulation resistance (1 minute readings taken for 10 minutes)
2. Winding Dielectric Dissipation Factor (DDF) at 2.5kV interwinding DDF
at 2.5kV
3. Winding resistance on all taps and all windings
4. No load loss at 100%, 105% and 110% voltage
5. Load loss at extreme taps and principal tap
6. Impedance at extreme taps and principal tap
7. Zero sequence impedance

167
8. Power frequency withstand tests
9. Induced voltage tests
10. Partial discharge tests
11. Impulse tests on minimum turns tap
12. Temperature rise test on each rating for a minimum period of 12 hours.
13. Thermovision monitoring of tank temperatures during the test shall be
carried out. Type test only for transformers rated 3 MVA and below.
14. Harmonic components at no load (also see 5. above)
15. Tank vacuum test to prove tank, conservator and cooling system can
satisfactorily withstand a full vacuum
16. Jacking point deflection test
17. Ratio and phase relationship
18. Insulation oil tests
19. Control circuitry testing
20. WTI, RTD, OTI and fibre optic calibrations
21. Sound level test (type only)
22. Oil overpressure test
(b) On completion of the component parts, the transformer shall be completely
erected at the manufacturers works to permit a final inspection to be made
of the mechanical and electrical assembly and for overall testing.
(c) For all tests during which a transformer is excited either at normal or higher
frequency all thermal and gas sensing devices shall be connected so that
any abnormality may be detected.
(d) Dissolved gas analysis of oil shall be carried out prior to and after the
power frequency test, induced, partial discharge and the temperature rise
test
(e) Partial discharge tests shall be performed in turn upon each HV terminal.
The method of partial discharge measurement shall be one of the
internationally accepted methods employed to determine individual impulse
magnitudes in pC (apparent discharges as measured at the terminals), in
accordance with the relevant IEC recommendations.
(f) The following partial discharge measurement shall be recorded during
voltage raising:
- Partial discharge level at 120% of rated voltage
- Partial discharge level at 150% of rated voltage
- At minimum induced overvoltage
- Partial discharge level upon returning to 150% of rated voltage

168
- Partial discharge level upon returning to 120% of rated voltage
- The test duration for recording the partial discharge measurements
shall be half () an hour for each measurement level.
(g) The transformer will have failed the partial discharge test if the levels
recorded appreciably exceed:
60 pC at 120% of rated voltage;
300 pC at 150% of rated voltage.
All instruments to be used, in connection with these tests shall be
calibrated before and after tests. The Contractor is requested to provide for
each instrument used during these tests calibration certificates of
independent test institute.
(2) Test and Inspection at Site
Following installation in its final position and full connection of controls, each
transformer shall be subject to the following tests:
(a) Functional test of controls.
(b) DC insulation resistance at one minute intervals for 10 minutes.
(c) Winding DDF at 2.5 kV.
(d) Interwinding DDF at 2.5 kV.
(e) Winding resistance on all taps on all windings.
(f) Ratio and phase relationships.
(g) Insulation oil test for dielectric strength and moisture content.
(h) WTI, RTD, OTI and fibre optic calibrations.
(i) Dissolved gas in oil analysis.
(j) Thermovision of connections following placement on load.
6.8.4.3 Switchgear
(a) Type, sample and routine tests should be conducted and certificated in
accordance with all of the relevant provisions of the standards listed in
Volume 2.
(b) HV switchgear shall be type tested for arcing fault containment and judged
against Appendix AA, criteria 2 and 4 of IEC 62271-200.
(c) Low voltage CFS unit compartments shall be type tested to IEC 61439-1
for arcing fault containment where the energy level available to the
terminals exceeds 1,000,000 A
2
seconds.
(d) HV power frequency test as per IEC 60060 for HV testing.
(e) Complete shipping sections of switchboards shall be subject to at least the
following tests before leaving the works:

169
- Point to point wiring checks.
- Insulation resistance of switchboard and busbars.
- Circuit switch operational checks.
- Mechanical interlock checks.
- Contact resistance checks on switch contacts and racking contacts.

Following Site assembly in final positions and the completion of connections,
testing shall include at least the following:
(a) Point to point wiring checks.
(b) Switch operational checks.
(c) Mechanical racking interlock checks.
(d) Primary circuit connections and phasing checks including power cabling.
(e) Protection primary and secondary injection tests, operation, calibration and
interface checks.
(f) Plant system functional checks including control, indication, alarms etc.
interface.
(g) Insulation resistance measurement.
(h) Thermovision of primary circuit connections following placement on load.
6.8.4.4 Electrical Protection and Metering
(a) Protection and metering relays and equipment shall be subject to type,
sample and routine tests in accordance with the relevant standards to which
the equipment is constructed. Predominantly this will be IEC 60255
covering protection relays.
(b) Following assembly into shipping sections of switchboard equipment shall
be subject to operational tests.
(a) Systems shall be subject to operational checks following installation of
switchboards and panels in their permanent position.
(b) Protection systems shall then be subject to primary and secondary current
injection tests covering full calibration and placement in service. Refer also
to Volume 2.
6.8.5 Cabling, Wiring and Terminals
Refer to Volume 2.

170
6.8.6 Earthing and Lightning Protection
Refer to Volume 2.
6.8.7 Miscellaneous Power and Lighting
Refer to Volume 2
Equipment shall be subject to type, sample and routine testing in accordance with
the standard(s) to which it is built.
(1) Operational checks.
(2) Measurement of lighting levels in areas to be nominated by the Employer.
6.8.8 DC Auxiliary System
DC Plant components shall be type, sample and routine tested in accordance with
the provisions of the relevant standards referred to in Section 6.4. In addition a
discharge test to the agreed duty cycle shall be carried out on each installed
battery bank.
In addition to controlling and monitoring overall discharge current and voltage,
individual cell voltage shall be logged so that defective cells (if any) can be
identified. The metering accuracy shall be such that the overall battery bank
capacity can be declared to an accuracy of 0.5%.
6.8.9 Phase Isolated Busbars
6.8.9.1 Busbar Assemblies
Busbar Assemblies
The capacitance of the fully assembled busbar system shall be measured on Site.
Busbar Conductors
Busbar conductors shall be tested in accordance with BS 159, BS 1977 or BS
2898 as applicable.
Busbar Support Insulators
Busbar support insulators shall be tested in accordance with IEC 60168 or IEC
60137 as appropriate.
Voltage Transformers
VTs shall be tested in accordance with IEC 60186 and IEC 60044.
(1) One VT shall also be subjected to a temperature rise test when operating at rated
voltage and rated current.
(2) Impulse testing in accordance with IEC 60060 Parts 1 and 2 shall be carried out
as a routine test on each VT and after the impulse tests have been completed each
VT shall also be high voltage tested.

171
(3) The impulse and high voltage withstand tests shall be carried out with the
temperature of the oil and windings as near as possible to the normal working
temperature of the transformer.
(4) It shall be noted that the VTs will be used as three-phase units, and all tests,
except the temperature rise test, shall be made on complete assemblies and not on
separate cores.
(5) A cubicle with the VTs in the in-service condition is to be subjected to 150 kV
impulse test.
(1) CTs shall be tested in accordance with IEC 60185 and IEC 60044.
(2) A sheet metal tube, 600 mm long, shaped to represent the primary bar profile
shall be arranged symmetrically and coaxially through the toroid. The tube shall
be insulated from earth. A resistor representing rated burden shall be connected to
the secondary terminals in series with an AC micro ammeter.
(3) A 50Hz test at 10kV rms shall be applied between the sheet metal tube and the
earthed secondary winding and the current in the secondary circuit shall be
measured (no current shall be passed through the primary during this test).
6.8.9.3 Distribution Type Earthing Transformers
(1) The distribution type earthing transformers shall be tested in accordance with IEC
60076 Parts 1 to 5 or if applicable IEC 60076-11 with the following
modifications and addition:
(2) One transformer shall also be subjected to a temperature rise test at both the
continuous and the 30 minute ratings.
6.8.9.4 Neutral Earthing Resistor Tests
(1) Type Tests
(a) An element of each resistor type shall be subjected to the rated 50Hz
current for that type of element for six seconds. The temperature of any
part of the element shall not exceed 305C (allowing for a 40C ambient).
Suitable connections being as close as possible to those to be used in the
actual assembly shall be connected to the element for this test. The
temperature rise shall be measured by thermocouples connected to a
recording instrument. The temperature shall be recorded for at least thirty
seconds following the passage of the current.
(b) Prior to the above temperature rise test the DC resistance of the selected
element shall be measured by passing a DC current of approximately ten
amperes through the element and measuring the voltage drop so produced.
(c) The voltage shall not be measured until thermal equilibrium has been
reached and the temperature of the element shall be recorded. The
resistance shall be corrected to 20C.

172
(d) Following the temperature rise test above the test described in (b) above
shall be repeated. The resistance when corrected to 20C shall be within
+1% of the previous value.
(2) Routine Tests
(a) The resistance of each fully assembled unit shall be measured as described
in (ii) above. The resistance, corrected to 20C, shall not differ from the
nominal value by more than the stated tolerance.
(b) Measurement of resistance shall be carried out as a routine test to prove
compliance with the limits specified in Clause 6.5.1.13. Using the
maximum temperature determined in that clause the hot resistance shall
be calculated and their result entered on the test certificate.
(c) With the maximum resistance between the end of the resistor bank and the
earth terminal open, the bushing and resistor shall be subjected to the one
minute insulation test voltage stated in Clause 6.5.1.13. The unit shall be
considered to have passed this test if there is no flash-over to earth or
between resistor elements for the duration of the test.
6.8.9.5 Earthing Switches
All type and routine tests applicable to the earthing switches specified shall be
carried out in accordance with IEC 62271-102.
6.8.9.6 Aluminium Welds
Examination and testing of aluminium welds of manufacturers works and at Site
shall be in accordance with the welding specification submitted to and approved
by the Employer.
6.8.9.7 Temperature Rise of Busbars and Evaluation of Losses
(1) A test shall be made on the equipment for each unit to demonstrate that the
completed installation complies with the specified temperature rise limits and to
determine the losses.
(2) the Employer will provide the current for the test by running the associated
generator at rated frequency and excited to give full load conditions.
(3) The Contractor shall provide and install the short circuit connections at the
generator transformer terminals and shall provide all the necessary test apparatus.
Metering CTs supplied under this Contract may be used in these tests if approved
test certificates are supplied before the test.
(4) On completion of the tests, the Contractor shall remove all test equipment and
temporary connections from the busbars, etc., and shall return the whole of the
plant to a condition ready for service
(5) It is anticipated that the tests will be made at night or on a cloudy day with wind
speed not exceeding 15 km/h.
(6) If the Employer considers that weather conditions are such that stable
temperature rise conditions will not be obtained at the end of the test, the test
shall not be started. Stable temperature rise conditions will be considered to occur

173
if during the hour preceding the end of the test no rain has fallen and the wind
speed has not exceeded 15 km/h. Not withstanding the foregoing, if the Employer
considers that any condition occurring during the tests will invalidate the
measurements or correction factors, the test shall be repeated.
(a) Temperature Rise Measurements
- Approved temperature detectors shall be installed in such numbers and
positions as will represent accurately the temperature of the various parts
of the busbar, bus ducting, supports, piping and other Plant, building, etc.,
for which temperature rise limits are specified. The temperature rise of the
star point connection shall also be measured. The number and location of
detectors shall be determined by mutual agreement.
- Temperature rise tests shall be continued until readings taken at regular
(15 minutes) intervals indicate to the satisfaction of the Employer that a
substantially constant temperature has been obtained.
- No correction factor shall be applied to the temperature rise measurement
on the equipment within the building.
- Temperature rise measurements on equipment external to the building
shall be corrected for solar radiation on natural aluminium surface by
adding 15C.
- The adjusted temperatures shall not exceed the temperatures specified.
(b) Evaluation and Measurement by Losses
- The losses shall be measured by an approved method at the end of the
temperature rise test, i.e. when stable temperature rise conditions have
been reached. For this test the generator will be operated at its MCR
current.
- Voltage connections for the test shall be made at the generator terminal
stalks.
- The Contractor shall describe his proposed method of measurement
(equipment, connections, etc.) and state the expected accuracy of the
measurement.
(c) Correction Factors
For the purpose of comparison with the guaranteed losses and for the
assessment of liquidated damages, if applicable, the measured correction
shall be made by assuming the losses to be purely resistive, i.e., no stray loss
component and the temperature applicable to the measured losses (before
correction) shall be the average of the temperatures measured on each phase
busbar at two locations, viz., midway between the turbine block and the
turbine house wall and the generator transformer terminals, that is, the
average of six readings.
(d) Determination of Stray Heating Effects

174
Clause 6.5.1.15 requires that shielding be provided if necessary to prevent
overheating of the reinforcing bars in the generator foundation block. To
determine the need for such shielding, approved wire mesh reinforcement
mats shall be placed against the concrete in approved locations and the
temperature rise of the mats determined during the busbar temperature rise
test. If the temperature rise exceeds 30C an approved form of shielding
shall be provided at the Contractors expense.
Dished Spring (Belleville) Washers
- Each batch of Belleville washers shall be segregated so that random
samples can be obtained for testing. The number of sample washers
required for testing shall be not less than five washers of each size.
- Each washer chosen as a sample for the following test shall be treated for
rust proofing as prescribed in Clause 6.5.1.9 of this Specification prior to
these tests.
- Each washer in the sample shall be subject to a flattening test. A load
not less than the flattening load stated in Clause 6.5.1.9 shall be applied
and when the load is released the total height (thickness + dish
dimension) shall not be less than the figure stated in Clause 6.5.1.9. This
application and removal of pressure shall then be repeated 20 times in
quick succession, after which the total height shall not be reduced nor the
washer show any signs of cracking.
- If two of the tested samples fail to pass this test, the whole batch may be
rejected.
- If one only of the tested samples does not meet the specified
requirements, a double quantity of washers chosen at random from the
remainder of the batch shall be submitted to the same test.
- If all of the retest samples withstand the specified flattening load without
failure, the whole batch of washers shall be considered to have passed
this test.
- If any of the retest samples fail to pass this test, the whole batch may be
rejected.
- Every washer in each batch sample passing the flattening test shall be
further tested by compressing each washer separately against a flat
surface with a load of 90% of the flattening load stated in Clause 6.5.1.9.
The washers shall be maintained in this condition for a minimum period
of 12 hours at a temperature no higher than 0C and then allowed to
remain at room temperature for a further 12 hours. The tested washers
shall neither fracture nor crack, and when released they shall return to
the original dished shape and total height. If two of the tested samples
fail to pass this test, the whole batch may be rejected. If one only of the
tested samples does not meet the specified requirements, a double
quantity of washers chosen at random from the remainder of the batch
shall be submitted to the same test. If all of the retest samples withstand
the specified 24-hour load test without failure, the whole batch of

175
washers shall be considered to have passed this test. If any of the retest
samples fail to pass this test, the whole batch may be rejected.
- Every washer in each batch sample shall be subject to a diamond
pyramid test and shall be within the limits of 400/500 DPN or its
equivalent by other suitable hardness testing machines.
6.8.9.8 Aluminium Welding Tests
(1) Procedures
The Contractor shall submit his welding procedures for approval six months
prior to the commencement of fabrication.
(2) Proficiency
The Contractor shall have his factory welding personnel available for welding
proficiency tests three months before factory fabrication is to commence.
Similarly, Site welding personnel shall be available for welding proficiency tests
three months prior to Site fabrication commencing. It is the responsibility of the
Contractor to organize the venue and date for conducting the welding proficiency
tests.
(a) Approval testing of welds testing shall be in accordance with ISO 9606-
2/1994.
(b) On designed joints advised to the Contractor, the Employer may carry out
non-destructive testing, including radiography in accordance with ISO
3777/1976 and ISO 2437/1972.
(c) The amount of non-destructive testing will initially be a minimum of 20%
of the welding on designated joints, reducing to 5% if consistently
acceptable welds are achieved.
(d) The Contractor shall supply to the Employer arrangement Drawings
showing designated joints made by each welder and the date of welding.
(e) The Contractor shall give five working days notice to the Employer that
(i) The first batch of designated welds by each welder and
(ii) Further batches of designated welds are available and shall provide
adequate access at the shop and Site for testing in normal working
hours.
(f) The Contractor shall carry out radiography of repair welds on designated
joints at his own expense to the satisfaction of the Employer.
(3) Requirements in offering porcelain insulators:
(a) Insulators shall be tested in accordance with IEC 60168.
(b) Type test certification will be required from the manufacturer six months
prior to commencing manufacture of the insulators.
(4) Requirements of offering resin epoxy insulators:
(a) Insulators shall be tested in accordance with IEC 60137.

176
(b) A type test certificate is required.
6.8.10 Generator Circuit Breakers
The following clauses are applicable.
The Contractor shall state what testing facilities he has at the manufacturers
works in order to carry out:
(a) Electrical tests.
(b) Mechanical tests to prove the strength, hardness and other physical
qualities of the materials employed in construction.
The Contractor shall submit certified results of any design tests called for in this
Specification to which the works or any component parts thereof have been
subjected. the Employer may accept any or all of these tests in lieu of those
specified herein.
6.8.10.1 Subcontractors
The Contractor shall include in the proposal documents details of all components
which he proposes to have made by Subcontractors to the main circuit breaker
supplier and the names of such Subcontractors so that if required arrangements
may be made for the necessary inspection and testing of such components at the
works of the Subcontractor.
6.8.10.2 Complete Circuit Breakers - Design Tests
Design tests in accordance with IEEE Standard C37.013 (Clauses 5.2 to 5.2.13)
shall be carried out. The Contractor shall submit certified results for the design
test to the Employer. The certified results shall conform to the guarantees stated in
the Contract.
If the design tests have already been carried out the Employer may accept
certificates in lieu of repeating those tests.
6.8.10.3 Complete Circuit Breakers - Production Tests
Production tests shall be made on every circuit breaker in accordance with IEEE
Std C37.013 (Clauses 5.3 to 5.3.13), subject to the following additions. The test
values and results shall conform to the guarantees stated in the Contract. Prior to
shipping adequate production tests should have been performed to ensure that
every component of every circuit breaker has been correctly assembled and is
functioning correctly.
In addition to the production tests the following shall be carried out:
(1) An ohmic resistance test on each trip and closing coil, and
(2) A timing test on the auxiliary contacts to demonstrate correct operation and
relationship with the main contacts.
6.8.10.4 Tests at Site
(1) Tests by the Contractor

177
On completion of erection of the circuit breakers and associated control panels
the Contractor shall carry out the tests after delivery in accordance with IEEE
Std C37.013 (Clauses 5.4 to 5.4.7) subject to the following additions:
(a) Insulation resistance of control panel wiring;
(b) Confirm correct operation of tripping and closing circuits; and
(c) Confirm correct operation of auxiliary contacts.
The Contractor shall advise any additional tests after delivery he proposes to
carry out.
(2) Tests by the Employer
the Employer shall have the right to carry out such tests as it deems necessary to
prove the compliance of the Plant with the Contract. Such tests may include
repetition of tests carried out at the makers works (modified in intensity and
value where provided in the relevant standards). the Employer may also carry out
such field tests with the circuit breakers connected to the system as is deemed
necessary to prove:
(a) The ability of the circuit breakers to de-energies unloaded transformers,
(b) The switching overvoltages resulting from operation of the circuit breakers
do not exceed the value specified.
Tests at Site during the Maintenance Period.
the Employer shall have the right to carry out during the maintenance
period.
6.8.11 Diesel Generators
The following clauses are applicable.
6.8.11.1 Works Tests
(1) Performance tests of each Diesel generator at the manufacturers works shall be
to ISO 3046/2. The tests shall be used to prove the performance guarantees. It
shall be witnessed the Employer. All costs and expenses involved in conducting
such tests shall be borne by the Contractor.
(2) The Diesel generator shall not be dispatched until proved satisfactory in the
acceptance tests.
(3) All auxiliaries such as air compressors, receivers, fuel tanks, exhaust systems,
pumps, cooling towers, oil coolers, switchboards shall be tested to relevant
standards and approved by the Employer before dispatch to the Site.
6.8.11.2 Site Tests
(1) Upon completion of erection, the Contractor shall carry out all necessary checks,
adjustments and trial running. All costs (including Diesel fuel and oil) and
expenses involved in conducting such tests shall be borne by the Contractor.
(2) Testing of auxiliaries such as air compressors, air receivers, fuel system, cooling
water system, air intake and exhaust system, battery and charger, control panel

178
and switchboard shall be individually carried out to validate its performance and
control settings.
(3) Running tests of the Diesel generator for a minimum 5 working days 7 hours per
day continuous operation without failure shall be carried out. During this test the
Contractor shall record all measurements and submit for approval of the
Employer. The loads during this test shall be varied from 25% to 110% and the
diesel generators response to load pick-up shall be ascertained.
(4) At least 7 hours continuous running on full load shall be included in the running
tests.
6.8.11.3 Commissioning Tests
(1) When the diesel generator has been proved satisfactory by the running tests, the
Commissioning tests shall commence. All costs (including Diesel fuel and oil)
and expenses involved in conducting such tests shall be borne by the Contractor.
These tests will include, but not necessarily be limited to the following:
(a) Establishment of plant status at commencement.
(b) Open circuit test and automatic voltage regulator test.
(c) Synchronizing and loading for three repeat tests.
(d) Remote starting capability for three repeat tests.
(d) Periodic load test capability for three repeat tests.
(f) Reliability of the starting gear for 5 consecutive starts.
(2) The Contractor shall, during the Commissioning tests, be responsible for adjusting
and operating the diesel generator.
6.8.12 High voltage Switchyard system
6.8.12.1 Test and Commissioning
The Contractor is responsible for carrying out all tests required before the
switchyard is put into service.
6.8.12.2 Pre-commissioning Tests
Following erection of equipment on Site and installation of the various systems,
Precommissioning checks shall be carried out in accordance with the relevant
sections in the Contract documents and the manufacturers instructions.
Some typical pre-commissioning tests are:

179
(1) Wiring continuity tests.
(2) Megger (DC insulation resistance) testing of equipment.
(3) Alignment of equipment.
(4) Calibration of instruments.
(5) Relay settings.
(6) Injection to prove operation of relays and protection schemes.
(7) Saturation, ratio and internal resistance checks on CTs.
6.8.12.3 Commissioning Tests
Following completion of the works and the Pre-commissioning tests, the
Contractor shall carry out testing and Commissioning in accordance with the
Contract documents and which shall include, but not be limited to the following:
(1) Busbar balance checks.
(2) Transformer differential HV and LV balance checks.
(3) Circuit breaker trip checks.
(4) Operation of communication functions.
(5) Operation of intertrip functions.
(6) Operation of controls systems.
(7) HV testing of relevant Plant.
(8) Service voltage test of connected HV equipment.
6.8.13 Communication system

Testing and Commissioning of the communication equipment shall be performed
in accordance with the following specifications.
6.8.13.1 Factory Tests
A type test can be omitted only if the Contractor submits to the Employer a
complete and satisfactory type test report issued by an independent and
recognized laboratory.
6.8.13.2 Type Tests
The following type tests shall be performed:
a. Testing of table telephone set with horn and flashing lamp (dialling speed,
microphone feeding current, automatic line regulation, frequency range, side
tone equivalent, reference equivalence, etc)
b. Verification of cameras, TV monitors characteristics;

180
c. For optical fibre cables, type tests shall be carried out as follows:
i. Repetitive Tensile Test
ii. A specimen length of 10m shall be used and the gauge length shall be
5m;
iii. The initial tensile loading shall be 8% and the following loading
schedule shall be applied:
Initial - 30% UTS (0.5 hour hold);
Initial - 50% as (1 hour hold);
Initial - 70% III'S (1 hour hold);
Initial - 95% UTS (0.5 hour hold).
iv. This cycle should be repeated five times with the specimen being held
at 95% UTS for 3 hours on the last cycle;
v. During this test, the optic fibre shall be spliced in series and the optical
attenuation measured throughout the test using a laser LED or power
source and meter or an optical time domain reflect meter.
d. Ultimate Tensile Strength (UTS) Test
i. Following completion of the fifth cycle of (c) above the specimen
loading shall be increased up to breakage of the composite earth wire
or up to the specified UTS of the earth wire;
ii. Breakage shall not occur below the specified UTS. Attenuation shall
be monitored as in the Clause (c) above.
e. Cable Test
i. Creep tests shall be performed using a constant tension device at 30C
for both 20% and 40% UTS for a period of 1000 hours. During these
tests the attenuation shall be monitored as in (c) above.
Vibration proof characteristics;
Short circuit current test;
Arc discharge test;
Optical fibre cable:
ii. Type, sample and routine tests shall be carried out on optical fibre
cable and accessories in accordance with the appropriate clauses of
IEC 60793-1-1, IEC 60079 and ANSI/EIA standards.
6.8.13.3 Routine Tests
f. The following routine tests shall be carried out at the manufacturer's work on
any or all of the components and the system in accordance with the
requirements set out in latest issue of relevant publications.
i. Visual check to verify conformity with the Specifications;

181
ii. Verification of CCTV control unit characteristics (operating facilities,
operating voltage, etc);
iii. Verification of video recorder characteristics;
iv. Verification of amplifier and speaker characteristics.
v. The Contractor shall submit all routine test reports of manufacturer to
the Employer for approval.
6.8.13.4 Site Tests
g. The Contractor shall be responsible for giving instruction and supervising Site
tests for his equipment in accordance with the Contract.
h. The Contractor shall submit a testing list for the equipment, with test report
forms and detail instructions.
6.8.13.5 Power Supply
i. The modular power supply shall be tested and commissioned in accordance
with the manufacturers installation manual. Voltage limit levels for alarm
conditions shall be set, and time intervals shall be set for the battery monitor
module to test the batteries.
6.8.13.6 Alarm Panel
j. The panel shall be tested in accordance with the suppliers instructions. An
earth shall be placed on the alarm wire at each apparatus to verify that the
alarm operates correctly
6.8.13.7 Exchanges and Telephones
k. The exchanges shall be tested and commissioned to meet the approved signal
levels for the connection to the public network, to the multiplex channels on
the OPGW and to individual extensions. All features shall be tested and
demonstrated and operating satisfactory.
6.8.13.8 30 Day Test
l. At the completion of the equipment and system tests, a 30 day operational
system test shall be carried out covering the main and back-up exchanges, the
Paging and UHF radio systems.
m. During this period, faults affecting more than 20% of users shall terminate the
test. The fault shall be rectified to the satisfaction of the Employer and
another 30 day test restarted.
n. These tests shall be completed prior to the commissioning tests for the power
station.


182
6.9 Coal Handling Plant
The power transformers associated with coal handling plant shall be dry type. The
power transformers shall comply with the specifications detailed in Volume 2.

6.9.1 Low Voltage Switchboards and Switchgear
Switchboards and switchgear associated with coal handling plant shall comply
with the appropriate specifications detailed in Volume 2.

6.9.2 Electrical Field Devices - Safety and Control
6.9.2.1 General
The Contractor shall provide all safety switches and devices to ensure satisfactory
operation of the plant.
6.9.2.2 Enclosures
Enclosures for electrical safety devices mounted on or about the plant shall be
robustly constructed, and comply with the requirements of Volume 2.
6.9.2.3 Limit Switches
Limit switches shall generally be of the proximity type.
Where there is no likelihood of limit switches being subjected to vibration and/or
dust, the use of limit switches of the encapsulated reed type may be permitted,
subject to suitability for fault current switching.
6.9.2.4 Tail Pulley Coal Build-up Switches
Tail pulley coal build-up switches and operating mechanisms shall be provided
by the Contractor for each conveyor belt.
Tail Pulley Build-up switches shall reliably detect build-up of entrapped objects
with thicknesses of greater than 5 mm over the entire width of the belt. The
Contractor's scope includes design, supply, installation and commissioning of a
suitable activating mechanism.
The tail pulley build-up switches shall require a low energy of actuation, but shall
be immune to vibration.
6.9.2.5 Belt Tracking Switches
Devices shall be provided to detect a lateral movement of each conveyor belt.
6.9.2.6 Emergency Stop Switches
Typically, each conveyor shall be provided with emergency stop switches of two
types: lanyard type and mushroom head push off type. The lanyard type switches
shall be installed both sides of the conveyor while the mushroom head type shall

183
be installed at the head and tail ends of the conveyor and on local control stations
for drives.
Each emergency stop switch shall be equipped with two contacts - one normally
closed contact which is relayed into the belt drive contactor circuit outside the
Control System; the other is a normally open contact which is wired to the
Control System discrete input module.
6.9.2.7 Ultrasonics
An ultrasonic transmitter/receiver unit shall be installed at each of the discharge
points for each boiler bunker where Trippers 1A, 1B discharge coal. Each
ultrasonic unit shall determine the distance from the unit to the coal level below
each tripper discharge point. The level signals shall be processed by separate
control units whose 4 to 20mA outputs shall be multiplexed to an analogue input
module of the Control System.
The level signals shall be used to enable/disable the discharges of coal from
reclaimers. The signals shall also be transmitted to the HMI screen for display.
6.9.3 Electrical Protection Equipment
Electrical protection equipment shall be supplied, installed, tested and
commissioned by the Contractor for each MV and LV circuit associated with the
coal handling plant.
Electrical protection equipment associated with coal handling plant shall comply
with the appropriate specifications detailed in Volume 2.
6.9.4 Local Control Stations
The Contractor shall supply, install., test, and commission all Local Control
Stations necessary for the safe local control operation of coal handling plant,
With each conveyor belt drive, shuttle drive, magnetic separator, tramp iron
magnet, belt weigher, washdown solenoid operated valve and other similar item of
plant supplied under the Contract, the Contractor shall provide a separate local
control station (LCS).
The local control station for a conveyor belt drive shall be mounted adjacent to the
drive.
Each conveyor belt and shuttle LCS shall be arranged so that an operator can
readily observe the associated drive or other item of plant.
6.9.5 Actuators for Retractable Skirts, Gates, Swing Chutes, Shuttle Heads
The Contractor shall provide electric actuators for power operated gates, retractable
skirts, shuttle heads and other equipment as specified.
The Contractor shall supply detailed information for each actuator

184
6.9.6 Motors
The Contractor shall supply, install, test and commission all electric motors
associated with coal handling plant.
Electric motors associated with coal handling plant shall comply with the
appropriate specifications as detailed in Volume 2.

6.9.7 Switch room Ventilation Plant
Each switch room and control room shall be provided with a fire and smoke
detection system. Upon detection of fire or smoke the ventilation plant for the
switch room or control room shall trip immediately to prevent fresh air fuelling the
fire.
Each ventilation system shall incorporate bag type filters with an automatic
cleaning system. The contractor can also offer the CHP switch room with under
positive pressure ventilation plant and air conditioning system.
The ventilation units shall incorporate bag type filters with an automatic cleaning
system initiated from a filter differential pressure switch. Details of the self
cleaning process shall, be submitted with Tender. No compressed air supply is
available.
The bag filters shall remove in excess of 99% of airborne dusts.
The bag material used shall be such that the bags will allow easy release of
materials typically entrapped in an environment of airborne moisture and coal dust
and will not deteriorate through contact with the moist coal dust.
The Bidder shall submit with the Bid details of the bag material proposed, life
expectancy of these bags in the specified environment and costs of a set of
replacement bags. One set shall be included as a consumable spare.
Dust released following an automatic cleaning sequence shall be contained in a
vessel that is readily accessible for emptying purposes.
The vessels shall be lined with a material that resists corrosion due to moistened
coal dust. The vessels shall be removable without the need for tools.
The units air intakes shall be provided with mechanical protection that will prevent
the ingress of large objects or vermin. The intake shall be flared to reduce air
velocity.
The Contractor shall provide an air relief damper mounted in the switch room wall
or door in a position that ensures a diagonal crossflow of air and maintains a
positive pressure.
The Contractor shall provide ventilation unit local control stations in accordance
with this Specification.
The system shall be provided with an alarm which shall be activated by a pressure
switch mounted in or adjacent to the system ductwork when the air pressure falls
below required level. The alarm shall be displayed in the PCR.

185
The fire detection system shall be arranged to shut down the ventilation plant and
prevent its starting if fire or smoke is detected in the switch room.
6.9.8 Switch room Layout
Switch rooms shall be fully dustproof and weatherproof.
Switchboards shall be arranged in parallel rows and over trenches (if applicable).
Adequate clearances shall be provided to allow for the possible removal of the
transformers from the switch room.
Switchboards facing each other shall have sufficient clearance between them to
allow full withdrawal of both sets of switchgear and still leave additional clearance
for personnel.
Switch rooms shall be 2 hour fire rated.
Cable access to switchboards shall be from below the switchboard.
Cable trenches not covered by switchboards shall be covered by 8 mm floor plate
covers which shall be supplied and installed by the Contractor.
The switch room shall be large enough to accommodate the following plant' and
equipment :
- switchboards as required by the Contractor's design;
- batteries and chargers as specified and in a separate forced ventilated
room;
- control system enclosures as required by the Contractor's design;
- transformers;
- fire protection cabinet;
- MP&L dist. board;
- other equipment required by the Contractor's design.
Fire protection cabinets shall be mounted on the wall inside the switch room
adjacent to a personnel access doorway.
An approved carbon dioxide fire extinguisher shall be provided for the switch
room by the Contractor.
A clipboard capable of holding the Employer's Standard A2 size prints shall be
provided on one wall of the switch room.
Switch room doors shall be metal clad two-hour fire rated and fitted with robust,
long lasting dustproof seals. Doors shall be automatically forced closing.
Door sealing strips shall be manufactured of neoprene and shall mate with surfaces
of the same or larger width. The sealing strips shall be effectively retained.
All outside surfaces of walls shall be weatherproof. This includes Switch rooms
located within other structures.

186
6.9.9 Cabling
The Contractor shall supply and install all cables, conduits, ducts, trays and
terminating equipment associated with all items of plant in accordance with this
clause and the specification detailed in Volume 2.
6.9.10 Control System
In carrying out the work under this Contract as specified the Contractor shall
comply with the requirements of Volume 7.
Where two conveyor systems, A and B, operate in parallel the Contractor shall
arrange input/output modules so that devices on Conveyor System A shall be
connected to one set of input/output modules and the devices on Conveyor.
System B shall be connected to a separate set of input/output modules. The failure
of one input/output module for Conveyor System A shall result in the stopping of
the train in which Conveyor System B is an element but shall not result in the
crippling of Conveyor System B.
The Contractor shall supply, install and terminate all wiring within the control
system enclosure and all cabling entering the enclosure.
6.9.11 Stacker, Reclaimer and Stacker/Reclaimer - Electrical
Due to the lengthy cable routes from Switch room it is expected that power
supplies to each stacker, reclaimer and stacker/reclaimer shall be at high voltage.
One dry type MV/LV transformer shall be provided on each machine closely
coupled to the Motor Control Centre (switchboard) on board the machine structure.
The transformer shall be connected to incoming power cabling via medium voltage
isolating and earthing switches in an adjacent enclosure.
Each of these machines shall be provided with whole current limit switches which,
when operated by overtravel targets at each end of the track, interrupt power
supply to the long travel drives.
Each of these machines shall be provided with an anemometer which, when high
winds are detected, shall initiate shut down of the stacking functions (after belt
purging), drive the machine to the tie down area and lower the boom to the tie
down position.
Each stacker boom is to be provided with anti-collision wires on each side of the
boom to detect obstructions such as coal pile, dry storage structure, reclaimer. The
wires shall operate switches when the wires meet an obstruction and the switches
in turn shall trip all tripper/stacker functions. This function shall be available in all
control modes.
The discharge end of each boom is to be provided with tilt switches which detect
the height of the coal pile. The switches shall be input to the control system and
used for stacker operating control functions.
The boom raising & lowering hydraulic system is to be provided with limit
switches at discrete angles for control purposes.
Each stacker, reclaimer and ploughs shall be equipped with the following:

187
- brake motor
- blocked chute detector
- bunker level detection system ( For ploughs)
- whole Current overtravel limit switches,
- emergency stop switches
- cable reel system
The reclaimer shall be provided with whole current limit switches which, when
operated by overtravel targets at each end of the track, interrupt power supply to
the long travel drives.
Long Travel Drives:
Long travel AC motor drives for tripper, stacker and reclaimer machines shall have
variable frequency controllers for speed and torque control. Motor fans shall be
independently powered.
6.9.12 Ship/Barge Unloader - Electrical
The Electrical work scope for the barge unloader is as follows:
o cable reel system;
o main switchboard;
o motor control centre;
o distribution switchboard for lighting and power;
o variable speed drives and or solid state control for DC motors (Refer Volume
2);
o control system for control and monitoring of all operations and functions
(Refer to Volume 7);
o alarm, indication and control panel in the operator's cabin;
o control console in the operator's cabin;
o control station on stair landing for long travel boom lowering and rising;
o DC motors for grab lift and grab opening/closing;
o DC motors for grab long travel;
o AC motor for boom raising and lowering;
o AC motor for operator's cabin travel;
o AC motor with variable frequency driver for the belt conveyor;
o AC motor for hopper vibration;
o AC motors, brakes and drivers for long travel;
o Others
(a) Trailing Cable

188
The Contractor shall provide a 6.6 kV three-phase trailing cable and associated
cable reel system complete with torque control motor and slip ring column.
The entire system shall include the following:
- 6.6 kV three-phase cable of adequate size to provide minimum 50%
spare current carrying capacity above the estimated maximum
demand of the unloader electrical equipment;
- six fibre optic cables;
- minimum three control cable cores concentric within the earth
conductors;
- minimum one earthing conductor;
- one pilot earth conductor for earth continuity monitoring.

The fibre optic cable cores, the earth and control cables and the medium voltage
cables shall be terminated in three separate enclosures. The cores of the fibre optic
cable shall be terminated within the electrical equipment room within a splicing
box, including spare cores.

(b) Grab Hoist Carriage
The grab hoist carriage and hoist drives and controls shall comply electrically with
the appropriate crane code. The carriage shall be provided with overtravel limit
switches which upon operation shall trip the carriage drives.
Power supply and control cabling to the hoist carriage shall be a catenary system
comprised of suitable tracks and trolleys. Undertension and overtension limit
switches shall be provided to trip carriage long travel drives should the catenary
trolleys fail to move correctly or the cabling break away.
Carriage and hoist AC motor drives shall have variable frequency controllers for
speed and torque control. Alternative methods will be considered.
(c) Unloader Long Travel Drives
Long travel AC motor drives shall have variable frequency controllers for speed
and torque control. Alternative methods will be considered.
The unloader structure shall be provided with current operated limit switches,
which upon operation shall trip the long travel drives.
(d) Surge Hopper Level Detection
High level tilt switches (two per hopper) shall be provided to disable the grab
bucket release mechanism until the hopper coal level is low enough to accept the
bucket load.
If the hopper outlet is fitted with vibratory feeder(s), microwave level system shall
be provided to shut down the feeder when the coal level drops below the

189
microwave sensor level. Feeders would be enabled whenever the hopper level is
above the sensor level.
(e) Cable Reel Systems
Under tension and over tension limit switches shall be provided to trip unloader
long travel drives should the cable reel fail to move correctly or the cabling break
away.
(f) Power Supplies
Due to the lengthy cable routes from Switch room it is expected that power
supplies to each grab unloader shall be at medium voltage. One dry type
transformer shall be provided on each grab unloader closely coupled to the Motor
Control Centre (switchboard) on board the grab unloader structure.
The transformer shall be connected to incoming power cabling via medium voltage
isolating and earthing switches in an adjacent enclosure.
The dry type transformer, if mounted outdoors, shall be housed in a IP56 steel
enclosure equipped with an air/air heat exchanger. The enclosure shall be shaded
from the sun. An IP23 enclosure shall be acceptable in a switch room designed
with a filtered and pressurized air supply.
Earthing cores shall be provided in each trailing cable for power supply earthing
purposes.
Rails shall be connected to the lightning earthing system. Each grab unloader shall
be provided with lightning rod, down conductors and brushgear to rails.
(g) Lighting
Each grab unloader shall be provided with floodlighting so the operator can view
the grab, barges and top of surge bin at night and in other poor lighting conditions.
(h) Strong Wind Precautions
Each barge unloader shall be provided with an anemometer which, when high
winds are detected, shall initiate shut down of the unloading functions, drive the
machine to the maintenance area and raise / lower the grab/bucket to the tie down
position.
(i) Blocked Chute Detection
Chutes below vibratory feeders leading to conveyor loading skirt boxes shall be
provided with tilt switches which detect blocked chutes. The switches shall input
to the Control System and after a suitable time delay, trip the vibratory feeders.
6.9.13 Sampling System - Electrical
(a) The power supply for each sampling system shall be derived from a
dedicated CFS or circuit breaker at the appropriate motor control centre.
(b) Each sampling system shall be controlled by the Control System.

190
(c) Each sampling system shall have a local control station where local or
remote control may be selected.
6.9.14 Weighers - Electrical
(a) High accuracy weighers shall be installed on conveyors.
(b) Coaling rates in t/h shall be to be separately transmitted to the Control
System.
(c) Each belt weigher shall have a local control station.
6.9.15 Tramp Iron Magnets and Metal Detectors
(a) Tramp iron magnets shall have a local control station incorporating the
transformer/rectifier set, control selector switch and main power switch.
Analog quantities such as magnet voltage and current shall be derived
using transducers and input to the Control System.
(b) Tramp iron magnets shall be energized whenever the associated conveyor
is running.
(c) Tramp iron magnets shall be supplied with a self cleaning belt which shall
cycle every 20 minutes with a start/run for 1 minute/stop cycle. The cycle
shall be enabled when the associated conveyor is running and there shall
be one cycle immediately the conveyor stops.
(d) The self cleaning belt drive shall be provided with a local control station.
(e) Metal detectors shall be provided with a local control station, a lamp
indicating metal has been detected and a marker release mechanism which
drops a marker on the belt at a point where metal has been detected. This
mechanism shall be installed sufficiently downstream of the detector to
enable correct identification of the tramp metal.
(f) Metal detectors shall communicate relevant functions to the Control
System.
6.9.16 Hydraulic Systems - Electrical
(a) Hydraulic systems comprising drive motors, pumps, reservoirs, valves and
piping shall be installed on the stacker and the reclaimer to enable
functions such as boom raising to be performed.
(b) Pressure switches, oil level switches, valve position limit switches and
valve actuators shall be provided for safety and control purposes.

191
6.9.17 Cable Reel Systems
The Contractor shall provide separate Medium Voltage cable reel and control cable
reel systems for:
- Barge Unloader A
- Barge Unloader B
- Barge Unloader C
- Traveling Stacker machines
- Traveling Reclaimer machine
- Travelling Stacker / Reclaimer

The Contractor shall provide separate 400V cable reel / catenary and control cable
reel /catenary systems for:
- For Tripper 1A
- For Tripper 1B

6.9.18 Contract Drawings
The drawings and information requested in technical schedules shall be completely
filled in by the Bidder.
Notwithstanding the requirements of the technical schedules during various design
phases of the Contract, the Contractor shall submit.
General arrangement information and details of all machinery and equipment:
Sectional views of filter units, compressors gearboxes motors and couplings,
detailed to show relative parts.
Drawings, diagrams, and calculations showing design data_ stresses, loadings, etc.,
adopted to all equipment and structures.


192
6.10 SPARE PARTS
6.10.1 General
Spare parts for the plant covered by this section shall generally be supplied in
accordance with the Contract.
Essential spares shall comprise at least the items as listed below and as detailed in
the list of the relevant essential spares of Volume for electrical Plant. Optional
spares shall be in accordance with the manufacturers recommendations for parts
which may fail and require replacement.
6.10.2 Essential Spares
The following items shall be provided per unit:
6.10.2.1 Generator
(a) One (1) generator set of shaft journal bearings, comprising top and
bottom halves, complete with bolts, nuts and lockwashers.
(b) One (1) generator set of bearing and pedestal insulation.
(c) One (1) turbine-generator set of shaft earthing and voltage sensing
brushes.
(d) Sufficient top and bottom stator winding bars to repair a fault in the
worst location; supply to include all associated items necessary for the
repair including hoses, fittings, wedges and packers etc.
(e) One (1) turbine-generator set of generator access doors and shield
gaskets.
(f) One (1) turbine-generator set of brush gear including arms, brush
boxes, springs.
(g) One (1) generator set of slip rings.
(h) One (1) generator terminal bushing
6.10.2.2 Excitation System
(a) One (1) of each type of automatic excitation controller printed circuit
card.
(b) Number of thyristor units equivalent to the amount of redundancy in
one arm of a thyristor bridge - refer to Volume 2; each unit consisting
of the valve and associated control and protection components.
(c) One (1) thyristor bridge cooling fan/motor unit
(d) One (1) field circuit breaker set auxiliary contacts.
(e) One (1) field circuit breaker set arcing tips.
(f) One (1) field circuit breaker set suppression resistors.
(g) One (1) field circuit breaker set closing and trip coils.


193
6.10.2.3 Hydrogen Cooling System
(a) Hydrogen / CCW cooler
- 5% of the cooling tubes
- Tube plugs of number equivalent to 10% of the total number of tubes.
- Four (4) sets gaskets for the manholes and water boxes
- Four (4) sets of special gaskets for each heat exchanger
(b) Valves and Fittings
- Two (2) valves of each type and size
- Two (2) sets of renewable parts of valves for each type and size
- 20% of sight flow indicator installed
- One (1) set of filter basket for each type
6.10.2.4 Seal Oil System
(a) Seal oil pumps
- One (1) set of bearings for each pump.
- One (1) set of wearing rings and bushes.
- Two (2) sets of packing and special gaskets for each pump
(b) Seal Oil Cooler
- 5% of the cooling tubes.
- Tube plugs of number equivalent to 10% of the total number of tubes.
- Four (4) sets gaskets for the manholes and water boxes.
- Four (4) sets of special gaskets for each heat exchanger.
(c) Valves and Fittings
- Two (2) valves of each type and size.
- Two (2) sets of renewable parts of valves for each type and size.
- 20% of sight flow indicator installed.
- One (1) set of filter basket for each type.
6.10.2.5 Medium (6.6kV) and Low (400V) voltage system
(a) One 6.6kV and 400V circuit breaker of each type and rating.
(b) One 6.6kV switching device of each type and rating.
(c) One 6.6kV motor of each type and rating.
(d) One actuator of each type/function/rating.
(e) The 400V switchboards shall be designed to incorporate 10% more
circuits than the number specifically identified as being required for
the plant. Spare circuits shall be fully equipped wired and tested with
all electrical equipment other than CTs. Spare circuit ratings shall

194
include the complete range of ratings used for plant operation but shall
comprise mostly lower rated rather than higher rated circuits. The
ratings and numbers chosen shall be subject to agreement with the
Employer.
(f) One transformer bushing of each type and rating.
6.10.2.6 Control Devices
(a) Six fuses of each type and rating.
(b) Four TRIP coils and four CLOSE coils of each type and rating
(c) Four control relays of each type and rating.
6.10.2.7 Cables
One steel drum (wooden drums are not acceptable for spares usage)
containing 250 meters of each type of 6.6kV cable. A separate steel drum
shall be provided for each cable size.
6.10.2.8 High Voltage Switchyard system
High Voltage Switchgear

No. Items
Qty
(220kV side)
a) Circuit Breakers
- Interrupter - 1 phase 3
- Support columns 3
- Capacitors - 1 phase 3
- Auxiliary interrupter 3
- Insulators 1
- Operating rod 1
- Contacts - 1 phase 3 set
- Trip/close coils 10
- Auxiliary switches 2
- Relays/contacts 2 set
- Operating springs 1
- Operating mechanism 1
- Accumulator - 3 phase 3
- Hydraulic valves 2
- Pressure switches 2
- Motors 2
- Drive linkage 1 chain

195
No. Items
Qty
(220kV side)
- Desiccant 2
b) Current Transformers
- CT Post 3 each
c) Voltage Transformers
- VT Post 3
d) Disconnectors
- Fixed/moving contacts - 3 phase 2 set
- Motor 1
- Relays/contacts 2 set
e) Earth Switches
- Fixed/moving contacts - 3 phase 2 set
f) Insulators:
- Post 3 each
g) Surge Arrestors:
- Unit 1
(a) Protection Systems
Complete spare relays shall be provided for every type used for protection
purposes.
The quantity provided for each type shall be 5% of the total number of that
type or one (1) unit, whichever is the greater.
(b) Electrical Works

No. Items Quantity
a) Disc Insulators:
- 220kV String 1 set
b) Conductor Clamps, Fittings: 6 each
c) ACSR Conductor (Each size) 100 metres
d) Kiosk and Panel Equipment:
- Terminal blocks, fuses, links, cable glands etc 10 each
- Auxiliary relays etc. - each type 5 each
e) 220 V Batteries:

196
No. Items Quantity
- Cells 20 each
f) Battery Chargers:
- Printed circuit boards complete replacement
set (mother board not included)
1 each
- Main diode - complete replacement set 1 each
- Thyristor - complete replacement set 1 each
g) DC Distribution Boards
- Relays - each type 1 each
- Fuses - each type each 10
h) AC Distribution Boards:
- Contactor contacts - set 3 each
- Contactor coil 1 each
- Circuit breakers - each type and rating 1 each
6.10.2.9 Communication systems
(a) Technical Services
Spares shall cover:
- Rapid restoration spares comprising replaceable sub-units such as
power supplies and printed circuit cards - 10% of total, with a
minimum of one (1).
- Component parts to enable a faulty sub-unit to be repaired in a central
workshop - 5% of total.
(c) Radio Paging, UHF Radio and Emergency Warning Systems
Radio paging system:
- Pagers, vibrating type - unit 2
- Pagers, audible type - unit 3
UHF Radio System:
- Radios, hand-held mobile - unit 1
- Radios, fixed - unit 1
(d) Emergency Warning System:
Spares shall cover
- Rapid restoration spares comprising replaceable sub-units such as
power supplies, printed circuit cards, microphones, speakers etc. -
10% of total of each sub-unit with a minimum of one (1).
- Component parts to enable a faulty sub-unit to be repaired in a
workshop - 5% of total of each part with a minimum of one (1).

197
6.10.2.10 Coal Handling Plant
6.10.2.10.1 Indoor Switchboard
The Contractor shall provide 10% of the total equipment and/or apparatus furnished
for each type and rating as a minimum for the following.
- Bushing insulators
- Stationary contacts
- Moving contacts
- Trip coils
- Closing coils
- Auxiliary contacts
- Auxiliary relay
- Springs
- Valves
- Main contacts
- Auxiliary contact
- Miniature circuit breaker
- Thermal relays
- Terminal blocks
- Lamp fittings and lens
- 200% of lamp bulbs
- Pushbutton switches

6.10.2.10.2 Auxiliary Power System
The following spare parts as a minimum shall be applied for Coal Handling and
Jetty P/C Transformers.
- Two (2) sets of bushings for each type used
- One (1) set of thermometer for each type complete with accessories
- One (1) set of winding temperature indicator for each type used
- One (1) piece of auxiliary current transformer for each type used for
metering, protection and for accessories
- One (1) complete set of contacts and coils for each type used for
contactors and relays
6.10.2.10.3 Battery and Charger
- Ten (1) spare cells, dry-charged with electrolyte in sealed containers.
- Ten (10%) of the total electrolyte used.

198
- Ten (10) pieces of terminal connector
- 200% of pilot lamp bulbs for each type used.
- 20% of fuses for each type and rating.
- 20% of auxiliary relays for each type and rating.
- One (1) set of relay for each type supplied.
- 100% of thyristor for each type used.
- One (1) set of printed circuit boards for each type used for control
circuit.
- One (1) set of moulded case circuit breaker for each type and rating.
- Two (2) sets of terminal board for each type used.
- One (1) set of changeover switch for each type used.
6.10.2.10.4 Lighting System
- 20% of moulded case circuit breaker for each type and rating used.
- 200% of electric bulb for pilot light.
- 20% of fuse for each type and rating.
- 20% of the total number of lamps used for each type and rating.
6.10.2.10.5 Cables
- Five percent (5%) of the installed length of each type and rating of
cable used. Each spare length shall be conditioned on a reel.
- Five percent (5%) of cable terminals and clamps used in cable
termination.
6.10.2.10.6 Motors
- Two (2) sets of bearing for each type used.
- One (1) motor of each type used in valve actuators.
6.10.2.10.7 Other Electrical Parts
- Two hundred percent (200%) of normal use of carbon brush for torque
motors
- Two hundred percent (200%) of normal use of brush for cable drum
slip ring
- One hundred percent (100%) of normal use of solenoid valve coil
- Five percent (5%) of speed switch
- Five percent (5%) of chute switch
- Five percent (5%) of emergency switch
6.10.2.10.8 Special Tools
One (1) set of special tools necessary for maintenance of the coal handling equipment.

199
6.10.2.10.9 Coal Handling Plant Control and Instrumentation
6.10.2.10.10 Essential Spare Parts
Essential spare parts for the supplied control and instrumentation system shall be good
for five (5) years operation of the systems specified under special tools and for all
other system applicable and shall not be limited to the following:
- 10% of number of sets of Printed Circuit Board (PCB)/module but
not less than one (1) set for each type used
- 100 pieces of fuse element for each type and rating
- 20 pieces of base for fuse for each type
- 12 sets of A/M station (selected)
- 200 pieces of lamp bulb for each type used
- 200 pieces of indicator lamp for each system
- 4 sets of annunciator used for each system
- 20 pieces of LED for annunciator windows for each control
system panel
- 20 percent of spare of the total number of each panel alarm
window
- 20 pieces of lens for illuminated push button switch for each
colour used
- 10 sets of assembly of control switch for each type used
- 10 sets of assembly of push button switch for each type used
- 20 sets of auxiliary relay for each type and rating used
- 10 sets of "ON" time delay relay for each type and rating used
- 10 sets of "OFF" time delay relay for each type and rating used
- 4 sets of timer relay for each type used
- 5 sets of relay base for each type
- 3 sets level switch assembly for each type used
- 5 sets of pressure switch for each type used
- 2 sets of assembly of level indicator for each type used
- 5 sets of flow switch for each type used
- 5 sets of temperature switch for each type used
- 2 sets of flow meter for each and range used
- 10 sets of solenoid valve for each type used
- set of indicating instrument for each type used
- set of indicating meter for each type used
- set of diaphragm for each type of actuator for pneumatic control valve

200
- 5 sets of gland packing for each type of control valve
- 20 pieces of power diodes for each type used in control systems
- sets of load cell of each type
- set of transmitter (selected range) for each control system with spare
parts
- set of 3-valve bypass manifold for each type used
- set of 9-point test recorder
- sets of pressure/hand pump for instrument calibration
- 300 pieces of fittings for each type and size used
- 10 percent of the installed length of tubing of each type and size
used
- Other items according to the manufacture's recommendation
In addition to the above, at least 10% of each type of spare modules including
auxiliary relays shall be provided in each control cubicle and control cabinet for the
case of the maintenance work. Those spare modules and auxiliary relays shall be
suitably fitted in the relevant cubicles and cabinets.

6.10.2.10.11 Special Tools and Maintenance
- One (1) set of special tools/calibration test instrument/program
loader applicable for the following systems:
- Unloader control system
- Stacker, Reclaimer and Bucket Wheel Stacker/Reclaimer control
system
- Conveyor control system
- Auto sampler system
- Yard management computer
- Coal yard spray control system
- Others
- One (1) set of special tools for all other supplied instruments and
controls not covered/mentioned in the above systems but is in the
system itself which are necessary for system maintenance and
operation. Any special wiring tools for each system shall also be
supplied.
6.10.3 Optional Spares
The Contractor shall list in Volume 12 Technical Schedules those optional spare
parts which it is recommended should be purchased in additional to those listed
for essential spares to maintain the plant in an operational condition.
These shall be subject to agreement between the Contractor and the Employer and
shall be based on manufacturers recommendations.

201
6.10.3.1 Generator Circuit Breaker Scheme (GCB)
(a) The Contractor shall list in the pricing schedule of the Contract the
individual prices of the spare parts (if any) together with the prices of all
other spare parts that the manufacturer recommends should be held. Unit
prices should be stated and the price given shall be valid for any reasonable
quantity required under the Contract by the Employer.
(b) the Employer may order all or any number of the parts at its discretion. The
Contractor shall supply the parts selected at the individual prices stated in
the schedule.
(c) All parts ordered shall be interchangeable and suitable for use in place of
corresponding parts supplied with the plant. They shall comply with the
Specification and shall be suitably marked or numbered for identification
and prepared for storage in an approved manner to prevent deterioration.
Packing and identification of spare parts shall be in accordance with the
requirements of this Specification.
6.10.4 Special and Maintenance Tools
The Contractor shall list in Volume 12 Technical Schedules those tools and
appliances which are essential for the maintenance of the plant and the additional
tools and appliances which it is recommended should also be purchased.
Tools for maintenance of the generator and the auxiliaries shall be provided as
follows:
6.10.4.1 Generator
One (1) apparatus, to maintain a breathable atmosphere inside the generator
during personnel access via manholes, and to prevent the condensation of
moisture within the generator when the generator is de-gassed but not otherwise
open to atmosphere.
A description of the proposed apparatus shall be included.
6.10.4.2 Generator Circuit Breaker Scheme (GCB):
(a) One complete set of all special spanners, tools and appliances including
special slings and lifting equipment necessary for maintaining the whole of
the Plant including that Plant supplied by Subcontractors, shall be provided.
The spanners and tools supplied under this Clause shall be new and shall not
be used during the erection of the Plant. A list of such spanners, tools and
appliances shall be given in the appropriate schedule.
(b) The spanners shall include two spanners to fit the nuts of all bolts 25mm
diameter and over. Grease guns, spanners and tools which are of a size and
type which could be reasonably expected to be readily available to
tradesmen are not required to be provided under this Clause.
6.10.5 Consumables
The Contractor shall supply consumables required for the equipment and systems
being provided under the Contract in accordance with Volume 2 and as generally
listed below.
The Contractor shall list the consumables in Volume 12 Technical Schedules.

202
The Contractor shall add to these list consumables which it is considered should
also be purchased to maintain the plant in an operational condition.
6.10.5.1 High Voltage Switchyard system
No. Item Qty
(a) Insulation oil - litres 1000
(b) SF
6
gas - 42 kg cylinder full 1
(c) SF
6
gas cylinder - 42 kg empty 1
(d) Seals - sets 2
(e) Grease - each type, litres 10
(f) Lubricating oil - each type, litres 100
(g) Fuse cartridges - each type 10
(h) Lamps - each type 10

6.10.5.2 Generator Circuit Breaker Scheme (GCB):
Consumable spares which will require replacement at intervals of less than 24
months, shall be provided as part of the Contract and the price included in the
total contract price. The consumable spares shall be sufficient for one year's
normal usage. Where an item is not listed in the appropriate schedule and requires
replacement in less than 24 months from the date of Provisional Acceptance, the
consumable spares shall be provided by the Contractor at no additional cost to the
Employer.


203
APPENDICES

APPENDIX 1:
SPECIALIZED REPORT ON THE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM FOR THAI BINH
TPP PROJECT 2 X300 MW

CHAPTER 1: GENERAL
1.1 Basis
Specialized report on agreement for arrangement of communication system for Thai Binh
TPP project was prepared based on the following grounds:
- Requirements for integrating SCADA/EMS system of Load dispatch centres and
connection for protecting 220kV transmission lines.
- Letter No 3396/CV-EVN-KTL, dated August 07, 2002, EVN supplied firm guidance
in Works relating to SCADA/EMS system.
- Letter No 581/QG-CN, dated August 04, 2009 issued by the National Load
Dispatch Center A0 on Requirement on type of modem for Load Dispatch Center.
- Investment Project Report for Thai Binh thermal power plant prepared by PECC1.
1.2 Requirements of communication system
1.2.1 For Control Dispatch system
Thai Binh thermal power plant (Thai Binh TPP) will be equipped with an RTU system and
pursuant to Article 7 of the regulation Constructing and Managing the operation of SCADA
equipments of substation and power station, code Q 09-04 (issued together with Decision
No 1208/Q-EVN, dated July 29, 2008) of Vietnam Electricity, Thai Binh TPP shall be
controlled and supervised by National Load Dispatch Center (A0) and Northern Region
Load Dispatch Center (A1).
Therefore the communication system in this project shall ensure sufficient channels for
providing the following services:
- Supplying Hot-line telephone channels between Thai Binh TPP and A0, A1.
- Supplying data transmission channels for SCADA/EMS system: supplying
communication channel for implementing SCADA functions of Thai Binh TPP from
A0, A1.
1.2.2 Communication channel for transmission line protection relay.
Protection relay system shall provide sufficient protection signal transmission communication
channels for two 220kV transmission lines from 220kV switchyard of Thai Binh TPP to Thai
Binh 220kV substation. Protection signals required for exchange for each transmission line
include:
- Protection circuit 1: Differential protection, directional earth fault protection and
inter-tripping signal.
- Protection circuit 2: Distance protection, directional earth fault protection and inter-
tripping signal.

204
1.2.3 Connecting PABX at Thai Binh TPP to Power sector switchboards.
Establishing 4W E&M trunking lines, E1 trunking line connecting switchboard at Thai Binh
TPP to other switchboards in Power sectors for telephone, fax, data communication between
subscribers in Power sector and with other subscribers through automatic dialing.
Providing the service of data transmission of electric power metering system for Power
purchasing.
1.2.4 Available lines for connecting LAN/WAN
Supplying Ethernet gate on SDH and PCM-30 equipments at Thai Binh TPP for being
available lines for connecting LAN of Thai Binh TPP to power sector WAN.
1.3 Relevant Project.
1.3.1 Project Thai Binh 220kV transmission line Thai Binh TPP and section
extension at Thai Binh 220kV station
This project is in technical design period, it has been considered for investment as follows:
- Providing 01 SDH/STM-4 optic transmission equipment at Thai Binh 220kV
substation to connect Kim Dong 220kV substation and Thai Binh TPP.
- Providing 01 PCM-30 channel multiplexing equipment, 05 Teleprotection equipment
units at Thai Binh 220kV substation, 01 PCM-30 channel multiplexing equipment, 02
Teleprotection equipment units at Kim Dong 220kV substation for transmitting signal
to protection relays of 220kV Thai Binh Kim ong, Thai Binh Thai Binh TPP
transmission line.
- Providing 01 PCM-30 channel multiplexing equipment at VT1, 01 modem at A0, 01
modem at A1 for transmitting signals of SCADA/EMS, hotline between Thai Binh
TPP and A0, A1.
- Providing additionally 4W E&M trunk card at Thai Binh 220kV substation, E1 trunk
at VT1 for connecting switchboard at Thai Binh TPP to switchboard network of Power
sector.
- Providing DC-48V Power supply at Thai Binh 220kV substation.
1.3.2 Project 220kV Kim Dong Thai Binh transmission line
220kV Kim Dong Thai Binh transmission line project shall be constructed as a double
circuit line with a length of 50km from Kim Dong 220kV substation to Thai Binh 220kV
substation and it is anticipated to hang one OPGW/24SM optical fibre line on this double
circuit line.
1.3.3 Thuong Tin 220kV Kim Dong transmission line.
220kV Kim Dong Thuong Tin transmission line project ( synchronous with 220kV Kim
Dong substation) of which technical design is prepared by IOE shall construct a double circuit
line with a length of 26km from Kim Dong 220kV substation to Thuong Tin 500kV
substation and it is anticipated to hang one OPGW/24SM optical fibre line on this double
circuit line.
1.3.4 Project Kim Dong 220kV Substation
This project is in the period of technical design, it is considered to arrange optical
communication route on OPGW cable- 220kV Thuong Tin - Kim Dong in order to transmit
signal for 220kV Thuong Tin - Kim Dong transmission line protection relays, SCADA

205
signals, hotline between Kim Dong 220kV substation and A1 as well as switchboard
connection at Kim Dong 220kV substation with other switchboards in Power sector.
Details as follows:
Optical cable and accessories
- Provide NMOC cable and accessories at Kim Dong 220kV substation and Thuong Tin
500kV substation for optical connection of Kim Dong Thuong Tin.
Equipment
- Provide 01 SDH/STM-4 optic transmission equipment, ADM configuration at Kim
Dong 220kV substation, supplementing STM-4/L4.2 optical card to hiT7070
equipment at Thuong Tin 500kV substation.
- Provide PCM-30 channel multiplexing equipment, communication equipment for
protection relay at Kim Dong 220kV substation, Thuong Tin 500kV substation for
protection of Thuong Tin - Kim Dong 220kV transmission line and transmission of
SCADA/EMS signal, hotline from Kim Dong to A1.
- Provide DC-48V system: rectifier, charger, battery, power distribution cabinet at Kim
Dong 220kV substation.

206
CHAPTER 2: COMMUNICATION SYSTEM ARRANGEMENT
2.1 Transmission arrangement
2.1.1 Arrangement of optical transmission route.
The arrangement of the optical communication route from 220kV Thai Binh switchyard to
Thai Binh 220kV substation will provide communication channels for 220kV transmission
line Thai Binh TPP, Thai Binh 220kV substation protection relay system and incorporate
communication channels for SCADA system from A0, A1 to Thai Binh TPP.
The arrangement of the optical communication route on NMOC cable: 220kV Thai Binh
switchyard Thai Binh TPP Centre Control Building:
- Provide NMOC/12SM optical cable for connection of 220kV switchyard Centre
Control Building with distance of 500m
- Provide for transmission channel capacity between the 220kV switchyard and the Thai
Binh TPP Centre Control Building optical communication route at a bandwidth of
STM-1 (Equivalent to speed of 155.52Mbps).
- The function of this communication route is to be a communication line connecting
hotline system to A0, A1 and PABX room located in Centre Control Building to the
Power sector communication network via forwarding at 220kV Thai Binh switchyard.
2.1.2 Communication channels arrangement.
2.1.2.1 Communication channel for control - supervision signals for Thai Binh TPP
Thai Binh TPP will be equipped with an RTU system at the 220kVswichyard. Signals from
the SCADA/EMS system at the Plant and switchyard will be transmitted to the RTU and sent
to A0, A1 by connection between the RTU at the Plant and preprocess computer (Front-End)
at A0 and A1, using communication protocol IEC 60870-5-101.
Communication channels between the RTU and PCU will use a V24/RS-232 connection of
the multiplexing equipment PCM-30. Signals from the RTU will be transferred through a
modem to change into communication signals according to ITU-T V24 standard.
Thai Binh TPP will be controlled directly from A0, A1 through hotline telephone, using 2W
channel of PCM-30 channel multiplexing equipment.
2.1.2.2 Communication channel for protection relay
The signal circuits of the No.1 protection relays (Differential protection, directional earth
fault protection and inter-tripping signal) will be transmitted directly through optical fibre of
optical communication route 220kV Thai Binh TPP switchyard Thai Binh 220kV station.
The signal of circuit of the No.2 protection relays (Distance protection, directional earth
fault protection and inter-tripping signal) will be transmitted via communication equipment
from the protection relays (Teleprotection) and modified into a communication signal to be
transmitted through the Digital E1(2Mbps) ITU-T G.703.6 channel of the optical transmission
equipment SDH/STM-4 at the 220kV Thai Binh TPP switchyard 220kV Thai Binh
substation.
2.1.2.3 Channels connecting switchboards at Thai Binh TPP to Power sector
switchboards:
- Additionally provide trunking card 4W E&M for the HICOM300 switchboard at
220kV Thai Binh substation to connect to the switchboard at Thai Binh TPP through

207
optical transmission route: Centre Control Building 220kV Thai Binh switchyard
220kV Thai Binh substation.
- Additionally provide trunking card E1 for the existing Flexible 6000 switchboard at
Northern Telecommunication Center VT1 to connect with the switchboard at Thai
Binh TPP through optical communication route: Centre Control Building 220kV
Thai Binh switchyard 220kV Thai Binh substation and existing optical transmission
routes of Power Sector.
- Provision of trunking card 4W E&M for the HICOM300 switchboard at 220kV Thai
Binh substation and trunking card E1 for the Flexicom 6000 switchboard at VT1 is
considered part of the project 220kV Thai Binh TPP transmission line 220kV Thai
Binh substation and extension of bay at 220kV Thai Binh substation .
2.1.2.4 LAN/WAN Connection
Provision of Ethernet gate on SDH and PCM-30 equipment at Thai Binh TPP to connect LAN
of Thai Binh TPP to WAN of Power sector.
2.2 Transmission line calculation
The following parameters are used for calculation with wave length of 1310nm:
- Optical fibre : G.652
- Optical cable loss : 0,35dB/km
- Connecting loss : 0,5dB/connector
- Quantity : 2 connectors
- Joint Loss : 0,1dB/splice
- Average length of cable: 3km
- Optical flow loss : 1dB
- Reserve funds : 3dB
- Monochromatic dispersion: 3,5ps/nm.km

2.2.1 Thai Binh TPP 220kV switchyard 220kV Thai Binh substation route
Distance: 30km

Transmission line loss 0.35 x 30km 10.5 dB
Joint loss 0.1 x30/3 1.0 dB
Connecting loss 2 x 0.5 1 dB
Optical flow loss 1 dB
Additional Losses 3 dB
Total 16.5 dB
Transmission line dispersion 30 x 3.5ps/nm.km 105 ps/nm


208
2.2.2 Thai Binh TPP 220kV switchyard Centre Control Building
Distance: 0.5km
Transmission line loss 0.35 x 0.5km 0.175 dB
Joint loss 0.1 x 2 0.2 dB
Connecting loss 2 x 0.5 1 dB
Optical flow loss 1 dB
Additional Losses 3 dB
Total 5.375 dB
Transmission line dispersion 0.5 x 3.5ps/nm.km 1.75 ps/nm

Conclusion: From the above calculation results, based on optical interface criteria without
using optical amplifier according to ITU-T G.957 and TCN 68-173:1998 standard, it is
recommended to choose L-4.1 communication for Thai Binh TPP 220kV switchyard
220kV Thai Binh Substation route and I-1.1 communication for 220kV switchyard Thai
Binh TPP Centre Control Building route.

209
CHAPTER 3: CONTENT OF AGREEMENT
3.1 Usage of optical fibre, SDH equipment.
3.1.1 Optical fibre
According to decentralized administration of EVN, National Power Transmission (NPT) is
tasked to manage and develop several optical fibre on the 500kV, 220kV transmission lines.
For the Northern region, optical fibres on the transmission lines managed by NPT are
assigned to Power transmission Company No 1 (TT1) to manage and develop. Remaining
optical fibres are managed by Power Telecommunication Company (EVN-Telecom).
Currently, NPT has planned investment for OPGW-220kV/24SM optical fibre route from
220kV Thai Binh switchyard to 220kV Thai Binh substation. Based on the actual situation
and relevant projects, it is recommended that NPT should allow for usage of the optical fibre
route via optical communication route OPGW-220kV/24SM 220kV Thai Binh switchyard
220kV Thai Binh substation as follows:
- 04 fibres for connecting optical communication route STM-4 220kV Thai Binh
switchyard 220kV Thai Binh substation.
- 04 fibres for connecting differential protection relay at 220kV Thai Binh switchyard
220kV Thai Binh substation.
3.1.2 Usage of SDH equipment.
- According to the calculation in item 2.2, the optical communication route from
SDH/STM-4 220kV Thai Binh switchyard - 220kV Thai Binh substation uses optical
interface L-4.1, therefore, it is recommended that NPT should invest in the optical
transmission equipment SDH/STM-4 at 220kV Thai Binh substation with provision of
02 L-4.1 gates to connect to SDH/STM-4 equipment at 220kV Thai Binh switchyard
provided in this project.
- Thai Binh TPP is responsible for investing in the SDH/STM-4 optical transmission
equipment and relevant equipment inside the fence of the Plant to connect to the
220kV Thai Binh substation, NPT is recommended to consider the use of SDH
equipment and connect relevant communication channels from 220kV Thai Binh
substation to VT1, A0, A1.
- As many companies use the existing SDH transmission equipment, it is proposed that
NPT should work with EVN to issue an agreement which additionally defines the
equipment managed by NPT.
3.1.3 Communication channels required for supply.
Optical communication channel:
- Connecting STM-4/L-4.1 220kV Thai Binh switchyard 220kV Thai Binh substation.
E1 communication channel for the following purpose:
- Connecting PCM-30 Thai Binh TPP Centre Control Building 220kV Thai Binh
switchyard: 01 channel.
- 220kV Thai Binh transmission line distance protection relay - 220kV Thai Binh
substation: 02 channels.
- Connecting switchboard at Thai Binh TPP to switchboard at VT1: 01 channel.

210
Notes: E1 channel connecting via PCM-30 220kV Thai Binh switchyard- VT1 is considered
as part of the project 220kV TPP Thai Binh transmission line 220kV Thai Binh substation
and extending bays at 220kV Thai Binh substation
3.2 Scope of investment to install communication equipment.
Thai Binh TPP will invest in and install communication equipment inside the fence of the
Plant, other telecommunication equipments for connecting Thai Binh TPP to the national grid
will be invested in through the project 220kV Thai Binh TPP transmission line 220kV Thai
Binh substation and extending bays at 220kV Thai Binh substation.
3.2.1 Communication equipment for this project at Thai Binh thermal power plant.
a. At Centre Control Building
Optical transmission equipment
- Providing 01 SDH/STM-1 optical transmission equipment, MUX 1+1 configuration to
connect to 220kV Thai Binh switchyard.
Optical fibre and accessories
- Providing 01 optical fibre rack together with ODF+TB cable terminal box
Access equipment
- Providing 01 PCM-30 channel multiplexing equipment connecting to 220kV Thai
Binh switchyard to draw odd channels for serving hotline signal transmission channel
and switchboard trunk signal among Thai Binh TPP.
- Providing 02 hotline telephone lines to transmit signals to A0, A1.
DC-48V system
- Providing DC-48V system: rectifier, charger, battery, power distribution cabinet and
connection accessories.
b. At 220kVswitchyard
Optical Cable and accessories
- Provide 800m of NMOC cable, 12SM type (ITU-T G.652) together with flexible
HDUPVC conduit for which 500m will be for connecting Thai Binh TPP Centre
Control Building to the 220kV Thai Binh switchyard, 300m for connecting OPGW
optical cable from the tower gantry beam (220kV Thai Binh substation bay) to ODF
rack located in the communication room of the 220kV Thai Binh switchyard.
- Provide 01 OPGW-NMOC cable connecting box.
- Provide 02 optical fibre distribution racks together with ODF+TB cable terminal box
Access equipment
- Provide 01 PCM-30 channel multiplexing equipment connecting to the Centre Control
Building of Thai Binh TPP and 220kV Thai Binh substation.
- Providing 02 sets of Teleprotection equipment for transmitting protection relay signals
of Thai Binh TPP 220kV transmission line -Thai Binh 220kV substation


211
3.2.2 Equipment and items recommended for NPT to invest in the project 220kV Thai
Binh TPP transmission line 220kV Thai Binh substation for connecting Thai Binh
TPP to the national grid.
a. 220kV Thai Binh substation
Optical transmission equipment
- Provide 01 SDH/STM-4 optical transmission equipment
Access Equipment
- Provide 01 PCM-30 channel multiplexing equipment
- Provide 02 sets of Teleprotection equipment for transmitting protection relay signals of
Thai Binh TPP 220kV transmission line -Thai Binh 220kV substation
- Provide trunking card 4W E&M switchboard for the existing HICOM300.
Power supply
- Provide 01 DC-48V system
b. VT1/EVN Telecom
Access equipment
- Provide 01 PCM-30 channel multiplexing equipment together with cabinet and
accessories.
DC-48V supply equipment
- Using existing DC-48V at VT1
c. National Load Dispatch Center A0
- Provide 01 modem at A0 for transmitting control-dispatch signals to Thai Binh TPP.
- Use the existing DC-48V power system at A0 to supply power to the modem.
- Communication cabling from 2W interface of PCM-30 (to Thai Binh TPP 220kV
switchyard) to telephone at A0.
Northern Regional Load Dispatch Center A1
- Provide 01 modem at A1 for transmitting control-dispatch signals to Thai Binh TPP.
- Use the existing DC-48V power system at A0 to supply power to the modem.
- Communication cabling from 2W interface of PCM-30 (to Thai Binh TPP 220kV
switchyard) to telephone at A1.
Notes:
- Agreement and connection works with entities such as EVN Telecom, Power
Transmission company No 1, A0, A1 for allowing to install, use equipment and
providing channel, transmission line for connecting Thai Binh TPP to the national grid are
recommended NPT to implement via project Thai Binh TPP 220kV transmission line
Thai Binh 220kV substation line and extending bay at Thai Binh 220kV substation.
- PCM-30 and Teleprotection equipment provided by Thai Binh TPP at Thai Binh TPP
(220kV switchyard, Centre Control Building) and equipment provided by NPT at Thai
Binh 220kV substation, VT1 shall be compatible.

212
CHAPTER 4: LIST OF COMMUNICATION EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS
TO BE PROVIDED IN THIS PROJECT

No
Name of equipment, material
Specification requirement
Unit Quantity Notes
1 STM-4 Optical transmission
equipment
- Standard: ITU-T, ETSI
- In Compliance with the
regulations of CORBA,
Multiservice Switching Forum.
- Connecting to STM-4 equipment
at 220kV Thai Binh substation
equipped by NPT by L-4.1
interface
at Thai Binh 2 TPP 220kV
switchyard and STM-1 equipment
at Centre Control Building of Thai
Binh TPP by I-1 interface.

Set 01 Installed at Thai Binh TPP
220kV switchyard
2 STM-1 Optical transmission
equipment
- Complying with regulations of
CORBA, Multiservice Switching
Forum.
at Thai Binh TPP 220kV
switchyard by I-1 interface.

Set 01 Installed in the Centre
Control Building of Thai
Binh TPP
3 ETSI 19 equipment cabinet Cabinet 03 Thai Binh TPP 220kV
switchyard: 02
Centre Control Building of
Thai Binh TPP: 01

4 MDF/DDF cable distribution
support
- Block 2Mbit/s (E1) : > 63 gates
- Subscriber Block
(including lightening filter, power
Support 02 Installed at Thai Binh TPP
220kV switchyard and
Centre Control Building of
Thai Binh TPP.

213
lightening protection for all gates):
200 pair
- Complete accessories yes
- Provided synchronous with
STM-4, PCM-30 equipment.

5 NMOC nonmetallic optical cable
- Standard: IEC, IEEE, ITU-T
- Optical fibre : ITU-T G.652
- Number of Optical fibre : > 12
fibres
m 800 Connecting 220kV
switchyard to Centre
Binh TPP: 500m
Connecting from the
entrance tower to
telecommunication room
of 220kV switchyard
6 HDPE twisting plastic pipe m 800 - NMOC optical cable
protection
7 PCM-30 channel multiplexing
equipment
- Configuration : Drop-Insert
- Communication at transmission
line: E1
- Communication at terminal: > 30
channels
Nx64Kbps/G.703 (N > 1)
Nx64Kbps/V24/V35/V36 (N > 1)
V.35/ s 64Kbps
Nx64Kbps/X.21/RS-530
2/4W E&M
2W VF FXO, FXS
To be compatible with PCM-30
equipped by NPT at 220kV Thai
Binh substation and VT1
Set 02 - 220kV switchyard : 01
- Centre Control Building
of Thai Binh TPP: 01
8 Teleprotection
- Standard:
IEC-60834-1 (10/1999), IEC-
60870-2
ITU-T G.703.1; G.703.6
- Number of transmit commands:
Set 02 220kVswitchyard Thai
Binh TPP: 220kV

214
> 3 commands
- Transmission time : s 10ms
To be compatible with
Teleprotection equipped by NPT
at 220kV Thai Binh substation
9 Modem
SCADA/EMS signal transmission
between Thai Binh TPP and A0,
A1
To be compatible with existing
modem at A0, A1
Set 02 Installed in the 220kV
switchyard room: 02
10 DC-48V system:
- rectifier, charger
- Battery set
- lightening filter, lightening
protection.
System 02 Installed in the Centre
Binh TPP and 220kV
switchyard.
11 Accessories and materials for
connection
System 01


215
CHAPTER 5: DRAWINGS
See Volume 9 Bidding Drawing


216
APPENDIX 2:
SPECIALIZED REPORT ON SCADA SYSTEM OF THAI BINH TPP PROJECT

ATTACHMENTS:

1. IEC-60870-5-101 Protocol information to A0
2. IEC-60870-5-101 Protocol information to A1
3. List of SCADA signals
4. SCADA Commissioning Tests


217
CHAPTER I - GENERAL
1.1 The legal basis:
- The process of National Load Dispatch Center, number QTDD-11-2001, issued by
Decision No. 56/2001/QD-BCN on 26/11/2001 by the Ministry of Industry.
- Official Letter No. 3396/CV-EVN-KTLD dated August 07, 2002 of Electricity of
Vietnam on directing implementation of connecting SCADA / EMS system to the
electrical system.
- Document No. 1325/CV-EVN-KTLD dated March 29, 2004 of Electricity of Vietnam
on regulation for energizing for acceptance of the power plant and substation for item
of checking switching operating remotely via SCADA system of Regional Load
Dispatch Center and the National Load Dispatch Center .
- Document No. 6872/CV-EVN-KTLD-DDQG dated December 24, 2007 issued by
Vietnam Electricity on requiring SCADA connection for operation of electrical
system.
- Regulation for construction and operational management of the SCADA equipment of
substations and power plants, issued together with Decision No. 1208/QD-EVN,
dated July 28, 2008 of Vietnam Electricity.
- Document No. 1301/NPT-KT, dated 27/05/2009 of the National Transmission
Corporation on the implementation of SCADA item, SCADA agreement and
measuring for investment, improve and upgrade, expand the substation projects.
- Circular No. 12/2010/TT-BCT of the Ministry of Industry and Trade on regulating
transmission system, issued on 15/4/2010.
1.2. Preliminary description for Thai Binh TPP
Thai Binh TPP is built at My Loc commune, Thai Thuy District, Thai Binh Province, left
bank of the Tra Ly River with total capacity 2x300MW
Thai Binh TPPs scope of work consists of the TPP and 220kV switchyard.
1.3. Scope of implementation:
The elements of the Thai Binh TPP shall be considered for controlling, monitoring from
SCADA system as follows:
Elements of the plant include:
- Two (02) sets of generator-transformer: G1-GT1 and G2- GT2. Each generator has a
capacity of 300MW. Generator transformer has a ratio of 220/19kV.
- Two (02) unit transformers 19/6.6/6.6 kV
- 6.6 kV busbar
Elements of 220kV switchyard include:
- 08 modules for switchgear according to the busbar diagram 3 / 2 for sections:
- 02 sections for 220kV lines to 220kV Thai Binh substation
- 01 section for start-up transformer 225kV/6.6/6.6 kV T1

218
- 02 sections to the plant (connecting with 02 sets of generator- transformer)
- 220kV Bus bar
The content of the work to be performed includes:
- Installation of equipment and materials for SCADA connection in Thai Binh TPP,
National Load Dispatch Center (A0) and Northern Region Load Dispatch Center (A1)
- Testing equipment in Thai Binh TPP
- RTU configuration declaration
- Point to point connection test
- Testing connection with National Load Dispatch Center (A0)
- Testing connection with Northern Region Load Dispatch Center (A1)


219
CHAPTER 2: SCADA CONNECTION
2.1. Solution for SCADA system
To implement SCADA functions for elements on 220kV switchyard side and in Thai Binh
TPP, a RTU system will be considered to be equipped and placed in the control building of
220kV switchyard of Thai Binh TPP.
2.2. Communication protocols
The protocol used for connections between the SCADA system of Thai Binh TPP with the
Load Dispatch Centres shall comply with the protocol IEC-60870-5-101 (Refer to
Information Protocol in Attachment 1)
2.3. Information exchange between the plant and National Load Dispatch Center (A0)
and Northern Region Load Dispatch Centre (A1)
Pursuant to the single line diagram of Investment Project, based on the requirements of the
load dispatching operation, based on regulations for construction and equipment operation
management of SCADA of substation and power plants issued together with decision No.
1208/QD-EVN dated July 28, 2008, requiring minimum signals exchanging between Thai
Binh TPP and SCADA system as follows:
2.3.1. Northern Region Load Dispatch Center will perform the following functions:
a. Monitoring:
Northern Region Load Dispatch Center will monitor all electrical equipment of the
switchyard such as transformers, circuit breakers, disconnectors, earthing switches.
Details are as follows:
Status signals:
- Circuit Breaker: close / open"
- Disconnector: close / open"
- Earthing switch: close / open"
Warning, alarm signals, indication:
- The common signals such as AC, DC source failures; warning about communication
systems, fire alarm ...
- Alarm signals when protections acting, failure of protector.
- The alarms, warnings and indicators of Local/Remote control mode of the switchyard.
The measurement signals:
- For busbar: voltage (kV), frequency (f)
- For transformer: voltage (kV), amperage (A), active power (MW), reactive power
(MVAR) at different voltage levels of transformer, tapping of voltage regulator of
transformer.
- For line feeder: voltage (kV), amperage (A), active power (MW), reactive power
(MVAR).


220
b. Control:
Northern Region Load Dispatch Center will control transformers, circuit breakers,
disconnectors of 220kV switchyard and reactive power of unit generators of Thai Binh TPP.
- The control signals "close/open" for circuit breakers, disconnectors.
- Adjust the increase/decrease of reactive power or setting the value to adjust reactive
power of unit generators.
- Adjust the increase/decrease of transformer voltage.
2.3.2. National Load Dispatch Center will perform the following functions:
a. Supervision:
National Load Dispatch Center will supervise all electrical equipments in the plant and
switchyard such as generators, transformers, circuit breakers, disconnectors, earthing
switches.
Status signals:
- Generator: "Operation/no operation"
- Circuit Breaker: "close/open"
- Disconnector: "close/open"
- Earthing switch "close/open"
Alarm signal, warning, indication:
- Common signals such as AC or DC source failures; warning about communication
- Alarm signals when protection relays operate, failures of protections .
- The alarms, warnings and indicators of Local/Remote control mode of the plant.
Measurement signals:
- For busbar: voltage (kV)
(MVAR)
- For unit: active power (MW), reactive power (MVAR), terminal voltages (kV), high
adjust limit (MW), Low adjust limit (MW)
transformer
- For the whole plant
- Total active power of the plant (MW)
- Total reactive power of the plant (MVAR)


221
b. Control:
National Load Dispatch Center will control the transformers, circuit breakers, disconnectors
of Thai Binh TPP.
- Signal control type "Increase/Decrease" or set the value to adjust the active power of
the generators.
SCADA signal numbering to be discussed will be shown in the attachment.
2.4. Equipment requirements for SCADA
2.4.1. Channels for SCADA system
Data transmission Channel from the SCADA system of Thai Binh TPP to National Load
Dispatch Center A0 and Northern Region Load Dispatch Center A1 is designed as follows:
- Thai Binh TPP A0 : 01 channel
- Thai Binh TPP A1 : 01 channel
Detailed specifications for data transmission channels mentioned in the Specialized Report
on the Communication System for Thai Binh TPP Project 2 x 300 MW as per Appendix 1.
2.4.2. RTU system connected to the load dispatch centers
RTU System in control building of 220kV switchyard shall be equipped including:
- RTU centre cabinet including I /O card for input/output signals with back-up level for
each signal of at least 20%.
- SIC cabinet including transducers, intermediate relay and control relay
- All accessories including clamps, signaling cable, cable labels, the core, laces, clad...
The service for SCADA connection, RTU connected to A0 and A1 will have four ports:
- 02 ports (one main, one standby) to connect to A0
- 02 ports (one main, one standby) to connect to A1
2.4.3. Modem for SCADA connection
To ensure connection from the RTU in control building of 220kV switchyard of Thai Binh
TPP to National Load Dispatch Center A0 and Northern Region Load Dispatch Center A1, a
modem will be provided in pairs, one at the switchyard control building and one at the Load
Dispatch Centers.
The modems to be supplied are detailed in the special report on telecommunications system
of Thai Binh TPP with the following specifications:
2.4.3.1. Modem for connection Thai Binh TPP - National Load Dispatch Center A0
Equipped at control building of 220kV switchyard:
- Modem Type: Telenetics Stand-Alone:
- Model: MIU 14.4L (4-Wire leased line modem)

222
- Serial interface: RS232
- Power supply: 48-220V AC / DC
Equipped at A0:
- Modem Type: Myriad Modem Cards (expansion cards mounted on the existing board)
- Model: MD 14.4L (4-Wire leased line modem)
- LEDs: Power, DTR, TxD, RxD, MR, CD, PTS, CTS, RI
- Connection rate: 9600bps (in the range from 1200bps- 9600bps)
2.4.3.2. Modem for connection Thai Binh TPP - Northern Load Dispatch Center A1:
Use the same model type to equip the control building of 220kV switchyard and A1:
- Modem Type: Westermo
- Model: TD23 DC
- Serial interface: RS232
- Power supply: 36-55VDC
- Connection rate: 1200bps (in the range from 1200bps - 9600bps)


223
ATTACHMENT 1. IEC-60870-5-101 PROTOCOL INFORMATION TO A0

I. Link and common address
For Thai Binh TPP gateway, both Link address and Common address of ASDU are set to the
same value:

GATEWAY SYSTEM NLDC
THAI BINH TPP 1

II. IEC-60870-5-101 protocol functions

1. Format class FT 1.2
2. Network configuration
- Point-to-point
3. Physical layer
- Both control and monitor directions: Unbalanced interchange circuit. The baud rate is
1200, 2400, 4800 or 9600 bit/s depends on the configuration of transmission line.
4. Link layer
- Link transmission procedure: Unbalanced
- Address field of the link: 1 Octet
- Frame length: 255 maximum
5. Application layer
- Common address of ASDU: 1 Octet
- Information object address: 2 Octets
- Cause of transmission: 1 Octet
- Process information in monitor direction:
<1>:= Single-point information (M_SP_NA_1)
<3>:= Double-point information (M_DP_NA_1)
<30>:= Single-point information with time tag CP56Time2a (M_SP_TB_1)
<31>:= Double-point information with time tag CP56Time2a (M_DP_TB_1)
<9>:= Measured value, normalized value (M_ME_NA_1)
<13>:= Measured value, short floating point value (M_ME_NC_1)
With point information, ID type <1> and <3> are used on General Interrogation phase, ID
type <30> and <31> are used on Spontaneous change (Note that the time tags should be
CP56Time2a, i.e. full time).

224
With measured value, ID type <9> or type <13> is used on both General Interrogation
phase and Spontaneous change. Tap position indicator and power export/import are
considered as measured value ID type <9> or <13>.
<45>:= Single command (C_SC_NA_1)
<46>:= Double command (C_DC_NA_1)

- For CB, DS
<47>:= Regulating step command (C_RC_NA_1)
- For Transformer TAP control
<48>:= Set point command, normalized value (C_SE_NA_1)
- For power generation set point control.
- System information in control direction:
(station specific parameter)
<100>:= Interrogation command (C_IC_NA_1)
Note that, control of ID type <46>, <47> are Select-Before-Operate (SBO). Control of ID
type <48> are Direct-Operate (SBO).

III. IOA range
SIGNAL TYPE/SYSTEM
NLDC
IOA
Single Digital Input 15000 to 24999
Double Digital Input 25000 to 42999
Analog Input 1 to 1999
Digital Output 43000 to 65535
Analog Output 2000 to 14999


225
ATTACHMENT 2. IEC-60870-5-101 PROTOCOL INFORMATION TO A1

I. Link and common address
For Thai Binh TPP gateway, both Link address and Common address of ASDU are set to the
same value:
GATEWAY SYSTEM NRLDC
THAI BINH TPP 100

II. IEC-60870-5-101 protocol functions
1. Format class FT 1.2
2. Network configuration
- Point-to-point
3. Physical layer
- Both control and monitor directions: Unbalanced interchange circuit. The baud rate is
1200, 2400, 4800 or 9600 bit/s depending on the configuration of the transmission
line.
4. Link layer
- Link transmission procedure: Unbalanced
- Address field of the link: 1 Octet
- Frame length: 255 maximum
5. Application layer
- Common address of ASDU: 1 Octet
- Information object address: 2 Octets
- Cause of transmission: 1 Octet
<1>:= Single-point information (M_SP_NA_1)
<3>:= Double-point information (M_DP_NA_1)
<30>:= Single-point information with time tag CP56Time2a (M_SP_TB_1)
<31>:= Double-point information with time tag CP56Time2a (M_DP_TB_1)
<9>:= Measured value, normalized value (M_ME_NA_1)
<13>:= Measured value, short floating point value (M_ME_NC_1)
With point information, ID type <1> and <3> are used on General Interrogation phase, ID
type <30> and <31> are used on Spontaneous change (Note that the time tags should be
CP56Time2a, i.e. full time).

226
With measured value, ID type <9> or type <13> is used on both General Interrogation
phase and Spontaneous change. Tap position indicator and power export/import are
considered as measured value ID type <9> or <13>.
<45>:= Single command (C_SC_NA_1)
<46>:= Double command (C_DC_NA_1)
- For CB, DS
<47>:= Regulating step command (C_RC_NA_1)
- For Transformer TAP control
<48>:= Set point command, normalized value (C_SE_NA_1)
- For power generation set point control.
- System information in control direction:
(station specific parameter)
<100>:= Interrogation command (C_IC_NA_1)
Note that, control of ID type <46>, <47> are Select-Before-Operate (SBO). Control of ID
type <48> are Direct-Operate (SBO).

III. IOA range
SIGNAL TYPE/SYSTEM
NRLDC
IOA
Single Digital Input 15000 to 24999
Double Digital Input 25000 to 42999
Analog Input 1 to 1999
Digital Output 43000 to 65535
Analog Output 2000 to 14999


227
ATTACHMENT 3: LIST OF SCADA SIGNALS

TYPE No CATEGORY STATE MEANING SIGNAL NAME
S
/
S

C
O
M
M
O
N

G
E
N
E
R
A
T
O
R

(
a
t

t
e
r
m
i
n
a
l
)

B
U
S
B
A
R

L
I
N
E

F
E
E
D
E
R

T
R
A
N
S
F
.

H
.
V
O
L
T
A
G
E

S
I
D
E

T
R
A
N
S
F
.

M
.

V
O
L
T
A
G
E

S
I
D
E

T
R
A
N
S
F
O
R
M
E
R

T
A
P

C
H
A
N
G
E
R

C
I
R
C
U
I
T

B
R
E
A
K
E
R

I
S
O
L
A
T
O
R

E
A
R
T
H
I
N
G

I
S
O
L
A
T
O
R

INTERNAL RTU SIGNAL RTU FAULT X
DATA ACQUIRED FROM RTU
ATM
1 ANALOG F FREQUENCY - POWER PLANT / S/S 220kV) X
2 ANALOG A AMPERE X X X
3 ANALOG K V VOLTS X X X X
4 ANALOG M W MEGAWATTS X X X
5 ANALOG M X MEGAVARS X X X
6 ANALOG T P I TAP CHANGER X
7 ANALOG AGC-HIGH AGC-HIGH REGULATING LIMIT
8 ANALOG AGC-LOW AGC-LOW REGULATING LIMIT
TOTAL PER BAY :
ATM-Total

228
TSS-1B
1 HEALTH 1 ALARM DC SYSTEM 48V FAULT X
4 HEALTH 1 ALARM RECTIFIER 48V FAULT X
5 HEALTH 1 ALARM AC SYSTEM 220V/ 380V FAULT X
6 HEALTH 1 ALARM COMMUNICATION PLC FAULT X
7 HEALTH 1 ALARM COMMUNICATION OPTICAL/RADIO/MICROWAVE FAULT X
8 HEALTH 1 ALARM FIRE ALARM (When applicable) X
9 HEALTH 1 ALARM
SWITCHING EQUIPMENT NOT READY
(AIR / OIL / SF6 / MECHANICAL)
X X W
10 HEALTH 1 ALARM EQUIPMENT FAULT X X
11 PROTECTION 1 OPERATED BUSBAR PROTECTION - MAIN X
12 PROTECTION 1 OPERATED BUSBAR PROTECTION - BACKUP (when applicable) X
13 PROTECTION 1 OPERATED BREAKER FAILURE PROTECTION X X
14 PROTECTION 1 OPERATED OVERVOLTAGE (OVERFLUXING FOR GENERATOR TRANSFORMER) X
X(
*)

15 PROTECTION 1 OPERATED UNDERVOLTAGE PROTECTION X
16 PROTECTION 1 OPERATED LINE DISTANCE PROTECTION ZONE 1 X
19 PROTECTION 1 OPERATED LINE DIFFERENTIAL PROTECTION X
20 PROTECTION 1 OPERATED DIRECTIONAL OVERCURRENT PROTECTION (67/67N) X X
21 PROTECTION 1 OPERATED OVER CURRENT PROTECTION (50/51) X X X
22 PROTECTION 1 OPERATED EARTHFAULT OVER CURRENT PROTECTION (50/51N) X X X
23 PROTECTION 1 OPERATED INTERTRIP-SENT X
24 PROTECTION 1 OPERATED INTERTRIP-RECEIVED X

229
25 PROTECTION 1 OPERATED AUTORECLOSE ORDER X X
26 PROTECTION 1 OPERATED TRANSFO. OVERLOAD PROTECTION ALARM X
27 PROTECTION 1 OPERATED TRANSFO. OVERLOAD PROTECTION TRIP X
28 PROTECTION 1 OPERATED EQUIPMENT (VOLTAGE) UNBALANCE PROTECTION W
29 PROTECTION 1 OPERATED EQUIPMENT DIFF. PROTECTION DIFFERENTIAL STAGE
30 PROTECTION 1 OPERATED TRANSFO. DIFFERENTIAL PROTECTION - MAIN X
31 PROTECTION 1 OPERATED TRANSFO. DIFFERENTIAL PROTECTION - BACKUP X
32 PROTECTION 1 OPERATED RESTRICTED EARTH FAULT PROTECTION X
33 PROTECTION 1 OPERATED TRANSFO. BUCCHOLZ X
34 PROTECTION 1 OPERATED TRANSFO. BUCCHOLZ X
35 PROTECTION 1 OPERATED PRESSURE RELIEF RELAY X X
36 PROTECTION 1 OPERATED OIL TEMPERATURE PROTECTION TRIP X X
37 PROTECTION 1 OPERATED OIL TEMPERATURE PROTECTION ALARM X
38 PROTECTION 1 OPERATED WINDING TEMPERATURE PROTECTION TRIP X
39 PROTECTION 1 OPERATED WINDING TEMPERATURE PROTECTION ALARM X
40 PROTECTION 1 OPERATED EQUIPMENT TRIP X X X
41 INFORMATION 1 LOCAL OPERATIOIN MODE REMOTE/LOCAL X X X X X X W
42 INFORMATION 1 DISABLE RTU REMOTE CONTROL X
TOTAL PER BAY :
TSS - TOTAL :
TSS-2B
1 INFORMATION 10/01 OPEN / CLOSE SWITCHING EQUIPMENT STATUS X X X X

RCS-2B
1 TELECONTROL 1+1 OPEN / CLOSE SWITCHING EQUIPMENT CONTROL X X W
2 TELECONTROL
1+1 OR
SETPOINT
RAISE / LOWER TAP CHANGER CONTROL X

230
3 TELECONTROL
1+1 OR
SETPOINT
ACTIVE POWER
INCREASE/DECRE
ASE
GENERATOR ACTIVE POWER CONTROL X
TOTAL PER BAY :
RCS - TOTAL :

Note:
W Where applicable
* Apply for generator transformers only
X Latest modification

231
Attachment 4. SCADA Commissioning Tests

No

Test Scope Unit Quantity
I
Connecting test from Thai Binh TPP to National Load Dispatch Center A0 (End - to - End)
1 Measurement signal (Analog Input):
Plant:
- 02 Generator Transformers GT1, GT2: 08 signals for each
Transformer measuring: U, I, P, Q at 220kV side
- Two Generators G1, G2: 12 signals, each Generator measuring:
- U, I, P, Q (terminals)
- P high limit (MW)
- P low limit (MW)
- 6.6 kV Busbar 1A, 1B, 2A, 2B, 0A, 0B: 06 signals, each Busbar
section measuring 01 voltage signal U
- Total capacity of the whole plant: 02 signals
- Total Active Power (P total) of the plant
- Total Reactive Power (Q total) of the plant
220kV switchyard:
- 02 (two) 220kV line sections : 08 signals, each section measuring: U,
I, P, Q.
- 02 (two) 220kV Busbars TC1 and TC2: 04 signals
Each Busbar measuring frequency (f) and voltage (U)
- Transformer T1: 13 signals, each Transformer measuring:
- U, I, P, Q for the 220kV side
- U, I, P, Q for the 6.6 kV side
- The position of the step of the voltage regulator
Signal 53
2 Warning signal (Single Input):
- Signal for the whole plant including 07 signals:
- 01 signal to administration control SCADA / Substation
- 01 fire alarm signal
- 01 alarm signal for failure of 48V DC power source
Signal 178

232
- 01 alarm signal for failure of 220V DC power source
- 01 alarm signal for failure of AC 220/400V power source
- 01 failure signal of information equipment
- 01 failure signal in the RTU system

Plant:
- 02 sections of Generator Transformers GT1, GT2: 24 signals
Each section of Generator Transformer including:
- 02 Differential protection signals of Transformer for tripping
- 01 Earth Fault protection signal inside Transformer for tripping
- 01 Over Current protection signal for tripping
- 01 Over Load protection alarm signal
- 01 level 1 Buchholz protection signal for alarming
- 01 level 2 Buchholz protection signal for tripping
- 01 protection signal of Transformer pressure for tripping
- 01 Oil temperature protection signal for tripping
- 01 Winding temperature protection signal for tripping
- 01 protection failure relay signal
- 01 signal for administration of Local / Remote
- 02 sections of Generators G1 and G2: 34 signals
Each section including:
- 01 Differential protection signal of Generator for tripping
- 01 Differential protection signal of excitation Transformer for
tripping
- 01 Stator Earth Fault protection signal for tripping
- 01 protection signal of Rotor Earth Fault at one point.
- 01 protection signal of Rotor Earth Fault at two points for
tripping
- 01 Over Current protection signal for tripping
- 01 Over Voltage protection signal for tripping
- 02 Over Load protection signals for tripping
- 01 Over Excitation protection signal for tripping
- 01 Loss of Excitation protection signal for tripping
- 01 Reverse Power protection signal

233
- 01 Negative-sequence Over Current protection signal
- 01 protection relay failure signal
- 01 signal Local / Remote
- 01 Generator failure signal
- 01 Generator trip signal

- 02 sections of unit Transformer (19/6.6/6.6 kV): 28 signals
Each Transformer including:
- 02 Earth Fault protection signals inside Transformer for
tripping
- 03 Overcurrent protection signals for tripping
- 01 Over Load protection alarm signal
- 01 protection signal of Transformer Over Pressure for tripping
220kV switchyard:
- 02 sections for 220kV line to Thai Binh: 22 signals
Each section consists of 11 signals:
- 01 Differential protection signal for tripping
- 01 level 1 Distance protection signal for tripping
- 01 Directional Overcurrent protection signal for tripping (67)
- 01 Directional Earth Fault Overcurrent protection signal for
tripping(67N)
- 01 Instantaneous Overcurrent protection signal for tripping (50)
- 01 IDMT Overcurrent protection signal for tripping (51)
- 01 Differential protection signal of Busbar for tripping
- 01 auto reclose relay signal

234
- 08 modules 220kV Circuit Breaker: 40 signals
Each module consists of 05 signals:
- 01 Circuit Breaker failure protection signal for tripping
- 01 SF6 low gas signal
- 01 unavailable Circuit Breaker signal
- 01 lock position signal Local/Remote

- Transformer T1 including 21 Signals
- 01 Differential protection signal for Busbar
tripping (67N)
- 03 Instantaneous Overcurrent protection signals for tripping
(50)
- 03 IDMT Overcurrent protection signals for tripping (51)
- 01 Transformer overload protection signal
- 01 OLTC pressure protection signal for tripping
- 01 Transformer over pressure protection signal for tripping
- 01 signal Local/Remote
- 220kV Busbar including 02 signals
- 01 Busbar protection signal for tripping
- 01 protection failure signal
3 Status Signal of Disconnectors, Circuit Breakers, Earthing blades (Double
Input)
Plant
- 02 sections 19/6.6/6.6 kV Unit Transformer: 04 signals, each section
Signal 55

235
including:
- 02 Circuit Breaker signals close/open
- 02 Generator terminals Circuit Breakers : 02 Circuit Breaker signals
close/open
220kV switchyard
- 02 sections of 220kV line : 06 signals each section of the line
including:
- 01 Disconnector signal
- 02 Earthing blade signal
- 08 220kV Circuit Breaker modules : 40 signals
Each module includes:
- 01 Circuit Breaker signal
- 02 Disconnector signals
- 02 Earthing blade signals
- 01 section of T2 Transformer : 03 signals
Each section includes:
4 Control signal for Generator, Circuit Breaker (Double Output)
Plant
- 02 Generators G1, G2: 08 signals, each Generator including:
- 02 speed signals of increase capacity AGC High/Low
- 01 signal of increase/decrease Active Power P
- 02 Generator terminals Circuit Breakers : 02 signals each Circuit
Breaker including:
- 01 signal open / close
Signal 9

No

Test Scope Unit Quantity
II Connecting test from 220kV switchyard to the Northern Region Load Dispatch Center A1
(End - to - End)
1 Setting database for measuring signal (Analog Input): Signal 25

236
220kV switchyard:
- 02 sections 220kV line: 08 signals, each section measuring: U, I, P,
Q
- 02 (two) 220kV Busbars TC1 and TC2: 4 signals
Each Busbar measuring frequency f, voltage U
- Transformer T1: 13 signals
- U, I, P, Q for the 220kV side
- U, I, P, Q for the 6.6 kV side
- Step position of the voltage regulator
2 Warning signal: (Single Input)
220kV switchyard:
- Common Signal including 07 signals:
- 01 signal to administration control SCADA/Substation
- 01 fire alarm signal
- 01 alarm signal 48V DC
- 01 alarm signal 220V DC
- 01 alarm signal AC 220/400V
- 01 failure signal of information equipment
- 01 failure signal in the RTU system
- 02 sections for 220kV line to Thai Binh: 22 signals
Each section consists of 11 signals:
- 01 current Differential protection signal for tripping
tripping (67N)
- 01 Instantaneous Overcurrent protection signal for tripping (50)
- 01 IDMT Overcurrent protection signal for tripping (51)
- 01 Differential protection signal of Busbar for tripping
- 01 auto reclose relay signal
- 01 protection relay failure signal .
- 08 modules 220kV Circuit Breaker: 40 signals
Signal 92

237
Each module consists of 05 signals:
- 01 Circuit Breaker failure protection signal for tripping
- 01 SF6 low gas signal
- 01 unavailable Circuit Breaker signal
- 01 protection relay failure signal .
- 01 lock position signal Local / Remote
- Transformer T1 including 21 Signals
- 01 Differential protection signal for Busbar
tripping (67N)
- 03 Instantaneous Overcurrent protection signals for tripping
(50)
- 03 IDMT Overcurrent protection signals for tripping (51)
- 01 Transformer overload protection signal
- 01 OLTC pressure protection signal for tripping
- 01 Transformer Over Pressure protection signal for tripping
- 01 signal Local/ Remote
- 220kV bus bar including 02 signals
- 01 Busbar protection signal for tripping
- 01 protection failure signal
3 Status Signal of Disconnectors, Circuit Breakers, Earthing blades (Double
Input)
220kV switchyard
- 02 sections 220kV line : 06 signals
each section of the line including:
Signal 49

238
- 08 220kV Circuit Breaker modules : 40 signals
Each module includes:
- 01 section T2 Transformer : 03 signals
Each section includes:
4 Control signal for Disconnectors, Circuit Breakers, Transformer (Double
Output)
Plant
- 02 Generators G1, G2: 02 signals, each Generator including:
- 01 signal increase / decrease of reactive power
220kV switchyard
- Two sections 220kV line: 02 signals
Each section of the line including:
- 08 220kV Circuit Breaker modules: 24 signals
Each section including:
- 1 section of T2 Transformer : 02 signals
Including:
- 01 signal Increase / Decrease voltage
Signal 30

III Connecting test (Point - to - point).
1 ANALOG INPUT (AI) Signal Signal 53
2 SINGLE INPUT (SI) signal Signal 178
3 DOUBLE INPUT (DI) signal Signal 55
4 DOUBLE OUTPUT (DO) signal Signal 39

239

IV RTU configuration declaration. Set 1

V Equipment Test
1 Transducer U, I, P, Q testing Set 10
2 Transducer U test Set 2
3 Intermediate relay test Set 188


240
APPENDIX 3:
SPECIALIZED REPORT ON CONNECTION TO NATIONAL POWER GRID OF
THAI BINH TTPP PROJECT

CHAPTER 1: THAI BINH POWER CENTRE CONNECTION ALTERNATIVE
Thai Binh Power Centre includes 2 Thermal Power Plants, with capacity of:
- Thai Binh Thermal Power Plant: 2300 MW
- Thai Binh 2 Thermal Power Plant: 2600 MW
Pursuant to Decision No 4409/Q-BCT dated August 20, 2010 of the Ministry of Industry
and Trade on Approval of plan of connecting Thai Binh Power Centre to the national grid,
Thai Binh Power Centre shall be connected to the national grid at a voltage level of 220kV.
Constructing synchronous works connecting Thai Binh Power Centre to the national grid:
Substation:
- Tien Hai 220kV substation with capacity of 125MVA
- Truc Ninh 220kV substation with capacity of 2x250MVA (replacing Trinh Xuyen
substation)
- Thai Thuy 220kV substation
220kV Transmission line:
- Thai Binh Power Centre Thai Binh double circuit line with a length of 30km,
3x400mm2 conduct.
- Thai Binh Power Centre Tien Hai Truc Ninh double circuit line with a length of
68km, 2x400mm2 conduct.
- Double circuit line with a length of about 25km, 2x330mm2 conduct from Truc Ninh
220kV substation connecting to Ninh Binh-Nam Dinh line.
- Thai Binh Kim Dong 220kV double circuit line with a length of about 47km,
3x330mm2 conduct.
- Thai Binh Thai Thuy double circuit line with the length of about 20km

CHAPTER 2: LOCAL POWER NETWORK CONNECTING TO THAI BINH
POWER CENTRE
The following substations and lines are around Thai Binh 1 Thermal Power Plant:
- Thai Binh 220kV substation with a capacity of 2125MVA.
- Nam Dinh 220kV substation with a capacity of 2125MVA.
- Ninh Binh 220kV substation with a capacity of 2125MVA.
- Thai Binh-Dong Hoa 220kV transmission line

241
- Thai Binh Nam Dinh Ninh Binh 220kV transmission line
According to the national power development plan (Master Plan No 6), it is anticipated that
the following works shall be implemented:
Increasing the capacity of the Substation:
- Thai Binh 220kV substation: up to 2015, the capacity of the substation will be
increased to 2250MVA.
- Nam Dinh 220kV substation: up to 2010, the capacity of the substation will be
increased to 125 + 250MVA, up to 2020 the capacity of the substation will be
increased to 2250MVA.
- Ninh Binh 220kV substation: in 2010 the capacity of the substation will be increased
to 125+250MVA.
Substations to be newly constructed:
- Bim Son 220kV substation: capacity of 1125MVA (up to 2010), 2125MVA (up to
2015).
- Truc Ninh (Trinh Xuyen) 220kV substation: capacity of 1250MVA (up to 2015),
2250MVA (up to 2020).
- Ninh Binh 2 220kV substation (replacing Ninh Binh 2 thermal power plant): capacity
of 1250MVA (up to 2020).
- Kim Dong 220kV substation: capacity of 1250MVA (in 2010), up to 2015 the
capacity shall be increased to 2250MVA.
- 220kV Pho Cao substation: capacity of 1250 (up to 2020).
- Hai Hau 220kV substation: capacity of 1250 (up to 2020).
- Tien Hai 220kV substation: capacity of 1250 (up to 2020).
Transmission lines to be newly constructed:
- Thai Binh- Nam Dinh - Ninh Binh second line.
- Pho Noi-Kim Dong 220kV transmission line (2010), Kim Dong-Thai Binh (up to
2015).
- Pha Lai-Thai Binh 220kV transmission line (2010).

The calculation and examination of alternative connections for Thai Binh Thermal power
plant to the national grid is done based on the consideration of power generation alternative
of large Power Centres in the region such as Nam Dinh Power Centre (1200MW in the period
of 2016-2020 and 2400MW in the period of 2021-2025) and Hai Duong Power Centre
(1200MW in the period of 2011-2015). These power centres directly affect the connection
alternative of connecting Thai Binh thermal power plant to the national grid.
In which:
- Nam Dinh thermal power plant, capacity of 1200MW in the period of 2016-2020.
With consideration to the period of 2021-2025 the capacity of Nam Dinh Power
centre is 2400MW. Generating voltage level is 500kV (Nam Dinh 1 thermal power

242
plant) and 220kV (Nam Dinh thermal power plant. The power is mainly transmitted
via Nam Dinh thermal power plant Pho Noi 500kV transmission line. The 220kV
side shall supply power to the regional 220kV substation: Bim Son 220kV substation,
Ninh Binh 220kV substation and Ninh Binh 2 220kV substation.
- Hai Duong thermal power plant (1200MW) shall be connected to the national grid by
220kV voltage level, the power is transmitted via Hai Duong TPP Gia Loc Pho
Noi, Hai Duong TPP Pha Lai and Hai Duong TPP Hai Duong 2 220kV
transmission line.

CHAPTER 3: THE ONGOING POWER NETWORK WORKS ACCORDING TO
THE PLAN
Thai Binh thermal power plant (Thai Binh TPP):
Works to be synchronous with Thai Binh TPP: AC3x400mm2 Thai Binh TPP Thai Binh
double circuit line has a length of 30km (according to Decision No 527B/Q-BCT dated
September 29, 2008 on Approval of Investment Project for construction of Thai Binh
thermal power plant).
The ongoing power network in the project area according to the master plan No VI:
- Thai Binh- Nam Dinh - Ninh Binh 220kV second line.
- Thai Binh Kim Dong 220kV double circuit (to be implemented up to 2015).
- Thai Binh Pha Lai 220kV single line.

CHAPTER 4. THAI BINH TPP SWITCHYARD
4.1 SCOPE OF CONNECTING SWITCHYARD
According to the Vietnam Power Network Master Plan as well as aforementioned power
network calculation conditions and connection plan selection the 220kV switchyard of Thai
Binh Power Centre shall be connected with the regional network under Thai Binh Thermal
Power Plant project ( now changing name as Thai Binh Thermal Power Plant project
following Decision No. 0823/BCT-NL dated January 20, 2010) and Thai Binh 2 Thermal
Power Plant project approved by Ministry of Industry and Trade as follows:
- Two 220kV outgoing feeders to 220kV Thai Binh substation.
- Two 220kV outgoing feeders to Thai Binh TPPs generators.
- One feeder to service the start-up supply for Thai Binh TPP.
- Two spare 220kV feeders for connection to Thai Binh 2 TPPs generator transformer .
- One spare feeder to service the start-up supply for Thai Binh 2 TPP.
- Two 220kV outgoing feeders to 220kV Tien Hai substation
- Six 220kV spare feeders for connection to Thai Binh 2 TPP and development in the
future

243
Through the results of calculation for connection alternatives Thai Binh TPP switchyard shall
be connected with the national power network at a voltage level of 220kV and include the
following feeders:
- Two 220kV outgoing feeders to 220kV Thai Binh substation.
- Two 220kV outgoing feeders to Thai Binh TPPs generators.
- One feeder to service the start-up supply for Thai Binh TPP.
- One 220kV spare feeder for connection in the future

4.2 Main Technical solutions for the switchyard
4.2.1 Single line diagram
The 220kV switchyard of Thai Binh TPP shall operate under a 3/2 scheme complying with
diagram of Thai Binh Thermal Power Plant project and Thai Binh 2 Thermal Power
Plant project approved by Ministry of Industry and Trade.
The 220kV outgoing feeders will be equipped for Thai Binh TPP including 2 line sections,
generator transformer bays and one start-up transformer bay which will be used for outdoor
installation of circuit breakers, disconnectors, voltage transformers, current transformers ....
4.2.2 Equipment arrangement layout
The switchyard shall be designed as both outdoor and indoor. 220kV distribution equipment
and transformer shall be located outdoor. Computer system, protection and control system,
auxiliary systems and telecommunications shall be located indoors.
Thai Binh TPP 220kV Switchyard shall be constructed and operated independently from Thai
Binh 2 TPP 220kV Switchyard. The operation of equipment of Thai Binh TPP 220kV
Switchyard shall be carried out from the Centre Control Building of Thai Binh TPP 220kV
Switchyard.
4.3 Solution for connecting primary part
4.3.1 Connection switchyard with the regional grid
4.3.1.1 Connection to Thai Binh 220 kV substation
Thai Binh TPP 220 kV switchyard to Thai Binh 220kV substation will be installed outdoors
for both feeders. Thai Binh TPP 220kV double circuit transmission line AC3x400mm2
Thai Binh 220kV substation will be connected from the transmission tower of the line to the
gantry beam of the two feeders to Thai Binh of Thai Binh TPP 220 kV switchyard.
4.3.1.2 Connection to Thai Binh 2 TPP 220 kV switchyard
Thai Binh TPP 220 kV switchyard will be connected with Thai Binh 2 TPP 220 kV
switchyard via a busbar circuit breaker section:
- In normal operation mode the busbar circuit breaker will be closed to support flexible
capacity transmission between the two plants:
- In emergency mode the busbar circuit breakers will trip to reduce short circuit fault
current and at the same time isolate the failure point with the other switchyard.


244
The busbar circuit breaker section will be equipped in Thai Binh TPP 2 area. The bus bar
circuit breaker section between the two plants is also a very convenient location of the power
metering for power purchasing.
4.3.2 Connection with Thai Binh TPP
4.3.2.1 The 220kV side
The 220kV switchyard will be connected with Thai Binh TPP via two 220kV feeders to the
generator transformers and one 220kV feeder to the start- up transformer of Thai Binh TPP.
At these feeders outdoor equipment such as circuit breakers, disconnectors, current
transformers, voltage transformers ....will be installed. From the Thai Binh TPP switchyard a
double circuit line ACSR500 connection to the high voltage terminals of the generator
transformers in Thai Binh TPP will be built.
4.3.2.2 The 6.6 kV side
The 220kV outdoor equipment for the 44MVA- 220kV start-up transformer of the plant will
be installed in the switchyard. The start-up source will supply electricity to the auxiliary
system of the plant and start motors via the power cable system connections from the 6.6 kV
side of the auxiliary transformer to the auxiliary system of the plant
4.4 Control and protection Solution
220kV switchyard components shall be equipped with control equipment & protection relays
which are compatible with the control & protection system of Thai Binh TPP. The control
equipment & protection relay shall be designed in compliance with the relevant Vietnamese
standards, regulations of EVN and other popular international standards.
4.4.1 System control Solution
There are 4 levels of control and monitoring for 220kV switchyard:
- From the Northern Regional Load Dispatch Centre and National Load Dispatch
Centre.
- From the Central Control Room of Thai Binh TPP
- From the Central Control Room of the 220kV switchyard (including two locations)
- Workstations of computerised control system.
- Back-up control cubicles.
- From the switching equipment (Circuit Breakers, disconnectors, etc).
The computerised control system and Remote Terminal Unit (RTU) for the 220kV
switchyard shall be designed and integrated with the control and monitoring system of Thai
Binh TPP. From the Central Control Room of the 220kV switchyard the main functions of
the computerised control system for 220kV switchyard shall be:
- Closing/Opening of circuit breakers, disconnectors, motor controlled earthing
switches with synchro-check and interlocking.
- Increasing/decreasing transformer voltage and transformer cooling system control.
- Position indication of circuit breakers, isolators, earthing switches and transformer tap
changers.

245
- Measurement of the main parameters A, V, W, VAR, Wh, VARh of transmission
lines and every side of transformers as well as indication of oil temperature and
winding temperature of transformers.
- Archiving and processing data, recording faults.
The backup for the computer system and backup control cubicle with logic hard wiring shall
be equipped for 220kV switchyard.
4.4.2 Protection relay solution
In compliance with EVN regulations for protection of the 220kV switchyard equipment the
adopted protection relays shall be digital relays with microprocessors and be capable of
communicating with the computerised control and SCADA systems. The main solutions shall
be considered and applied as follows:
a. 220kV transmission line:
Each line shall be equipped with two protection circuits. In each circuit the main protection
shall be differential protection and distance protection. Backup protection shall include
directional over current protection, overcurrent protection, etc. Auto-reclose with synchro-
check functions shall be also installed.
Note: differential protection relays shall be equipped and compatible with the opposite ends
b. 220kV circuit breaker bay:
Each bay shall be equipped with breaker failure protection, busbar protection and synchro-
check functions.
c. 225/6/6kV transformers:
Together with the buchholz relay, oil temperature relay, oil level relay, etc., each transformer
shall be equipped with two protection circuits. In each protection circuit the main protection
shall be differential protection. Back-up protection functions shall include directional over
current protection, over current protection, etc. Auto voltage regulation shall also be installed.
d. 220kV busbars:
Differential protection shall be equipped with numerical distributed busbar protection.
4.5 SCADA system solution
Pursuant to the single line diagram of the Investment Project, based on the requirements of
the load dispatching operation and based on the regulations for construction and equipment
operation and management of SCADA of substations and power plants issued together with
decision No. 1208/QD-EVN dated July 28, 2008 requiring minimum signal exchang
between Thai Binh TPP and SCADA system as follows:
- Communication exchange between the plant and National Load Dispatch Centre (A0)
and Northern Region Load Dispatch Centre (A1)
4.5.1 Northern Region Load Dispatch Centre will perform the following functions:
a. Monitoring:
Northern Region Load Dispatch Center will monitor all electrical equipment of the
switchyard such as transformers, circuit breakers, disconnectors, earthing switches.

246
Status signals:
- Circuit Breaker: close / open"
- Disconnector: close / open"
- Earthing switch: close / open"
Warning, alarm signals, indication:
- The common signals such as AC, DC source failures; warning about communication
- Alarm signals when protections acting, failure of protector.
- The alarms, warnings and indicators of Local/Remote control mode of the switchyard.
The measurement signals:
- For busbar: voltage (kV), frequency (f)
transformer.
(MVAR).
b. Control:
Northern Region Load Dispatch Center will control transformers, circuit breakers,
disconnectors of 220kV switchyard and reactive power of unit generators of Thai Binh TPP.
- Adjust the increase/decrease of reactive power or setting the value to adjust reactive
power of unit generators.
- Adjust the increase/decrease of transformer voltage.
4.5.2 National Load Dispatch Centre will perform the following functions:
a. Supervision:
National Load Dispatch Center will supervise all electrical equipments in the plant and
switchyard such as generators, transformers, circuit breakers, disconnectors, earthing
switches.
Status signals:
- Generator: "Operation/no operation"
- Circuit Breaker: "close/open"
- Disconnector: "close/open"
- Earthing switch "close/open"
Alarm signal, warning, indication:

247
- Common signals such as AC or DC source failures; warning about communication
- Alarm signals when protection relays operate, failures of protections .
- The alarms, warnings and indicators of Local/Remote control mode of the plant.
Measurement signals:
- For busbar: voltage (kV)
(MVAR)
- For unit: active power (MW), reactive power (MVAR), terminal voltages (kV), high
adjust limit (MW), Low adjust limit (MW)
transformer
- For the whole plant
- Total active power of the plant (MW)
- Total reactive power of the plant (MVAR)
b. Control:
National Load Dispatch Center will control the transformers, circuit breakers, disconnectors
of Thai Binh TPP.
- Signal control type "Increase/Decrease" or set the value to adjust the active power of
the generators.

4.6 Power metering system for power purchasing
4.6.1 Scale of the power metering:
To facilitate the purchase and sale of power between the plant and EVN a metering cubicle
cabinet will be installed. Data collection and metering data services will be performed by the
devices including:
- PC computer with software, power meters, modems, telephone subscribers, wiring
boxes CT, VT and accessories ... From the PC at the plant or the meters the data from
the meters will be transmitted to the communication Centre of EVN.

Pursuant to promulgated regulations the power metering system for power trading in Thai
Binh TPP will be scaled as follows:
Main metering system located at:
- 02 points on the 220kV side of 02 transformers GT1, GT2

248
- 01 point on the 220kV side of auxiliary transformer 225 / 6.6 / 6.6 kV T1
Standby metering system No.1 located at:
- 03 points adjacent to the metering point of the main metering system.
- Feeders for the 02 220 kV transmission lines to Thai Binh 220kV substation.
- 02 sections of the 220 kV (installed under Thai Binh 2 TPP project) N
4.6.2 Functions of power metering system
4.6.2.1 Main power metering system:
The main power metering system shall determine accurately and completely the measurable
quantities of power trading as a basis for payment of power between Vietnam Electricity and
Thai Binh TPP.
4.6.2.2 Standby metering system:
- Backup for the main metering system as a basis for calculating the quantity of power
trading in the case where the main metering system is not working correctly or under
failure.
- Supervise and cross check the results of the main metering system under normal
operation of the main metering system.
- Combine with the main metering system and other standby metering systems to
calculate power production capacity for payment in some special cases.
4.6.2.3 The requirements for the power metering system:
- Ensure sufficient supply of parameters and necessary data for the main metering
system and standby metering systems to determine power for purchase / sale; to
monitor operating condition, reliability of the metering system.
- Automatically record and store in the meters all the values and power index for both
import and export at 24:00 hours on the last day of the billing period.
- Automatically collect metering data of main metering points and standby metering
points.
- Metering data is collected automatically on computer for storage which is the basis
for determining power purchasing / selling in the period.
- Automatic recording of quantities of active power at the identified metering points at
a period every 30 minutes for both import and export of power.
- Power exchange data at metering points is collected daily, stored at Thai Binh TPP,
then transmitted to the Communication Centre of EVN as a basis for management and
system operation of the metering system and verifying the reliability of metering data.
4.6.3 Configuration of power metering system:
Configuration of power metering system in Thai Binh TPP shall include:
- Current transformers

249
- Connection boxes for power metering
- The power meters
- Metering circuits
- Metering cubicle
- Equipment for data collection and transmission of metering data
- Safety equipment, sealing position, seal

4.7 COMMUNICATION SYSTEM
4.7.1 Arrangement of optical transmission route.
The arrangement of the optical communication route from 220kV Thai Binh TPP to Thai
Binh 220kV substation will provide communication channels for the 220kV transmission line
Thai Binh TPP and Thai Binh 220kV substation protection relay system and incorporate
communication channels for SCADA system from A0, A1 to Thai Binh TPP.
The arrangement of the optical communication route on NMOC cable between the 220kV
Thai Binh switchyard and Thai Binh TPP Centre Control Building:
- Provide NMOC/12SM optical cable for connection of 220kV switchyard to the Centre
Control Building with distance of 500m
- Provide for transmission channel capacity between the 220kV switchyard and the
Thai Binh TPP Centre Control Building optical communication route at a bandwidth
of STM-1 (Equivalent to speed of 155.52Mbps).
- The function of this communication route is to be a communication line connecting
hotline system to A0, A1 and PABX room located in Centre Control Building to the
Power sector communication network via forwarding at 220kV Thai Binh switchyard.
4.7.2 Communication channels arrangement.
4.7.2.1 Communication channel for control - supervision signals for Thai Binh TPP
Thai Binh TPP will be equipped with an RTU system at the 220kVswichyard. Signals from
the SCADA/EMS system at the Plant and switchyard will be transmitted to the RTU and sent
to A0, A1 by connection between the RTU at the Plant and preprocess computer (Front-End)
at A0 and A1, using communication protocol IEC 60870-5-101.
Communication channels between the RTU and PCU will use a V24/RS-232 connection of
the multiplexing equipment PCM-30. Signals from the RTU will be transferred through a
modem to change into communication signals according to ITU-T V24 standard.
Thai Binh TPP will be controlled directly from A0, A1 through hotline telephone, using 2W
channel of PCM-30 channel multiplexing equipment.
4.7.2.2 Communication channel for protection relay.
The signal circuits of the No.1 protection relays (Differential protection, directional earth
fault protection and inter-tripping signal) will be transmitted directly through optical fibre of
optical communication route 220kV Thai Binh TPP switchyard Thai Binh 220kV station.

250
The signal of circuit of the No.2 protection relays (Distance protection, directional earth
fault protection and inter-tripping signal) will be transmitted via communication equipment
from the protection relays (Teleprotection) and modified into a communication signal to be
transmitted through the Digital E1(2Mbps) ITU-T G.703.6 channel of the optical
transmission equipment SDH/STM-4 at the 220kV Thai Binh TPP switchyard 220kV Thai
Binh substation.
4.7.2.3 Channels connecting switchboards at Thai Binh TPP to Power sector
switchboards:
Additionally provide trunking card 4W E&M for the HICOM300 switchboard at 220kV Thai
Binh substation to connect to the switchboard at Thai Binh TPP through optical transmission
route: Centre Control Building 220kV Thai Binh switchyard 220kV Thai Binh substation.
Additionally provide trunking card E1 for the existing Flexible 6000 switchboard at Northern
Telecommunication Center VT1 to connect with the switchboard at Thai Binh TPP through
optical communication route: Centre Control Building 220kV Thai Binh switchyard
220kV Thai Binh substation and existing optical transmission routes of Power Sector.
Provision of trunking card 4W E&M for the HICOM300 switchboard at 220kV Thai Binh
substation and trunking card E1 for the Flexicom 6000 switchboard at VT1 is considered
part of the project 220kV Thai Binh TPP transmission line 220kV Thai Binh substation
and extension of bay at 220kV Thai Binh substation .
4.7.2.4 LAN/WAN Connection
Provision of Ethernet gate on SDH and PCM-30 equipment at Thai Binh TPP to connect
LAN of Thai Binh TPP to WAN of Power sector.

5. CONCLUSION AND RECOMMENDATION
5.1. Conclusion.
After analyzing the calculation result of the connection alternative in Chapter 4 it can be
concluded that the Thai Binh Power Centre connection alternative ensures the transmission t
of power from Thai Binh Power Centre to the national grid.
5.2. Recommendation.
In order to safely and stably transmit power from Thai Binh Power Centre to the regional
220kV network it is recommended that:
Implement the works which are synchronous with Thai Binh 2 TPP:
- Truc Ninh 220kV substation (Trinh Xuyen): according to master plan No VI, Trinh
Xuyen 220kV substation shall be constructed in the period of 2011-2015. It is
recommended that the substation shall be constructed in Truc Ninh district, Nam Dinh
province and changed into Truc Ninh 220/110kV substation. Truc Ninh 220kV
substation and Thai Binh 220kV substation are key substations to transmit the power
of Thai Binh 2 TPP to 220kV line and they are also the supply source substations for
the 110kV substations in the area. Therefore, it is recommended that Truc Ninh
substation should be put into operation in 2012.
- Tien Hai 220kV substation.

251
- Thai Binh TPP Tien Hai - Truc Ninh 220kV transmission line.
- 220kV Truc Ninh line connects to Nam Dinh-Ninh Binh line (4 circuits): connecting
to Nam Dinh-Ninh Binh double circuit line. Currently Thai Bnh-Nam Dinh-Ninh
Binh 220kV line is a single circuit line. The Investment Project Report for the second
line section from Thai Binh Nam Dinh and Nam Dinh - Ninh Binh was approved
(now it is in technical design period). The progress of the works should be sped up in
order to connect 4 circuits from Truc Ninh connect to this line.


252
APPENDIX 4:
SPECIALIZED REPORT ON TARIFF METERING SYSTEM OF THAI BINH
THERMAL POWER PLANT PROJECT

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL

1. Basis for preparing power metering project for power purchasing
Measurement Ordinance was issued on October 06, 1999 by the Ministry of Science,
Technology and Environment.
Regulation of technical requirements of power metering equipment for power plants, issued
together with Decision No. 02/2007/QD-BCN dated January 09, 2007 of the Minister of
Ministry of Industry.
Letter No. 4894 CV / EVN-TTD-KD & DNT on: Design and install metering systems of
power plants, substations, issued on September17, 2007 by Vietnam Electricity.
Circular No. 12/2010/TT-BCT on: Regulation of electricity transmission system, issued on
April15, 2010 by the Ministry of Industry and Trade.
Letter No. 5276/QD-BCT on approval of the investment project of Thai Binh TPP
construction, dated September 29, 2008 of the Ministry of Industry and Trade.
2. Brief description of Thai Binh TPP
Thai Binh TPP includes the Plant and 220 kV switchyard.
The Plant includes:
- Two generator transformer units: G1-G2-GT1 and GT2. Each generator has a
capacity of 300MW. Transformer has rate of 220/19kV
- Two generator terminals auxiliary transformers 19/6.6/6.6 kV+ 6.6 kV Bus bar
220kV switchyard includes:
- 8 breaker modules under bus bar diagram 3 / 2 for the sections:
- Two 220kV transmission line bays to Thai Binh 220kV substation
- One bay for start up transformer 225kV / 6.6 / 6.6 kV T1
- Two feeders sections to the Plant (connected to two generator transformer
units)
- 220kV Bus bar
3. Scale of tariff metering part
Pursuant to promulgated regulations the power metering system for power trading in Thai
Binh TPP will be scaled as follows:
Main metering system located at:
- 02 points on the 220kV side of 02 transformers GT1, GT2
- 01 point on the 220kV side of auxiliary transformer 225 / 6.6 / 6.6 kV T1

253
- 03 points adjacent to the metering point of the main metering system.
- Feeders for the 02 220 kV transmission lines to Thai Binh 220kV substation.
- 02 sections of the 220 kV (installed under Thai Binh 2 TPP project) N


254
CHAPTER 2. TARIFF METERING SYSTEM

1. Functions of tariff metering system

a. Main tariff metering system :
The main power metering system shall determine accurately and completely the measurable
quantities of power trading as a basis for payment of power between Vietnam Electricity and
Thai Binh TPP.
b. Standby metering system :
- Backup for the main metering system as a basis for calculating the quantity of power
trading in the case where the main metering system is not working correctly or under
failure.
- Supervise and cross check the results of the main metering system under normal
operation of the main metering system.
- Combine with the main metering system and other standby metering systems to
calculate power production capacity for payment in some special cases.
c. The requirements for tariff metering system:
- Ensure sufficient supply of parameters and necessary data for the main metering
system and standby metering systems to determine power for purchase / sale; to
monitor operating condition, reliability of the metering system.
- Automatically record and store in the meters all the values and power index for both
import and export at 24:00 hours on the last day of the billing period.
- Automatically collect metering data of main metering points and standby metering
points.
- Metering data is collected automatically on computer for storage which is the basis
for determining power purchasing / selling in the period.
- Automatic recording of quantities of active power at the identified metering points at
a period every 30 minutes for both import and export of power.
- Power exchange data at metering points is collected daily, stored at Thai Binh TPP,
then transmitted to the Communication Centre of EVN as a basis for management and
system operation of the metering system and verifying the reliability of metering data.
2. Configuration of tariff metering system
Configuration of power metering system in Thai Binh TPP shall include:
- Current transformers
- Connection boxes for power metering
- The power meters
- Metering circuits

255
- Metering cubicle
- Equipment for data collection and transmission of metering data
- Safety equipment, sealing position, seal
3. Technical requirements for tariff metering system
3.1 Current Transformers
a. General requirement
- Having individual metering secondary coils used for metering equipment and tariff
meters.
- Nominal secondary current to be 1A.
- Have a tamper seal location on the cover of the connection box for metering
secondary coils supplied for metering equipment and tariff meters that ensures there
has been no impact to the connection circuit if the seal is not broken.
- Current transformer for main metering shall have an accuracy level of 0.2 according
to IEC-60044-1 or other equivalent standards.
- Current transformer for standby metering shall have an accuracy level of 0.5
according to IEC-60044-1 or other equivalent standards
b. Current transformers for main metering point and standby No.1 metering point
- Current transformer ratio: 400-800-1200/1A (for T1 220kV transformer side)
800-1200-2000/1A (for 02 of 220kV transformers side)

- Number of secondary coils: 06
- Accuracy level and rating:
- Coil 1: Accuracy level 0.5-30VA for standby No.1 metering system &
metering transducer
- Coil 2: Accuracy level 0.2-30VA for main metering system
- Coils 3,4,5,6: Accuracy level 5P20-30VA for protection
c. Current transformers for standby No.2 metering point
- Current transformer ratio: 800-1200-2000/1A.
- Accuracy level and rating:
- Coil 1: Accuracy level 0.5-30VA for standby No.2 metering system
- Coil 2: Accuracy level 0.5-30VA for metering transducer
- Coils 3,4,5,6: Accuracy level 5P20-30VA for protection
3.2 Voltage transformers
a. General requirement

256
- Having individual metering secondary windings for metering equipment and tariff
meters.
- Nominal secondary system voltage is 110V AC
- Have a tamper seal location on the cover of the connection box for metering
secondary windings supplied for metering equipment and tariff meters that ensures
there has been no impact to the connection circuit if the seal is not broken.
- Voltage transformer for main metering shall obtain accuracy level of 0.2 according to
IEC-60044-2 for induction voltage transformer, IEC-60044-5 for capacitor voltage
transformer or other equivalent standards.
- Voltage transformer for standby metering shall obtain accuracy level of 0.5 according
to IEC-60044-2 for inductive voltage transformer, IEC-60044-5 for capacitor voltage
transformer or other equivalent standards.
b. Voltage transformers for main tariff metering point and standby No.1 tariff metering
point
- Capacitance of capacitor: 4400pF
- Voltage transformer ratio:
kV
3
11 , 0
/
3
11 , 0
/
3
11 , 0
/
3
11 , 0
/
3
220

- Number of secondary windings: 4
- Accuracy level, rating:
- Coil 1: Accuracy level 0.2-50VA for main metering system
- Coil 4: Accuracy level 3P-50VA for protection.
c. Voltage transformers for standby No.2 metering point
- Capacitance of capacitor: 4400pF
- Voltage transformer ratio :
kV
3
11 , 0
/
3
11 , 0
/
3
11 , 0
/
3
220

- Accuracy level, capacity:
- Coil 3: Accuracy level 3P-50VA for protection.
3.3 Outdoor Marshalling Kiosk for tariff metering
- Intended use: to connect current circuits, voltage circuits for tariff metering. The
voltage transformer and current transformer shall be in side by side compartments and
connected in a single marshalling kiosk, details are as follows:

257
- 01 marshalling kiosk for voltage transformer and current transformer of Thai Binh
220kV line bay
- 01 marshalling kiosk for voltage transformer and current transformer of Thai Binh 2
220kV line bay
- 03 marshalling kiosks for voltage transformer and current transformer conforming
with 3 sections: 220kV side of T1 transformer and 02 Thai Binh TPP transformers.
- Method of lead sealing: clamp rows for current circuits, voltage circuits and the
cubicle doors shall be lead sealed and protected.
- Cubicle shall have lighting provided and heating facilities,....
- Cubicle shall have protection level IP-55
- Dimensions:
- Width: 400mm
- Height: 600mm
- Depth: 300mm
3.4 Tariff meters
a. General specifications
- Nominal Current : 1A
- Voltage (Neutral Phase):
- Meter type: 3 phases 4 wires
- Integrated function and programmable electronic Meter
- Various price schedules
- Metering active power and reactive power for both import and export according to 4
quadrant angles.
- Have the function of metering maximum power; recording total load diagram
- Have the function of connecting with computer, collecting and reading data at local
and remote.
- Be energized from metering secondary voltage and keep operating upon loss of
voltage of 1 or 2 phases and the meters shall be provided with internal battery supply
for data storage.
- Having various hierarchies of passwords
- Have a tamper seal location for lead seals to prevent access to the wiring terminals or
changing the setting data in the meters that ensures there has been no impact to the
connection circuit if the seal is not broken.
- Have the function of storing metering data, load diagram for at least 60 (sixty) days
with circulation of metering less than 30 (thirty) minutes and can be programmed for
integral cycle.

258
- Be able to auto record number and duration of voltage loss, number of programming
and the time of programming.
- There is at least 01 RS232 standard communication port and 01 RS485 standard
communication port.
- Implement multi-drop bus connection method.
- Complying with data collection, tariff metering software used in the center EVN.IT:
IEE software of ITRON firm.
- Registered standard meter form to comply with the provisions of Measurement of
Ministry of Science, Technology and Environment issued on 06/10/1999.
- The main meter shall reach accuracy level 0.2 with active power complying with
IEC62053-22 and 2.0 for reactive power according to IEC62053-23 standard or other
equivalent standards.
- The standby meters shall reach accuracy level 0.5 with active power complying with
IEC62053-22 and 2.0 for reactive power according to IEC62053-23 standard or other
equivalent standards.
b. Installation position
- The main meters shall be installed at the meter cabinet M1.
- The standby No. 1 and No. 2 meters shall be installed at the meter cabinet: M2.
3.5. Metering cabinets
Location of Installation: in the relay room of the control building.
- Type of cabinet: indoor, degree of protection IP-41.
- Intended use: To install the meters for tariff metering.
- Lead seal method: sealed at clamp rows for current circuit, voltage circuit, voltage
circuit converter, cabinet doors in lead seal to protect.
- Cabinet shall be provided the lighting, drying facilities, cabinet cooling fan, ...
3.6. Tariff metering circuit:
- Secondary coils of CT, VT and secondary cables connected to tariff meters of the
main metering system shall be not be used for any other purpose and shall be
completely independent to the standby metering system.
- Secondary Cables of metering circuits shall be routed in the shortest path, with
minimum number of points connected through the terminals and be provided with
tamper seal locations for lead sealing of terminal strips or connection points.
Secondary Cables of the main metering system shall be routed individually and
directly connected with the connection box of CT, VT to metering cabinets without
going through terminal stip of intermediate cabinets.
- If the meters source voltage is from one of the busbar VTs through a voltage switch,
the wiring terminals of the voltage switch shall be lead-sealed and the tariff meter
shall be programmed to record the time and duration of voltage switching.
- Burden of the secondary circuit CT, VT, including tariff meter burden shall not
exceed the nominal burden of CT, VT.

259
- If the current circuit of the standby metering system is used in conjunction with other
instrumentation devices it shall not affect the accuracy of the metering system and
shall have provision for tamper sealing the entire current circuit, instrumentation
equipment, tariff meters.
- Test connection boxes shall be installed for testing instrumentation equipment and
under lead seal.
3.7. Data collecting and reading system of the tariff meter
- The tariff meters for power purchasing shall be installed so that the meter data can be
remotely interrogated and comply with connections and having protocols with remote
data collection software implemented in the data collect center.
- The meters for power purchasing shall be provided with communication ports,
integrated communication equipment complying with RS232 standard (or RS485,
Ethernet) and the modem in the meter shall allow remote connection to the meter via
modem and data transmission line.
- Depending on the model of data collection communication equipment the mode of
metering data transmission at a connection point shall be agreed between power buyer
and seller. The data collection system shall be provided with a local computer to read
and store data or via the centralized data collection device. Metering data collected at
the local computer shall be transmitted to the database of the server located at the data
collection center.
- Communication transmission environment shall use a dedicated telephone network.
Environment and mode of communication transmission shall be secured to prevent
unauthorized access.
- Communication equipment connected with the tariff meter shall be installed with
appropriate lightning protection equipment to avoid the effects of lightning impulse
spread through communication network causing damage.
- Transducers and isolation switches device test equipment connected network to a
public service telecommunication network (PSTN) installed in the panel shall be in
compliance with the safety requirements and facilitate system management.
3.8. Safety equipment, sealing position, lead seal and secure:
- The entire tariff metering system including secondary terminal boxes of the CTs and
VTs, tariff meters, terminations, connections, current circuits, voltage circuits,
auxiliary equipment, logic switches, meter cabinets and communication networks
shall be tamper seals to prevent unauthorized access.
- Tariff meter Software shall be password protected with various hierarchy of access
permissions.
- Tariff meter data after being read and transmitted to servers located in the metering
position shall be encoded to prevent unauthorized changes.
- Management Software of tariff metering data reading, transmitting and collecting
system shall be secured by various multiple levels of passwords to ensure the security,
accuracy and reliability of metering data.

260
CHAPTER 3: ESTABLISHING AND DEVELOPING DATA ACQUISITION FOR
TARIFF METERING SYSTEM
1. Purpose of a data acquisition system establishment
- Implementing and establishing automatic data reading, collection and transmission
system for metering power purchased between Thai Binh thermal power plant (Thai
Binh TPP) and Vietnam Electricity.
- Monitoring operation status and reliability of tariff metering system for delivering and
receiving power between Thai Binh thermal power plant and Vietnam Electricity.
2. Scope of data acquisition
Main power meters: TM-F1-2-1, TM-F2-2-1 and TM-F3-2-1
Standby tariff meters No1: TM-F1-2-2, TM-F2-2-2 and TM-F3-2-2
Standby tariff meters No 2: TM-F1-1-3 and TM-F2-1-3
3. Method of data acquisition and communication module connection of the meters:
3.1 Method of data collection:
For Thai Binh TPP data reading from meters shall be able to be performed according to the
two following methods:
- Local data reading: read from the meters or via the computer used for collection of
tariff metering data located at the station.
- Remote data reading: Tariff metering data of Thai Binh TPP can be read at
Information technology center of EVN according to one of the two following ways:
- Direct access to the meters
- Access to the computer used for collecting tariff metering data located at the
station.
Access, store and transmit the tariff metering data of Thai Binh TPP to 01 computer which
has software installed for collecting tariff metering data.
- Access to load diagram data daily (every 30 minutes) of meters at Thai Binh TPP
- Store past data for checking, comparing and establishing the necessary capacity
reports.
- Update data at the meters at Thai Binh TPP for treating meter failure.
- Data at 24:00h of the last day of the month shall be the base for NPT to issue power
selling invoice and for payment.
Automatic data reading and collection system for tariff metering and power purchasing
between Thai Binh TPP and Vietnam Electricity shall be designed to ensure the reading,
transmitting and receipt of data from electronic meters is precise and stable.
Automatic data reading and collection system for tariff meters located at Thai Binh TPP and
Vietnam Electricity can be cross-checked, monitored for proper operation of metering system
and automatically update tariff data purchased between the two bodies continuously, quickly
and precisely.

261
3.2 Connecting communication module of the meters
Acquisition of local metering data:
Meters are connected via communication modules according to RS 485 standard and multi-
drop bus connection. This type of connection allows connection of 32 meters. Tariff metering
data shall be acquired and transmitted to 1 computer used for acquiring tariff metering data
via 1 modem and PABX switchboard. This computer shall be equipped with software for
accessing and analyzing the metering data.
Acquisition of remote metering data
For collecting remote metering data, Thai Binh TPP shall be equipped with 1 modem and
telephone wires for the main meters, standby meter No. 1 and standby meter No. 2 which are
connected by multi-drop bus connection.
The meters shall be connected in parallel with each other via UTP-CAT5 cable, RS 485
modules. Data shall be transmitted to the computer used for collecting tariff metering data at
EVN and Thai Binh TPP via RS 232 module of master meter, 1 modem, PABX switchboard.
- Data from the meter will be read from the computer installed for the data collection,
processing and analyzing software located in Thai Binh TPP and in EVN. The local
and remote computers shall read data from meters and establish the charts, detailed
and consolidated reports for the entire tariff metering system purchased between Thai
Binh TPP and Vietnam Electricity.
- For the safety of the meters and communication equipment in the system, the
telephone lines connected to the meters shall be fitted with special lightning
protection equipment.
4. Operation specification
4.1. Auto data reading and collecting program:
- Through the data collection software of tariff metering, every day at specified time
(not the same time among the entities) the auto data reading program installed in the
computers of EVN and in the computers of Thai Binh TPP will automatically
connect to all meters to read the tariff data, the capacity of this meter and transmit it to
the database of the computer.
- From the data in the database, data collecting program will allow managing, setting
diagrams, detailed reports for each individual metering point as well as summary
reports for some meters depending on the specific requirements of the manager.
- Data required to be collected is as follows:
- Daily monitoring data:
- Data and chart on active power (P), reactive power (Q) for import and
generation in every 30 minutes.
- Total power for import and generation per day.
- Monthly monitoring data:
- Chart on active power (P), reactive power (Q) for import and
generation every 30 minutes in any day of the month.

262
- The total power (P, Q) for import and generation each day of the
month.
There are also summary reports as per the requirements for analysis and management
(depending on the requirements to be agreed and supplemented later).
4.2. Manual meter data reading program:
Use the data collection program of tariff metering installed in tariff metering data collection
computer of Thai Binh TPP to read the data in the meters, including the following
parameters:
- Instant data of capacity and power recorder at the time of data reading connection.
- Closing data of capacity and power recorder of the meter at 0 hour of the first day of
the month (meter is able to store closing data value of 13 last months).
- Information about the parameters of the meters metering circuit (current, voltage,
phase angle, power,...).
- Information about meters security (number and timing of meter programming, the
number and time of loss of voltage for meters, over current, meter hardware failure
detecting, low battery,....)
- Data channels load chart (kWh and kVarh for import and export) of the meter.

263
CHAPTER 4: LIST OF EQUIPMENT
List of equipment
No Name of equipment, material Unit
Quanti
ty
Notes
A Communication Equipment
1
PC Computer with configuration of at least:
Intel Core Duo 3,0 GHz, RAM 2GB, HDD
320 GB, DVD-RW/CDROM-RW, 17 LCD
Monitor, Keyboard, Mouse, Com, Serial
port, 4USB port, Windows XP.
Set 01

2
Modem connecting computer to PABX
switchboard.
Unit 01

3
Modem connecting meter to PABX
switchboard.
Unit 01

4
Software: Windows-XP or modern version,
Power Master, Unit Data Link Plus, Data
Vision.
Set 01
Attached with the
computer
5 Postal telephone subscriber
Listed in
Communication
part
6 Communication cable and accessories,
including:
At Control building of Thai Binh TPP
220kV switchyard
- Connecting from modem of the meter to
PABX switchboard (at Center control
building) : 500m
- Connecting from computer used for
collecting tariff metering data to PABX
switchboard (at Center control building) :
500m
At EVN headquarter-18 Tran Nguyen
Han:
- Connecting from computer used for
acquiring the tariff metering data of EVN IT
to existing modem: 50m
- Connecting from existing modem to PABX
switchboard of EVN Telecom VT1 : 150m
Set 01

B Equipment of secondary power part
1 Meter Cubicle M1 (including 3 meters and Cubicle 01

264
No Name of equipment, material Unit
Quanti
ty
Notes
accessories)
2
Meter Cubicle M2 (including 5 meters and
accessories)
Cubicle 01

3
Outdoor connection box for current circuit
and voltage circuit for tariff metering
Box 05

4 UTP-CAT5 communication cable and
accessories (for multi-drop bus connection
between meters) 8 pairs type, including:
At Control building of Thai Binh TPP
220kV switchyard:
- For multi-drop bus connection between
meters and modem of meter: 20m
- For connecting meter to computer used for
acquiring tariff metering data: 60m
Set 01

Volume 6 Electrical Equipment (Issuing Version of 27-01-2011)

Diunggah oleh

Informasi Dokumen

Hak Cipta

Format Tersedia

Bagikan dokumen Ini

Bagikan atau Tanam Dokumen

Opsi Berbagi

Apakah menurut Anda dokumen ini bermanfaat?

Apakah konten ini tidak pantas?

Hak Cipta:

Format Tersedia

Volume 6 Electrical Equipment (Issuing Version of 27-01-2011)

Diunggah oleh

Hak Cipta:

Format Tersedia

Socialist Republic of Vietnam

Anda mungkin juga menyukai